MM Sbmxgm120235 v00 en GB

Technical documentation
Maintenance Manual
Translation of original technical documentation
Sidel Matrix™ Blower Combi
SBO 20/20-20 P40 M

SBMXGM120235
2022-07-19
SIDEL Blowing & Services S.A.S

Avenue de la patrouille de France
76930 - Octeville sur mer, France
Tel : +33 (0)2 32 85 86 87 – www.sidel.com
SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Maintenance Manual / Table of contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. PRESENTATION OF THE MANUAL.......................................................................................................................................7

1. 1. Foreword.....................................................................................................................................................................7
1. 2. General information.................................................................................................................................................... 7
1. 2. 1. Remote access............................................................................................................................................. 7
1. 3. Using the procedures..................................................................................................................................................7
1. 3. 1. Information contained in the procedure bars................................................................................................ 7
1. 3. 2. Contents of the procedure files..................................................................................................................... 7
1. 3. 3. Using the procedures....................................................................................................................................7
1. 3. 4. Writing conventions.......................................................................................................................................8
1. 4. Documents supplied with the machine....................................................................................................................... 9
2. INFORMATION ON MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................................................... 11
2. 1. Information................................................................................................................................................................11
2. 2. Maintenance safety instructions............................................................................................................................... 11
2. 2. 1. Safety recommendations............................................................................................................................ 11
2. 2. 2. Safety pictograms....................................................................................................................................... 12
2. 3. Lockout / tagout areas for power sources and machine rotation.............................................................................. 13
2. 4. Required maintenance levels................................................................................................................................... 14
2. 4. 1. Definitions of maintenance levels............................................................................................................... 14
2. 4. 2. Classification of maintenance levels........................................................................................................... 15
2. 5. Greasing and lubrication...........................................................................................................................................15
2. 5. 1. Lubricant characteristics............................................................................................................................. 15
2. 5. 2. Lubrication plan...........................................................................................................................................19
2. 6. Cleaning agents........................................................................................................................................................19
2. 7. Oil specifications.......................................................................................................................................................20
2. 8. Water characteristics and treatment......................................................................................................................... 21
3. MAINTENANCE..................................................................................................................................................................... 27
3. 1. Maintenance schedule..............................................................................................................................................27
3. 2. Global maintenance plan.......................................................................................................................................... 28
3. 3. Maintenance procedures.......................................................................................................................................... 28
MP-B0001 : Checking the position of the mold opening/closing levers................................................................. 31
MP-B0002 : Cleaning / inspection of the locking finger holding box on mold support units...................................35
MP-B0003 : Degreasing / checking the teeth of the blow wheel drive ring and drive gear....................................37
MP-B0004 : Degreasing / checking the toothing on the oven drive ring and the drive pinion............................... 39
MP-B0005 : Checking the gap between the mold bases and the molds............................................................... 41
MP-B0006 : Checking the tripping sensors of the torque limiters.......................................................................... 43
MP-B0007 : Checking the quality of the water.......................................................................................................49
MP-B0008 : Cleaning / checking the infrared oven modules................................................................................ 61
MP-B0009 : Cleaning/checking the oven slit reflectors, dummy lamps and cooling shields..................................63
MP-B0010 : Inspection/cleaning: braking system.................................................................................................. 67
MP-B0011 : Degreasing/checking the self-lubricated cams.................................................................................. 77
MP-B0012 : Checking the tension on the timing belt............................................................................................. 79
MP-B0013 : Checking the alignment of the transmission belts..............................................................................81
MP-B0014 : Checking the guiding rollers of the unscrambler rollers..................................................................... 83
MP-B0019 : Replacing the oven cooling system filters..........................................................................................85
MP-B0020 : Replacing the grease cartridges of the oven automatic greasers......................................................87
MP-B0021 : Replacing the guide rings and the scraper seals on the stretching rods........................................... 91
MP-B0022 : Reconditioning the nozzles................................................................................................................ 95
MP-B0023 : Replacing the silencers of the mold support unit compensation solenoid valves............................ 113
MP-B0024 : Replacing the mold-support unit compensation system.................................................................. 115
MP-B0025 : Replacing the locking synthetic rollers of the mold support units.................................................... 123
Revision 00 © SIDEL - Translation of original technical documentation 3 / 508

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
MP-B0026 : Replacing the mold support unit dampers....................................................................................... 125

MP-B0027 : Replacing the transfer arm followers............................................................................................... 127
MP-B0028 : Replacing the tensioner wheel 3 sector guides............................................................................... 131
MP-B0029 : Replacing the exhaust silencers on the blow blocks........................................................................133
MP-B0030 : Replacing the rollers of the mold opening/closing levers.................................................................135
MP-B0031 : Replacing the filters of the pneumatic panel and the on-board air system...................................... 137
MP-B0032 : Replacing the silencers on the pneumatic control circuits............................................................... 149
MP-B0033 : Replacing the safety pin on the mold bases.................................................................................... 153
MP-B0034 : Reconditioning the oven spindles.................................................................................................... 155
MP-B0035 : Reconditioning the oven wheel........................................................................................................ 159
MP-B0036 : Replacing the rotary air union.......................................................................................................... 165
MP-B0038 : Replacing the mold support unit solenoids...................................................................................... 169
MP-B0039 : Reconditioning of blow blocks.........................................................................................................173
MP-B0041 : Reconditioning the mold opening/closing retractable guide.............................................................179
MP-B0042 : Replacing the transfer arm springs.................................................................................................. 185
MP-B0043 : Replacing the spindle chain............................................................................................................. 187
MP-B0045 : Removing / installing a nozzle......................................................................................................... 201
MP-B0046 : Replacing the bearings of the belt tensioners..................................................................................209
MP-B0047 : Replacing the transmission belts..................................................................................................... 213
MP-B0050 : Replacing the filters on the preform and bottle ejection actuators................................................... 217
MP-B0051 : Removal/refit: transfer arms.............................................................................................................219
MP-B0052 : Draining / filling the hydraulic lines...................................................................................................221
MP-B0053 : Removal / installation of a spindle section....................................................................................... 225
MP-B0054 : Removal/refit: heating module......................................................................................................... 231
MP-B0055 : Replacing the unscrambler roller drive belt......................................................................................235
MP-B0056 : Replacing and adjusting a conveyor belt......................................................................................... 241
MP-B0070 : Adjusting the tension of the spindle chain and the stationary chains...............................................253
MP-B0071 : Setting the tension on a transmission belt....................................................................................... 257
MP-B0072 : Cleaning and inspection of molds out of machine........................................................................... 259
MP-B0073 : Greasing the stretching guides........................................................................................................ 261
MP-B0074 : Greasing the transfer arm guides.................................................................................................... 263
MP-B0075 : Greasing the reducer motor bearing................................................................................................ 265
MP-B0076 : Greasing the mold base support guides.......................................................................................... 267
MP-B0077 : Greasing the oven wheel shaft bearings..........................................................................................269
MP-B0079 : Greasing the tensioner wheel guide................................................................................................ 271
MP-B0081 : Greasing the mold base carriage.....................................................................................................273
MP-B0084 : Checking and adjusting the viewfinder of an infrared camera......................................................... 275
MP-B0086 : Checking the mold support unit safety devices................................................................................277
MP-B0087 : Checking the operation of the blower emergency stop buttons and the door locked position......... 281
MP-B0088 : Checking the feeder emergency-stop buttons................................................................................. 287
MP-B0089 : Replacing the filters of the blower electrical cabinets...................................................................... 289
MP-B0090 : Replacement of lamps / inspection of lamp base protections and ceramic reflectors on oven
modules........................................................................................................................................... 291
MP-B0091 : Replacing a module of the beacon stack......................................................................................... 297
MP-B0093 : Replacing the filters on the feeder electrical cabinets......................................................................299
MP-B0095 : Replacing the batteries of the PLCs................................................................................................ 301
MP-B0096 : Replacing the battery of the feeder PLC..........................................................................................305
MP-B0099 : Calibrating the multi-parameter tester..............................................................................................307
MP-B0100 : Removal/refit: molds and mold bases..............................................................................................313
MP-B0103 : Cleaning/greasing the "FESTO" blow block.....................................................................................317
MP-B0106 : Adjusting the height of the unscrambler unit....................................................................................325
MP-B0107 : Adjusting the body guides of the stabilization rail............................................................................ 327
MP-B0108 : Adjusting the body guides of the infeed rail..................................................................................... 331
MP-B0109 : Adjusting the neck guides of the stabilization rail............................................................................ 333
4 / 508 © SIDEL - Translation of original technical documentation Revision 00

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
MP-B0112 : Greasing the mold support unit pivot shafts and the mold opening / closing lever shafts............... 337
MP-B0113 : Adjusting the unscrambler rollers ....................................................................................................339
MP-B0114 : Adjusting the stabilization rail...........................................................................................................345
MP-B0115 : Adjusting the infeed rail....................................................................................................................353
MP-B0116 : Adjusting the neck rim guides of the preform feeder....................................................................... 357
MP-B0118 : Checking the hinge points of the mold support units....................................................................... 361
MP-B0119 : Checking the height of the shell supports ...................................................................................... 363
MP-B0120 : Checking the mold base guide rails................................................................................................. 365
MP-B0136 : Setting the preform detection system at the machine infeed........................................................... 367
MP-B0137 : Checking the mold base safety pin.................................................................................................. 371
MP-B0146 : Replacing a mold base support up/down roller................................................................................373
MP-B0152 : Degreasing / cleaning the spindle rollers, the rails and the turnover ramps.................................... 377
MP-B0153 : Adjustment of bottle / mold transfer synchronization....................................................................... 381
MP-B0154 : Adjustment of the synchronism of the transfer preforms / mould.....................................................385
MP-B0155 : Reconditioning the spindle tips........................................................................................................ 389
MP-B0161 : Checking the height of the transfer arms......................................................................................... 391
MP-B0165 : Adjusting the height of the transfer arm rollers................................................................................ 395
MP-B0176 : Replacing the quartz bars................................................................................................................ 401
MP-B0177 : Checking spindle pins...................................................................................................................... 403
MP-B0180 : Cleaning / checking the magnet ways............................................................................................. 405
MP-B0185 : Adjusting the synchronization of the oven wheel / preform transfer................................................ 409
MP-B0186 : Replacing the preform infeed wheel cylinders................................................................................. 415
MP-B0187 : Replacing the ejection cylinders of the preform and bottle transfer wheels.....................................419
MP-B0188 : Replacing the ejection guide cylinder of the bottle outfeed wheel................................................... 421
MP-B0193 : Removal/refit: blow blocks............................................................................................................... 423
MP-B0197 : Checking the condition of pressurized circuits.................................................................................427
MP-B0205 : Checking the compensation boxes of the mold-support unit........................................................... 429
MP-B0208 : Adjusting the cooling shields and heating module supports............................................................ 433
MP-B0216 : Adjustment of dummy lamps (option) ............................................................................................. 439
MP-B0223 : Checking the guide rail of the stretching slides................................................................................445
MP-B0232 : Cleaning the cover of the 7 bar line 40 µm filter.............................................................................. 451
MP-B0233 : Cleaning / checking the air and water hoses................................................................................... 453
MP-B0234 : Signalling column operation check.................................................................................................. 455
MP-B0235 : Checking for proper operation of the manual rotation system presence safety...............................457
MP-B0236 : Hearing check of air leakage on the blower.....................................................................................459
MP-B0239 : Checking the attachment of the bottom plate of electrical boxes.....................................................461
MP-B0240 : Checking the indicator light of the electrical stretching coder.......................................................... 463
MP-B0241 : Checking the capacity of the UPS battery to retain a charge.......................................................... 465
MP-B0242 : Checking the mold opening / closing retractable guide................................................................... 467
MP-B0250 : Cleaning / checking the machine's lighting devices.........................................................................469
MP-B0251 : Replacing the machine's lighting devices........................................................................................ 473
4. APPENDIX........................................................................................................................................................................... 477
4. 1. Maintenance schedule............................................................................................................................................479
4. 2. Global maintenance plan........................................................................................................................................ 487
4. 3. Lubrication plan...................................................................................................................................................... 495
4. 4. Blower wheel kinematic.......................................................................................................................................... 497
4. 5. Greasing diagram of the mold support units...........................................................................................................499
4. 6. Pneumatic diagram.................................................................................................................................................501
4. 7. Hydraulic diagram...................................................................................................................................................503
4. 8. Oven kinematic....................................................................................................................................................... 505

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Maintenance Manual / Presentation of the manual
1. PRESENTATION OF THE MANUAL
1. 1. Foreword 000000
! Before using a work sheet, familiarize yourself with the operation and maintenance safety instructions. (see
User manual).
1. 2. General information 000000
The manual provides:

- Safety measures and precautions,
- Operating modes for preventive maintenance operations at levels 1, 2 and 3,
- The Maintenance Plan, the Autonomous Maintenance Schedule and the Lubrication Plan.
1. 2. 1. Remote access 000000
The machines can be equipped with devices that allow them to be controlled from remote location.
This possibility is present only if in accordance with specific contractual clauses.
1. 3. Using the procedures 000000
1. 3. 1. Information contained in the procedure bars 000000
1 2 3 4
1 Required maintenance level for the user, see chapter "Required maintenance levels"
2 Procedure title
3 Procedure number (MP = Maintenance Procedure, B = Blower, F = Filler, L = Labeller)
4 Page / number of pages
1. 3. 2. Contents of the procedure files 000000
The procedures contain the following information:

- The part of the machine at which the procedure will take place (if necessary) ,
- Specific safety precautions relating to the procedure,
- Specific conditions relating to the procedure (machine status),
- Equipment and materials required for the procedure (spare parts, specific tools, lubricants etc.),
- Procedures to be followed,
- Actions at the end of the operation.
1. 3. 3. Using the procedures 000000
❍ Initial status of the machine

The servicing procedures assume that the machine has been correctly installed, stopped normally (no faults) and has
been connected to the required fluid systems (high and low pressure air, water, electricity etc.).
If this is not the case, you should first ensure that the machine meets these requirements.
For any servicing procedure that requires the machine to be powered off and / or machine rotation to be
! blocked, the powering-off, blocking and locking operations are described in the corresponding servicing sheet.
❍ Basic precautions
Before using a work sheet:
- Comply with the operation and maintenance safety instructions,
- To ensure that all personnel involved possess the required profile and qualifications,
- To ensure that the correct lubricants and/or cleaning agents are used.
Before starting, make you that you have read the entire procedure, in order to:
- Identify the part of the machine at which the procedure needs to be carried out,
- Be familiar with the power supplies which must be switched off and locked out,

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
- Anticipate blocking and locking out machine rotation (if requested),

- Follow all safety precautions specific to the procedure,
- Obtain other procedure files as required,
- Identify and obtain equipment required for the procedure.
Always follow each step of the procedure in order.
❍ Final status of the machine
When you have completed a procedure, always check the following:
- That the area where the procedure has been carried out is clean,
- That no tools or foreign objects have been left behind,
- That the machine has been returned to production set up,
- That the machine does not pose any potential danger to the personnel and their surroundings.
1. 3. 4. Writing conventions 000000
❍ Symbols
Important sections of text will be accompanied by the following symbols:
Strictly prohibited.
! Obligatory before carrying out a procedure.
Warning, advice, recommendation or possible consequences of an action.

!
Remark or observation on the results of an operation.
i
Additional information located in a sub-chapter or another chapter in this manual or another manual.
i

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
❍ Symbols and writing conventions

Symbol or convention Signifies
Step number in the procedure file
Indicates a condition that must be met in order to carry

out an action (test - check - indirect action)
The part of the machine at which the procedure will take

place
Number reference: identifies an assembly, a sub-

assembly or a part
Color code: identifies and/or locates an assembly, a sub-

assembly or a part in an illustration
Alpha-numerical reference: identifies an assembly, a

sub-assembly or a part
Indicates the result of a step in the procedure
Highlight key words or phrases to make reading easier
Indicates a reference to another procedure or chapter
1. 4. Documents supplied with the machine 000000
- Preparation manual.
- User Manual.
- Maintenance Manual.
- Product Part List (general arrangement drawings and part-lists).
- Back-up copy of the "HMI" application.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Intentional blank page

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Maintenance Manual / Information on maintenance
2. INFORMATION ON MAINTENANCE
2. 1. Information 000000
! Respecting the recommended safety precautions, the procedures, the frequencies for the servicing procedures
and the materials requirements (oils, greases, tools etc.) will guarantee that your machine functions at the best
possible level. Non-respect of these recommendations may cause untimely wear and tear leading to loss of
warranty coverage, and therefore applicable warranty shall be deemed expired for all purposes without
charges or liability to SIDEL.
More generally non-respect of the recommendations may create unsafe situations that may expose individuals
to bodily injuries, for which SIDEL rejects any related liability.
The maintenance plan and the greasing plan refer to the servicing sheet numbers in the sheets catalogue.
The frequencies indicated for carrying out these operations are provided as a simple guide. The frequencies
i are calculated as follows:
- 24 machine service hours, (= 1 day).
- 125 machine service hours, (= 1 week).
- 250 machine service hours, (= 2 weeks).
- 500 machine service hours, (= 1 month).
- 1500 machine service hours, (= 3 months).
- 6000 machine service hours, (= 1 year).
- 12000 machine service hours, (= 2 years).
- 18000 machine service hours, (= 3 years).
❍ Initial and final condition of the machine
Before any maintenance servicing, the maintenance operator checks the following points:
! - The machine stops normally (without any fault),
- For HR machines, electrical heating of molds must be deactivated, see procedure "OP-B0028",
- The "HMI" application is not in setting mode,
- The power lockout / tagout recommendations are followed (power off and lock placed by maintenance
personnel).
For any servicing procedure that requires the machine to be powered off and / or machine rotation to be
! blocked, the powering-off, blocking and locking operations are described in the corresponding servicing sheet.
! When you have completed a procedure, always check the following

- That the area where the procedure has been carried out is clean,
- That no tools or foreign objects have been left behind,
- That the machine has been returned to production set up,
- That the machine does not pose any potential danger to the personnel and their surroundings.
2. 2. Maintenance safety instructions 000000
2. 2. 1. Safety recommendations 000000
! Obligation:
All personnel working on the machine must observe the safety regulations in force in their establishment.
For any use of the JOG (depending on procedure), the technician must be in possession of the control
box JOG throughout the duration of the works.
For interventions involving 2 technicians and using the manual rotation system, the 2 technicians must communicate
clearly with each other to coordinate their actions during any procedures.
When maintenance on the top of the machine is required, you must use a certified safety harness.
Warning:
!
All setting up operations, repairs, maintenance and adjustments may only be carried out by qualified and authorized
personnel who must be familiar with the instruction manual, the precautions specified by SIDEL and who must be

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
equipped with all necessary safety and protective equipment (safety shoes, blade cut protective gloves and safety
goggles).
Before any maintenance servicing, check the following points:
- The machine stops normally (without any fault),
- The "HMI" application is not in setting mode,
- For HR machines, electrical heating of molds must be deactivated, see procedure "OP-B0028",
- The power lockout / tagout recommendations are followed (power off and lock placed by maintenance
personnel),
- Before carrying any work on a component of a box or an electrical cabinet, you must wait 15 minutes after the
equipment has been switched off.
For any servicing procedure that requires the machine to be powered off and / or machine rotation to be blocked, the
powering-off, blocking and locking operations are described in the corresponding servicing sheet.
The key locked panels prevent access to moving parts. Only maintenance agents are authorized to open these panels
and they must take all precautions deemed necessary to avoid accidents.
Prohibited:
The machine doors are fitted with electrical safety devices. The doors prevent access to moving parts. Never by-pass
or disable a door electrical safety device in order to run the machine with an open door.
Do not modify parts of the machine in order to fit other devices without prior authorization from SIDEL. SIDEL will
accept no responsibility for consequences relating non-authorized modifications.
If the machine is equipped with UV (ultraviolet) lamps at the infeed rail and/or at the oven, it is strictly prohibited to
operate the machine or to switch on the lamps without the specified protections against UV rays (casing, protective
film, etc.). Exposure to UV rays is harmful to the skin and eyes.
None of the maintenance procedures require exposure to UV rays.
SIDEL prohibits any handling of stretching consoles, and prohibits any disassembly of the electrical stretching
slides. SIDEL shall accept no responsibility for any damages incurred if these rules are not
followed. Contact SIDEL without fail, for any exceptional needs involving handling and disassembly of these parts.
Never rotate the blow wheel by pushing or pulling it.
Never attempt any work on the machine during a "fixed or mobile solenoid valve test":
- Doors open, the machine is energised (water, electricity, air etc.).
Do not use acetone or derivatives.
Never attempt any electrical welding on the machine (equipment sensitive to high voltages and electrical arcs).
2. 2. 2. Safety pictograms 000000
Depending on the machine's configuration, the pictograms shown below may be present on the machine.
❍ Prohibited
Walking prohibited here Do not touch
Prohibited for people fitted with active medical implants Access prohibited for unauthorized personnel

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
❍ Warning
Warning. always read carefully Danger - risk of falls
Danger - risk of injury Danger - laser beam
Danger - risk of being crushed Warning - hot surface
Danger - risk of being dragged and crushed Danger - UV-C rays

UV-C
Electrical hazard Warning - magnetic field
Danger - corrosive material
❍ Obligation
Breathing protection is obligatory Ear protection obligatory
Individual protection from falls obligatory Body protection obligatory
Refer to instruction manual Eye protection is obligatory
Hand protection obligatory Opaque safety glasses obligatory
Face protection obligatory Head protection obligatory
Foot protection obligatory Disposable shoe protection obligatory
Disposable breathing protection obligatory Disposable bouffant cap obligatory
2. 3. Lockout / tagout areas for power sources and machine rotation 000000
❍ Definition
Lockout / tagout (loto) is a safety procedure aimed at protecting operators and preventing the machine from being
powered on or rotated by any other person.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
❍ Localisation
The stickers (1) "LOTO" (LockOut / TagOut*) indicate the areas where power sources and machine rotation are
locked out:
- On the main electrical cabinet, next to the isolating switch (2),
- On the high-pressure air line (3), visible through the door ,
- On the frame of the hydraulic panel (4), visible through the door ,
- Next to the reducer motor (5), visible through the door ,
- On the low-pressure air line (6), if present,
- On the electrical cabinet"Pressco"(7), if present,
- On the thermoregulator "Thermo 130°"(8), if present.
* lockout / tagout
1
4
3
2
8
5
❍ Reminder
Lockout / tagout must be performed by authorized staff only.
Mandatory use of the corresponding servicing sheets:
- Isolating the machine, see procedure "OP-B0002".
- Turning on the power supplies to the machine, see procedure "OP-B0001".
- Lock-out of the use of manual rotation, see procedure "OP-B0027".
! Each person servicing the machine must lock out the components being serviced.
- Example :3 people working on the "oven" part = 3 locks on the main cabinet isolating switch and 3 locks
to block machine rotation.
2. 4. Required maintenance levels 000000
2. 4. 1. Definitions of maintenance levels 000000
The maintenance levels determine the complexity of the maintenance to be carried out according to the following:
- The difficulty of the operation,
- The difficulty in setting up or using the equipment required for the operation.
Interventions are classed in a rising order of technical complexity.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
❍ First level of maintenance (level 1)

Simple actions carried out on parts which are easily and safely accessed and using equipment integrated with the
machine.
❍ Second level of maintenance (level 2)
Actions which follow simple procedures and/or use simple equipment (integrated with the machine or external) which
is easy to install and operate or requiring a specific qualification.
Personnel quailified when they have received training permitting them work safely on a unit which presents
i certain risks. Personnel are qualified when they have been designated for the operation due to their specific
knowledge and aptitude.
❍ Third level of maintenance (level 3)
Operations which follow procedures and/or using equipment which is complex to install or operate.
❍ Fourth level of maintenance (level 4)
Operations which follow procedures requiring full knowledge of a specific technique or technology and/or the use of
specialized equipment.
❍ Fifth level of maintenance (level 5)
Operations which follow procedures requiring specific knowledge of techniques and technologies with specialized
processes and/or procedures.
By definition, these types of maintenance (renovation, reconstruction etc.) are carried out by the manufacturer
i or by a specialist company. These procedures require equipment defined by the manufacturer and therefore
close to construction.
2. 4. 2. Classification of maintenance levels 000000
Maintenance operations Operation particulars Personnel Information on the operation

Simple action
Level 1 Simple procedures Client Technical documentation
Easy access
Simple action
Level 2 Client Technical documentation
Simple set-up and tools
Complex procedure
Level 3 Client Technical documentation
Complex set-up
Specific technology
Level 4 Client * Addition to machine manual
Specific equipment
SIDEL after-sales department After-sales department intervention range
Manufacturer-level knowhow
Level 5 SIDEL after-sales department After-sales department intervention range
Industrial equipment
Other personnel ** Specific supplier documentation
* The client may carry out the operation under conditions which the SIDEL after-sales department will have communicated to them in the a specific servicing
procedure, and where the technicians will be qualified for the operation.
** SIDEL suppliers (specialized component companies or suppliers)
All the maintenance operations of levels 1 to 5 are identified in the maintenance plan. Only 1 to 3 maintenance
! levels are associated with a procedure in the servicing procedure catalog.
For all other operations not identified in the general maintenance schedule you should contact the SIDEL after-
i sales department.
2. 5. Greasing and lubrication 000000
2. 5. 1. Lubricant characteristics 000000
The lubricants recommended by SIDEL, for all the parts requiring periodic lubrication, are food-grade
lubricants, except LUB 41 (used for the "Preferential Heating" option with cam box).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
❍ LUB A03
Current reference LUBRIPLATE FP 150 L

Color Transparent
ISO standard NSF H1
NGLI grade None
Soap None
Base oil viscocity (at 40 °C)(mm²/s) 103
Temperature (min / max) None
Type of base oil USP mineral
Packaging Drum (3,75 L)
"SIDEL" code 00000097453
❍ LUB A06
Used with the "Isolation gate" option
Current reference TOTAL FINAVESTAN A 100B

Color Transparent
ISO standard NSF H1
NGLI grade None
Soap None
Temperature (min / max) -5 °C / 195 °C
Type of base oil White oil CODEX
Packaging Drum (20 L)
"SIDEL" code 00000106341
❍ LUB A13
Current reference KLUBER SYNTH UH1 14 - 151

Color Beige
ISO standard NSF H1
NGLI grade 1
Soap Aluminum complex
Type of base oil mineral
Packaging Cartridge (400 g) / pail (25 kg)
"SIDEL" code 00000097990 / 00000208574
❍ LUB A18
Current reference QUINPLEX 4024

Color White
ISO standard NSF H1
NGLI grade None
Base oil viscocity (at 40 °C)(mm²/s) None
Type of base oil mineral
Packaging Cartridge (400 g)
"SIDEL" code 00000134233

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
❍ LUB A19
Current reference KLUBERSYNTH UH1 14-31

Color White
ISO standard NSF H1
NGLI grade 1
Type of base oil Synthetic (PAO)
Packaging Cartridge (370 gr)
"SIDEL" code 00000161795
❍ LUB A20
Current reference KLUBERSYNTH UH1 6-460

Color Transparent
ISO standard NSF H1
NGLI grade None
Soap None
Type of base oil Synthetic (PAG)
Packaging Drum (5 L) / drum (20 L)
"SIDEL" code 00000196275 / 00000174849
❍ LUB A21
Current reference KLUBERFOOD NH1 94-402

Color Beige
ISO standard NSF H1
NGLI grade 2
Soap Calcium sulfonate
Type of base oil Synthetic (PAO)
Packaging Drum (50 kg) / pail (25 kg) / cartridge (400 g)
"SIDEL" code 00000173111 / 00000173112 / 00000173113
❍ LUB A35
Current reference KLUBER UNISILKON LCA3801

Color Beige
ISO standard NSF H1
NGLI grade None
Soap Calcium
Base oil viscocity (at 40 °C)(mm²/s) None
Type of base oil Synthetic
Packaging Packet (7 g)
"SIDEL" code 00000241891

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
❍ LUB A36
Current reference KLUBERFOOD NH1 94-120

Color Beige
ISO standard NSF H1
NGLI grade 0
Soap Calcium complex
Packaging Can (1 kg)
"SIDEL" code 00000244322
❍ LUB 41
Used only for the "Preferential Heating" option with cam box
Current reference TOTAL CARTER SY320

Color Yellow
ISO standard ISO 6743–6 CKS/CKT
NGLI grade None
Soap None
Packaging Drum (20 L)
"SIDEL" code 00000200067

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2. 5. 2. Lubrication plan 000000
Periodic greasing covers all of the lubrication procedures necessary to ensure optimum and daily operation of the
machine.
The lubrication plan is drawn up according to the operation intervals defined by SIDEL, and using the lubricants
qualified and recommended by SIDEL.
The lubrication plan is located at the end of the manual, in the appendix chapter, see "Lubrication plan" document.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Frequency (in production hours) of performance of

1 5 Identification of lubricant type to use
the operation
2 Reference of maintenance operation 6 Name of lubricant
Volume (in cubic centimeters) of lubricant per station
3 Definition of operation to be conducted 7
or per machine
Reference of the procedure used to conduct the
4
operation
2. 6. Cleaning agents 000000
Technical sheets and safety data sheets are supplied with each cleaning agent.
i
❍ NET A02
Current reference BRILINOX

Color No color
SIDEL code 00000136065
Packaging Drum
Quantity 5L
Composition Paraffin oil, vegetable waxes
Use Liquid foodstuff-standard cleaning agent for stainless steel and aluminum
❍ NET A03
Current reference CAP 1000 A

Color No color
Packaging Drum
Quantity 5L
Composition Tensio-active detergent, sea salts
Use Foodstuff-standard cleaning agent, dilutable in water, for machine equipment

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
❍ NET A04
Current reference SECURICLEAN ER SPE

Color No color
Packaging Drum
Quantity 5L
Composition Inflammable hydrocarbonated solvants
Use Foodstuff-standard cleaning agent for grease, oil and sludge
❍ NET A05
Current reference CL-99

Color No color
Packaging Drum
Quantity 5 kg
Composition Refer to the technical documentation supplied with the equipment
Use Cleaning agent for hot molds
2. 7. Oil specifications 000000
Oil / grease specifications are provided in the tables included in specific maintenance information sheets.
Do not use oils or greases with a viscosity indicator other than the one shown, as this could result in
overheating or premature wear to components.
- If it is necessary to top up or replace the oil, make sure it has the same viscosity and composition. Mixing different
types of oil could cause irreparable damage to the machine's reducers and/or components.
- Do not use grease with a consistency of more than 2 in automatic lubrication systems. This could cause incorrect
interlocking of all the areas to be lubricated and potential damage to the grease dosing and distribution pump.
❍ Terminology
Please contact SIDEL or the supplier if you have any doubts as to the type of lubricant to be used.
Viscosity Resistance offered by fluid molecules to sliding over one another.

This resistance is also referred to as internal friction.
Wear Results from friction due to contact of surfaces that rub together when the film of lubricant is broken.
Mineral oil Oil obtained from distillation of petroleum.
Synthetic oil Oil obtained from synthesis of chemical substances of low molecular weight - hydrocarbons or silicon
compounds.
Penetration worked Unit of measurement for assessing the consistency of grease. The forward motion of a standard cone
in the lubricant is measured in 1/10 mm and identifies penetration.
"NLGI" consistency class "NLGI" is a number indicating the depth of penetration of a grease in the "penetrometer" after a certain
set working cycle
Drop point Temperature at which the soapy outer surface of the oil releases the oil it contains.
"H1" standardization "H1" is the code that stands for food grade lubricants, lubricants which can be used in all friction points
on machinery for the food industry where there may occasionally be contact between the lubricant and
the food.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
The supplier's "safety data sheets" must be kept on hand in order to identify:
- Hazards;
- Protection devices;
- First aid instructions;
- Fire prevention measures;
- Action in the event of accidental spillage and leaks;
- Physical and chemical properties;
- Stability and reactivity;
- Toxicological information;
- Ecological information;
- Disposal information;
- Shipping information.
2. 8. Water characteristics and treatment 000000
See procedure "MP-B0007"

i
2. 8. 1. Ryznar index 000000
The Ryznar (IR) index is also called the stability index.

i
The Ryznar (IR) index determines the tendency of water to corrode or scale. The IR index is used to know the degree
of scaling or aggressiveness on installations and, if necessary, to anticipate the protection of the installations against
these phenomena by recommending appropriate treatment. The Ryznar (IR) index is defined by a scale of 4 to 10.
- For an IR of less than 6, the water is said to scale.
- For an IR of between 6 and 6,7, the water is said to be stable.
- For an IR of more than 6,7, the water is said to be aggressive or corrosive.
- The lower the index, the greater the risk of a fur deposit forming.
i - The higher the index, the greater the risk of corrosion of installations.
The IR index is determined by the following characteristics
- pH,
- TH,
- TAC,
- Conductivity,
- The temperature at which the water is used.
Water which is stable when cold will scale when hot and inversely water which is stable when hot will be
i corrosive when cold.
! The water use temperature to be analysed must be specified.
2. 8. 2. pH(potential hydrogen) 000000
The pH indicates the concentration of hydrogen ions (H+) in the water. The pH is defined by a scale of 0 to 14.
- Water with a pH 7 is said to be neutral.
- For a pH less than 7, the water is said to be acid.
- For a pH greater than 7, the water is said to be alkaline.
A simple pH measurement does not given any definitive indication as to the quality of the water. To know the
i aggressiveness or scaling capacity of the water, the TAC (bicarbonate content), TH (water hardness),
temperature of use and conductivity values must also be known.
2. 8. 3. TH (total hardness) 000000
TH indicates the overall quantity of calcium and magnesium salts. The TH measurement unit is the french degree (°f).
1 °f corresponds to 10 mg/L of calcium carbonate (CaCO3) .

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
For information, 1 °f corresponds either to

i
- 4 mg/l of calcium (Ca2+) .
- 2,4 mg/l of magnesium (Mg2+) .
The standard NF EN 14743 defines the measurement unit in millimoles per litre (mmol/L). One millimole per
i litre of (CaCO3) corresponds to 10°f.
There are several types of TH
- Total TH: sum of the calcium and magnesium salts.
- Calcium TH: sum of the calcium salts.
- Magnesium TH: sum of the magnesium salts.
TH or water hardness corresponds to the total TH.
i
- For a TH of 0 to 15 °f, the water is said to be soft.
- For a TH of 15 to 25 °f, the water is said to be calcareous.
- For a TH greater than 25 °f, the water is said to be hard.
The higher the TH, the greater the risk of a fur deposit on the hot parts of the machine.
i
2. 8. 4. TAC (total alkalinity) 000000
TAC indicates the bicarbonate, carbonate and hydroxide content. The TAC measurement unit is the french
degree (°f).
1 °f corresponds to 10 mg/l of calcium carbonate CaCO3.
For information, 1 °f corresponds either to
- 3,4 mg/l mg/l of hydroxides (OH-) .
- 6,0 mg/l mg/l of carbonates (CO32-) .
- 12,2 mg/l mg/l of bicarbonates (HCO3-) .
2. 8. 5. Conductivity 000000
Conductivity is the capacity of water to conduct electricity. The conductivity measurement unit is microsiemens per
centimetre (µS/cm).
Conductivity is directly proportional to the quantity of mineral salts dissolved in the water. The greater the
concentration of dissolved mineral salts, the higher the conductivity, the water is said to be hard. On the contrary,
water which is low in mineral salts has a low conductivity, the water is said to be soft.
The conductivity measurement defines the total quantity of mineral salts dissolved (TDS) in the
water. The (TDS) measurement unit is part per million (ppm).
1 ppm is equal to 1 mg/l.

i
- Distilled water: 0,5 µS/cm.
- Public network water: 500 to 1055 µS/cm.
- Sea water: 5500 µS/cm.
The measurement depends on the temperature of the water analysed.

!
The conductivity of the water can be affected by the presence of various materials:_oil, being a poor conductor,
! reduces the conductivity of the water.
From a certain limit, the conductivity notably affects the results of the analyses and is used to detect a variation in the
composition of the water.
2. 8. 6. Turbidity 000000
Turbidity describes the amount of material in a liquid which makes it cloudy.

The turbidity measurement units are:
- Nephelometric turbidity unit (NTU),
- Nephelometric formazine unit (NFU),
- Formazine attenuation unit (FAU).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 NFU equals 1 FAU.

i
For a turbidity of less than 20 NFU, 1 NFU equals 1 NTU.
For a turbidity of more than 20 NFU, 1 NFU equals 0,6 NTU.
! Turbidity must be as low as possible to facilitate the spectrometer analysis.
2. 8. 7. Larson-Skold index 000000
The Larson-Skold (LSI) index is also called the corrosivity index .

i
The Larson-Skold index describes the potential of water to cause pitting type corrosion in the installation.
Pitting type "pitting" corrosion is a very localised form of corrosion and produces small holes in the metal which are
difficult to locate.
The Larson-Skold index is determined by the following characteristics:
- Chlorides (CI-) ,
- Sulphates (SO42-) ,
- TAC.
For a LSI of less than 0,8, the corrosion potential is low.
For a LSI of 0,8 to 1,2, the chlorides and sulphates may interfere with the formation of the natural protective film in the
installations.
For a LSI of more than 1,2, the corrosion potential is great and must be anticipated with an appropriate treatment.
2. 8. 8. Sampling and analysis 000000
The time interval between sampling and analysing the water samples affects the analysis results.
! The period between the sample and the analysis must be as short as possible and in all cases less
than 5 days.
The longer the period, the greater the corrosive potential of the water sample.
i
2. 8. 9. Water treatment 000000
If the quality of the untreated water does not comply with the specifications below, the water must be treated:
Parameter value maximum / units*
RYZNAR INDEX 6 to 6,7**(required values)
Water temperature during the analysis 20 to 25 °C
LARSON-SKOLD INDEX 0,8
Cl- (chloride) 50 mg/l
SO42- (sulfates) 50 mg/l
CORROSION INDICATORS IN THE CIRCUIT
Fe2+ (iron) 200 µg/l
Al3+ (aluminium) 200 µg/l
Zn (zinc) 1 mg/l
Cu2+ (copper) 200 µg/l
OTHER PARAMETERS
Turbidity 12 FAU
Color As clear as possible
* Specification for non-treated water.
** At working temperature.
Various means and advice are recommended by specialized companies

- Slightly soften the water.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
- Avoid using demineralized, osmosis-purified or distilled water.

- Treat by adding a corrosion and scale inhibitor.
In the latter case,
The principle of the treatment is to contribute towards the formation of a protective film in the installation circuits.
The treatment recommended differs according to the temperature at which the water is used.
SIDEL recommends the following treatment
- "PERFORMAX CL 1300".
SIDEL will not guarantee the quality of the circuit if the water treatment is different from that recommended.
!
The treatment carried out modifies the characteristics of the water and affects the results of the water analyses.
For the water analyses after treatment, comply with the specifications below.
i
❍ Diagnosis of state of corrosion of system
If the metal concentrations below exceed the maximum values, the water can no longer be treated. The corrosion is
too advanced for the treatment to effectively act against it.
Corrosion indicators in the circuit
Fe2+ 1 mg/L
Al3+ 500 µg/L
Zn 1 mg/L
Cu2+ 500 µg/L
Other parameters
Turbidity 12 FAU
Color As clear as possible
❍ "treatable" water specifications

The corrosion and scale inhibitor products cannot treat all types of water.
The tables below indicate the maximum water characteristic values before treatment in order for the treatment to be
effective.
For "PERFORMAX CL 1300":
Parameter Value maximum / units
RYZNAR index 4,5 to 7,5
pH 7 to 7,8
TH (total hardness) 0 to 40 °f
TAC (total alkalinity) 15 to 35 °f
Water analysis temperature 20 to 25 °C
LARSON-SKOLD index 2,8
Cl- 200 mg/L
SO4 2- 200 mg/L
❍ Follow-up of dosage
The treatment product concentrations recommended by SIDEL are the following:
_ **"PERFORMAX CL 1300" concentration = 10 000ppm +/- 10% (i.e. approximately 1,1 L for 100 L).
To know the concentration of the product, you must measure the concentration of one of the chemical components of
the product: orthophosphate (PO43-).
The level of PO43- recommended below corresponds to the difference between the level (of PO43-) recorded after the
treatment and the level (of PO43-) recorded before the treatment.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
"PERFORMAX CL 1300" PO43-= 44 mg/L +/- 10 % **

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Maintenance Manual / Maintenance
3. MAINTENANCE
3. 1. Maintenance schedule 000000
Periodic maintenance covers all of the procedures related to part replacement and reconditioning, to inspection and
cleaning to be carried out at specified time intervals.
This maintenance involves a scheduled production downtime for the time necessary to carry out these procedures.
These procedures (maintenance levels: 2 and 3) must be carried out by a trained personnel (e.g.: maintenance
department).
Compliance with these procedures will guarantee optimum production conditions and will allow detecting any
abnormal wear.
The maintenance schedule covers a 6-year period (36000 production hours) and is systematically renewable during
the whole lifetime of the machine.
The maintenance schedule is located at the end of the manual, in the appendix chapter, see "Maintenance schedule"
document.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Reference of maintenance operation: correspondence with

1 6 Machine status to conduct the procedure
the list of required spare parts
2 Definition of operation to be conducted 7 Number of sterilization cycles (filler)
3 Position code in machine BOM 8 Observations
Production hours completed (1500 = 1500production hours
4 Reference of component in sub-assembly 9 completed / 3000 = 3000production hours
completed, misc.)
5 Reference of the procedure used to conduct the operation 10 : operation to be conducted

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3. 2. Global maintenance plan 000000
The global maintenance plan groups together the servicing, maintenance and greasing operations which are
necessary for the correct operation of the machine.
The operations are classified in time intervals defined in terms of machine operating hours (125h, 500h, 1500h, 3000h,
etc.).
The global maintenance plan is located at the end of the manual, in the appendix chapter, see "Global maintenance
plan" document.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Maintenance interval type

- "Cond." : conditional maintenance procedure (no
1 Position code in machine BOM 11 interval)
- "Offset" : maintenance procedure with variable
interval (see maintenance schedule)
Servicing time (in minutes) per station / Servicing time (in
2 Reference of sub-assembly 12
minutes) for all stations
Reference of maintenance operation: correspondence with Hidden servicing time (in minutes)
3 13
the list of required spare parts
4 Reference of component in sub-assembly 14 Number of stations affected
5 Definition of operation to be conducted 15 Reference of the procedure used to conduct the operation
Required maintenance level to conduct the requested
6 Machine sub-assembly 16
procedure
7 Maintenance procedure activity type 17 Nature of maintenance procedure
Number of technicians to perform the maintenance
8 Frequency of performance of the operation 18
procedure
9 Maintenance procedure interval (in production hours) 19 Machine status to conduct the procedure
10 Number of sterilization cycles (filler) 20 Cause of wear
3. 3. Maintenance procedures 000000
MP-B0001 : Checking the position of the mold opening/closing levers.......................................................................... 31

MP-B0002 : Cleaning / inspection of the locking finger holding box on mold support units............................................35
MP-B0003 : Degreasing / checking the teeth of the blow wheel drive ring and drive gear............................................. 37
MP-B0004 : Degreasing / checking the toothing on the oven drive ring and the drive pinion.........................................39
MP-B0005 : Checking the gap between the mold bases and the molds.........................................................................41
MP-B0006 : Checking the tripping sensors of the torque limiters................................................................................... 43
MP-B0007 : Checking the quality of the water................................................................................................................ 49
MP-B0008 : Cleaning / checking the infrared oven modules......................................................................................... 61
MP-B0009 : Cleaning/checking the oven slit reflectors, dummy lamps and cooling shields...........................................63
MP-B0010 : Inspection/cleaning: braking system........................................................................................................... 67

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
MP-B0011 : Degreasing/checking the self-lubricated cams............................................................................................77

MP-B0012 : Checking the tension on the timing belt...................................................................................................... 79
MP-B0013 : Checking the alignment of the transmission belts.......................................................................................81
MP-B0014 : Checking the guiding rollers of the unscrambler rollers.............................................................................. 83
MP-B0019 : Replacing the oven cooling system filters................................................................................................... 85
MP-B0020 : Replacing the grease cartridges of the oven automatic greasers............................................................... 87
MP-B0021 : Replacing the guide rings and the scraper seals on the stretching rods.....................................................91
MP-B0022 : Reconditioning the nozzles......................................................................................................................... 95
MP-B0023 : Replacing the silencers of the mold support unit compensation solenoid valves..................................... 113
MP-B0024 : Replacing the mold-support unit compensation system............................................................................115
MP-B0025 : Replacing the locking synthetic rollers of the mold support units..............................................................123
MP-B0026 : Replacing the mold support unit dampers.................................................................................................125
MP-B0027 : Replacing the transfer arm followers.........................................................................................................127
MP-B0028 : Replacing the tensioner wheel 3 sector guides.........................................................................................131
MP-B0029 : Replacing the exhaust silencers on the blow blocks.................................................................................133
MP-B0030 : Replacing the rollers of the mold opening/closing levers.......................................................................... 135
MP-B0031 : Replacing the filters of the pneumatic panel and the on-board air system............................................... 137
MP-B0032 : Replacing the silencers on the pneumatic control circuits........................................................................ 149
MP-B0033 : Replacing the safety pin on the mold bases............................................................................................. 153
MP-B0034 : Reconditioning the oven spindles............................................................................................................. 155
MP-B0035 : Reconditioning the oven wheel................................................................................................................. 159
MP-B0036 : Replacing the rotary air union................................................................................................................... 165
MP-B0038 : Replacing the mold support unit solenoids............................................................................................... 169
MP-B0039 : Reconditioning of blow blocks..................................................................................................................173
MP-B0041 : Reconditioning the mold opening/closing retractable guide......................................................................179
MP-B0042 : Replacing the transfer arm springs........................................................................................................... 185
MP-B0043 : Replacing the spindle chain...................................................................................................................... 187
MP-B0045 : Removing / installing a nozzle...................................................................................................................201
MP-B0046 : Replacing the bearings of the belt tensioners........................................................................................... 209
MP-B0047 : Replacing the transmission belts.............................................................................................................. 213
MP-B0050 : Replacing the filters on the preform and bottle ejection actuators............................................................ 217
MP-B0051 : Removal/refit: transfer arms......................................................................................................................219
MP-B0052 : Draining / filling the hydraulic lines............................................................................................................221
MP-B0053 : Removal / installation of a spindle section................................................................................................ 225
MP-B0054 : Removal/refit: heating module.................................................................................................................. 231
MP-B0055 : Replacing the unscrambler roller drive belt...............................................................................................235
MP-B0056 : Replacing and adjusting a conveyor belt.................................................................................................. 241
MP-B0070 : Adjusting the tension of the spindle chain and the stationary chains........................................................253
MP-B0071 : Setting the tension on a transmission belt................................................................................................ 257
MP-B0072 : Cleaning and inspection of molds out of machine.....................................................................................259
MP-B0073 : Greasing the stretching guides................................................................................................................. 261
MP-B0074 : Greasing the transfer arm guides..............................................................................................................263
MP-B0075 : Greasing the reducer motor bearing......................................................................................................... 265
MP-B0076 : Greasing the mold base support guides................................................................................................... 267
MP-B0077 : Greasing the oven wheel shaft bearings...................................................................................................269
MP-B0079 : Greasing the tensioner wheel guide..........................................................................................................271
MP-B0081 : Greasing the mold base carriage.............................................................................................................. 273
MP-B0084 : Checking and adjusting the viewfinder of an infrared camera.................................................................. 275
MP-B0086 : Checking the mold support unit safety devices.........................................................................................277
MP-B0087 : Checking the operation of the blower emergency stop buttons and the door locked position.................. 281
MP-B0088 : Checking the feeder emergency-stop buttons.......................................................................................... 287
MP-B0089 : Replacing the filters of the blower electrical cabinets............................................................................... 289
MP-B0090 : Replacement of lamps / inspection of lamp base protections and ceramic reflectors on oven modules.. 291
MP-B0091 : Replacing a module of the beacon stack.................................................................................................. 297
MP-B0093 : Replacing the filters on the feeder electrical cabinets...............................................................................299
MP-B0095 : Replacing the batteries of the PLCs..........................................................................................................301
MP-B0096 : Replacing the battery of the feeder PLC................................................................................................... 305
MP-B0099 : Calibrating the multi-parameter tester.......................................................................................................307
MP-B0100 : Removal/refit: molds and mold bases....................................................................................................... 313
MP-B0103 : Cleaning/greasing the "FESTO" blow block..............................................................................................317
MP-B0106 : Adjusting the height of the unscrambler unit............................................................................................. 325
MP-B0107 : Adjusting the body guides of the stabilization rail..................................................................................... 327

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
MP-B0108 : Adjusting the body guides of the infeed rail.............................................................................................. 331

MP-B0109 : Adjusting the neck guides of the stabilization rail......................................................................................333
MP-B0112 : Greasing the mold support unit pivot shafts and the mold opening / closing lever shafts.........................337
MP-B0113 : Adjusting the unscrambler rollers .............................................................................................................339
MP-B0114 : Adjusting the stabilization rail....................................................................................................................345
MP-B0115 : Adjusting the infeed rail.............................................................................................................................353
MP-B0116 : Adjusting the neck rim guides of the preform feeder.................................................................................357
MP-B0118 : Checking the hinge points of the mold support units................................................................................ 361
MP-B0119 : Checking the height of the shell supports ............................................................................................... 363
MP-B0120 : Checking the mold base guide rails.......................................................................................................... 365
MP-B0136 : Setting the preform detection system at the machine infeed.................................................................... 367
MP-B0137 : Checking the mold base safety pin........................................................................................................... 371
MP-B0146 : Replacing a mold base support up/down roller......................................................................................... 373
MP-B0152 : Degreasing / cleaning the spindle rollers, the rails and the turnover ramps............................................. 377
MP-B0153 : Adjustment of bottle / mold transfer synchronization................................................................................ 381
MP-B0154 : Adjustment of the synchronism of the transfer preforms / mould..............................................................385
MP-B0155 : Reconditioning the spindle tips................................................................................................................. 389
MP-B0161 : Checking the height of the transfer arms.................................................................................................. 391
MP-B0165 : Adjusting the height of the transfer arm rollers......................................................................................... 395
MP-B0176 : Replacing the quartz bars......................................................................................................................... 401
MP-B0177 : Checking spindle pins............................................................................................................................... 403
MP-B0180 : Cleaning / checking the magnet ways.......................................................................................................405
MP-B0185 : Adjusting the synchronization of the oven wheel / preform transfer..........................................................409
MP-B0186 : Replacing the preform infeed wheel cylinders.......................................................................................... 415
MP-B0187 : Replacing the ejection cylinders of the preform and bottle transfer wheels.............................................. 419
MP-B0188 : Replacing the ejection guide cylinder of the bottle outfeed wheel............................................................ 421
MP-B0193 : Removal/refit: blow blocks........................................................................................................................ 423
MP-B0197 : Checking the condition of pressurized circuits.......................................................................................... 427
MP-B0205 : Checking the compensation boxes of the mold-support unit.................................................................... 429
MP-B0208 : Adjusting the cooling shields and heating module supports..................................................................... 433
MP-B0216 : Adjustment of dummy lamps (option) .......................................................................................................439
MP-B0223 : Checking the guide rail of the stretching slides.........................................................................................445
MP-B0232 : Cleaning the cover of the 7 bar line 40 µm filter........................................................................................451
MP-B0233 : Cleaning / checking the air and water hoses............................................................................................ 453
MP-B0234 : Signalling column operation check............................................................................................................455
MP-B0235 : Checking for proper operation of the manual rotation system presence safety........................................ 457
MP-B0236 : Hearing check of air leakage on the blower.............................................................................................. 459
MP-B0239 : Checking the attachment of the bottom plate of electrical boxes..............................................................461
MP-B0240 : Checking the indicator light of the electrical stretching coder................................................................... 463
MP-B0241 : Checking the capacity of the UPS battery to retain a charge....................................................................465
MP-B0242 : Checking the mold opening / closing retractable guide.............................................................................467
MP-B0250 : Cleaning / checking the machine's lighting devices.................................................................................. 469
MP-B0251 : Replacing the machine's lighting devices..................................................................................................473

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Checking the position of the mold opening/closing levers MP-B0001 1/3
GENERAL INFORMATION
x2
! This procedure must be carried out with the

molds at process temperature where this is
greater than 60 °C.
If the same opening/closing lever is regularly
i mis-adjusted, do not tighten to the highest torque
rather check that the shaft and the various
assembled parts are correctly greased.
There are 2 types of levers depending on the machine
configuration:
- Standard lever (A)
- Quick adjust lever (B)
Use the applicable procedure.
MACHINE STATUS
- The machine is stopped.
A B
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
- Set of thickness gauges,
- Torque wrench 10 to 50 N.m.
PROCEDURE
High mold temperature.

!
1 Remove the knob (1).
2 Remove the cam (2). 2
3 Install the cam (2) in the upper part of the support (3).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0001 Checking the position of the mold opening/closing levers 3
- Extreme caution and perfect coordination between

! the 2 technicians is required for the following
X
5
operations. X
4
- The mold-support unit must be closed and locked.
4 Position the roller (4), of the lever (5) to be checked, X
2
opposite the mark (6) on the cam (2), using manual
rotation.
5 Check the position of the lever (5) with respect to the

cam (2).
- The roller (4) must rotate without constraint on the
5
cam (2).
- The clearance J1 must be zero between the J1
roller (4) and the cam (2). 2
• Otherwise, adjust the position of the mold
open / close lever (5) (see above).
4
6 Repeat the operation at all of the blowing stations.
9

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Checking the position of the mold opening/closing levers MP-B0001 3/3
Adjusting: type (A)

1 Loosen the bolts on the expanding
assembler (10) crosswise but do not remove them. 13
5
2 In normal use the components of the expanding
i assembler (10) come apart when the bolts are
unscrewed. If you have any difficulty releasing 8
the parts of the assembler (10) use the
bolts M10 and the tappings M10 located at the
position of the white bolts (7). 7
X
3 Hold the assembler (10) - lever (5) -
spacer (8) assembly into contact and without strain on
10
the console (13).
4 Lock the spring clip (9).
The roller (4) bears on the cam (2).
5 Tighten up the bolts on the expanding
assembler (10) crosswise to a torque of 32 N.m.
5
6 Unlock the catch (9).
7 Check the following points: 4
☞ The roller (4) rotates without constraint. 2
☞ The screws of the expanding assembler (10) do not

protrude from the inner face of the lever (5).
9
3
Adjusting: type (B)

1 Loosen the bolt (15).
The lever (5) can rotate freely.
The roller (4) bears on the cam (2). 15
3 Tighten the bolt (15) to a torque of 15N.m.
5 Check that the follower (4) rolls freely.
Install the cam (2) on the support (3) in its original location.
5
---------- The procedure is now complete ----------

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Cleaning / inspection of the locking finger holding box on mold support units MP-B0002 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
- The machine is stopped,

- JOG connected to the work zone,
- Cold molds.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Roller (6), if the replacement interval has been
reached.
Consumables
1
- "LUB A36" grease,
- "LOCTITE 243" normal threadlock,
- Clean, dry cloths.
Specific tool
- Allen keys size 4,
- Clean, dry paintbrush.
PROCEDURE
Removing
1 Unlock the mold support unit by manually pushing the 3

roller (1) downwards.
2 Remove the bolts (2).
3 Remove the box (3).
X
2
4 Clean the box (3), the spring (4) and the holding
lock (5) using a clean, dry cloth.
• Check the parts for wear and tear during cleaning.
5 4 3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0002 Cleaning / inspection of the locking finger holding box on mold support units 2
Replacing
1 Perform the removal operations in the reverse order,
making sure that you:
• If the replacement interval has been
reached, replace the roller (6) with a new roller,
• Use a paintbrush to apply the "LUB A36" grease to
the box (3), the spring (4) and the holding lock (5),
• Apply "LOCTITE 243" threadlock to the bolts (2).
6 5 4 3 2
243

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Degreasing / checking the teeth of the blow wheel drive ring and drive gear MP-B0003 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds,
- JOG connected to the work zone.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- Cleaning agent NET A04,
- "LUB A21" grease,
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
1 Remove the protective cover (1).

1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0003 Degreasing / checking the teeth of the blow wheel drive ring and drive gear 2
2 Clean the following parts using a brush, a cloth and the

cleaning agent "NET A04":
- Protective casings (1 ; 2), 2
- Spray nozzles (3),
- Teeth of drive ring (4),
- Drive pinion (5).
3 Use the JOG to position the other parts of the drive
ring (4) and the gear (5) so that they are accessible and
complete the degreasing.
4 Check the condition of the toothing on the drive
3
gear (5) and the drive ring (4).
☞ If there is excess wear, contact SIDEL for full

diagnostics.
5 Grease the accessible section of the drive ring (4) using
a paintbrush and the "LUB A21" grease. 5 4
• Make accessible the other parts of the ring (4) using
the JOG.
Never start the machine without lubrication on
the toothing of the drive rings.
6 Fit the protective cover (1).
Area to be greased.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Degreasing / checking the toothing on the oven drive ring and the drive pinion MP-B0004 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
- Recycle carriage removed,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- Cleaning agent "NET A04",
- "LUB A21" grease,
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
1 Remove the cover panels (1 ; 2).
2 1
2 Remove the spray nozzle (3).

3 Remove the cover plate (4).
4
4 Clean the cover panels (1 ; 2 ; 4) using a brush, cloth
and degreasing agent "NET A04".
5 Clean the spray nozzle (3) using a clean, dry cloth.
3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0004 Degreasing / checking the toothing on the oven drive ring and the drive pinion 2
6 Remove excess grease from the drive ring (5) and from
the drive pinion (6) using clean, dry cloths.
7 Clean the toothing on the drive ring (5) and the
pinion (6) using a brush dipped in degreasing 5
agent "NET A04".
8 Use the JOG to position the other parts of the drive
ring (5) and the gear (6) so that they are accessible and
complete the degreasing. 6
☞ Check the condition of the toothing on the drive

gear (6) and the drive ring (5).
• If there is excess wear, contact SIDEL for full
diagnostics.
9 Grease the accessible section of the drive ring (5) using
a paintbrush and the "LUB A21" grease.
• Make accessible the other parts of the ring (5) using
the JOG.
Never start the machine without lubrication on
the toothing of the drive rings.
Area to be greased.
10 Fit the elements in the reverse order to the removal.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Checking the gap between the mold bases and the molds MP-B0005 1/2
MACHINE STATUS

- Molds at production temperature, X
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- Heat protection clothing and equipment.
Specific tool
- Comparator (1) and magnetic support (2).
PROCEDURE
1 Bring the blowing station concerned around to the work

area using the manual rotation.
☞ Check that the mold support unit (3) is closed and

locked.
When available
2 Remove the 4 bolts (7). 7
• Carefully disengage the plate (8) for easier access.
7
8
3 Install the magnetic support (2) of the comparator (1) on

a stable surface.
4 Position the sensor on the comparator (1) on the
roller (4) using its magnetic support.
4
5 Set the comparator (1) to zero.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0005 Checking the gap between the mold bases and the molds 3
6 Manually lower the mold base support (5) using a

lever (6).
☞ Check that the position of the

comparator (1) pointer is between:
- 0,05 / - 0,10 mm For steel ring

X
- 0,10 / - 0,15 mm For "KHOLOX ®" ring
- If not, contact SIDEL.

7 Release the lever (6).
8 Open the mold support unit (3).
5
☞ Check that the comparator pointer (1) points to 0.
- If not, contact SIDEL.
6
9 Close and lock the mold support unit (3).
When available
10 Install the plate (8) with the 4 screws (7).
7
7
8

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Checking the tripping sensors of the torque limiters MP-B0006 1/5
GENERAL INFORMATION 1
Never attempt to modify the torque limiter tares. 5
ZE 2
Reference Torque limiter

1 drive system(1)
2 Infeed wheel 4
3 oven front wheel (2) 1

2 3
4 Oven transmission shaft
5 bottle outfeed wheel(3)
(1) If present.
(2) If a dedust module or a PredisTM module is present.
(3) Depending on the configuration of your machine.
MACHINE STATUS

- Machine rotation locked out, see procedure "OP-
B0027".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
- 0,5 thickness gauge mm,
- 1,5 thickness gauge mm.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/5 MP-B0006 Checking the tripping sensors of the torque limiters 2
PROCEDURE
Drive system (1) torque limiter (if present)

1 Check the gaps Y = 0,5 mm and X = 1,5 mm. 1 6 7
• If the gap X ; Y is incorrect, reset the torque limiter
sensor. See "setting the torque limiter sensor
procedure" below.
2 Lift the probe (6) until the sensor (7) is set off.
The alarm message corresponding to the fault appears
on the message bar at the HMI.
• Acknowledge the fault at the HMI.
☞ The alarm message corresponding to the fault

disappears from the message band on the HMI.
X
1
6
Y
Torque limiter (2) of the preform infeed wheel
Position hands so that fingers are not crushed when

! resetting as dragging along of the hand could occur, see 8
procedure "OP-B0056".
1 Check the gaps Y = 0,5 mm and X = 1,5 mm.
procedure" below.
2 Turn the turntable (8) manually.
The torque limiter will trip.
• Reset the torque limiter (2) by manually turning the 2
infeed wheel in the normal direction of operation.

Y

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Oven front wheel torque limiter (3) (if a dedust module or a PredisTM module is present)
sensor. See "setting the torque limiter sensor 9
procedure" below.
• Reset the torque limiter (3) by manually turning the
• Acknowledge the fault at the HMI. 3
disappears from the message band on the HMI. Y
Torque limiter (4) of the oven wheel transmission shaft

1 Check the gaps Y = 0,5 mm and X = 1,5 mm. 4 18 19
procedure" below.
2 Lower the probe (18) until the sensor (19) is set off.

4 18 19

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/5 MP-B0006 Checking the tripping sensors of the torque limiters 2
Bottle outfeed wheel torque limiter (5) (if present)

16
procedure" below.
• Reset the torque limiter (5) by manually turning the

disappears from the message band on the HMI. 5
Setting the torque limiter (L) sensor (D)
Principles:
13 12 11 L
D 13 14 15
L 12
D
11
14
X
13
1 Position the detection pin (11) horizontally using the bolt (12).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Loosen, but do not remove, the screws (13) and if necessary, the support attachment screws (14).
3 Position the sensor (D) such that you obtain X = 1,5 mm and Y = 0,5 mm between the detection pin (11) and the
control disc (15).
4 Tighten the screws (13) and if necessary, the support attachment screws (14).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Checking the quality of the water MP-B0007 1/12
GENERAL INFORMATION
Materials required:
Water Sample
sampling analysis
Ryznar index kit case (A)
6 A
Sample flask (5) (500 ml)
x4
Spray bottle (11)
Distilled water
Clean, dry cloths
Container (12)
Water quality control follow-

up document(s)
11 12 5
Tester calibration and cleaning
follow-up document(s)
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold hydraulic interface panel.
- Latex gloves
PROCEDURE
If the analysis is not carried out immediately:

! - The samples to be analized must be stored for 5 day(s) minimum in a closed and temperate room. The
characteristics of the water will evolve over time and this may affect the results of the analyses.
Water sampling (5)

- If the water entering the machine is not chemically treated:
- Take samples (5) at the purges (1; 2; 3; 4) of the machine's hydraulic panel.
- If the water entering the machine is chemically treated:
- Take samples (5) upstream from chemical treatment.
- Samples (5) can be taken upstream from the machine, thermoregulator, potable water or plant circuit.
The water softener is not considered to be a chemical treatment.
i
It is possible to conduct a Ryznar index on softened water.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/12 MP-B0007 Checking the quality of the water 3
Samples (5) are taken at the following locations:

- Purges between the inlet (1 ; 3) and the outlet (2 ; 4) from
the machine's hydraulic interface panel.
1 Clean the nozzles on the drain valves (1 ; 2 ; 3 ;
4) using a clean dry cloth.
1 2 3 4
2 Open the drain valve (1).
☞ Let the water flow for a few seconds before filling

the bottles (5).
1
3 Position the sample bottle (5) under the drain valve (1).
4 Take a 500 ml sample, in the flask (5).
5 Close the drain valve (1).
6 On each bottle (5), record the date, the machine 5
number and the purge from which the sample was
taken.
7 Repeat the operation for all the purges (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4).
8 Analyse the water samples (5), see the following
procedure.
Sample analysis (5)
! -
-
The following operations must be carried out in the laboratory.
Comply with health and safety instructions for the products in use.
- Always seal the reactive agents immediately after use.
! Measure the following values in the indicated sequence using the tester (6):
- The temperature (°C): the temperature of the samples must read between 20 and 25 °C. Set the
samples to the correct temperature before measuring the other values.
- Hydrogen potential (pH).
- Conductivity (µS).
! Measure the 3 values on the same sample before proceeding with the next sample.
! The tester (6) is calibrated every other 4 analysis campaigns:

- Check the last calibration date on your tester follow-up document (6).
- If necessary, recalibrate the tester (6); see procedure "MP-B0099".
For further information regarding the multi-parameter tester (6) refer to the documentation supplied with the
i equipment.
Check the expiration date (exp) before using a product. Never use an expired analysis product, to avoid an
! erroneous result.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

6
Measurements using the tester (6): (°C ; pH ; µS)

1 Check that the tester (6) was calibrated less
than 4 analysis campaigns ago, on the follow-up
document.
If necessary, recalibrate the tester (6); see
8 procedure
"MP-B0099MP-B0099". 6
2 Check that the tester (6) was cleaned at the end of the
last analysis campaign, on the follow-up document.
If necessary, clean the tester (6); see the
corresponding chapter. 2/3 7
3 Fill the beaker (9) up to 2/3 with tap water.
9 16 9
4 Remove the plug (16).
5 Submerge the sensor (7) of the tester (6), in the
beaker (9) filled with tap water, for 30 minutes.
6
- Never use de-ionized water.
- Do not turn on the tester (6) during this phase. 6
6 Take out the tester (6).
7 Drain the tester (6).
8 Press the key "ON_/_OFF"(8).
The tester (6) lights up. 13 8
10
The tester (6) is ready to measure the temperature of
the sample (5). 5
9 Submerge the sensor (7) of the tester (6) 2 to 3 cm, in
the sample (5) to analyze. 14
10 Shake and then wait for the sample to stabilize (5).

11
! The temperature (°C) of analysis of water
samples (5) must be between 20 and 25 °C.
Check that the temperature (°C) of the sample (5) is
12
between 20 and 25 °C.
- If yes °C
go to the next step.
- If not
Bring the sample (5) to the correct temperature, before
13 pH
going to the next step.
☞ Measure the 3 required values in the sample to be

analyzed.
12 Record the value (°C) and the reference of the
sample (5), on the follow-up document.
13 Key "MODE / ENT" (10) selects the measurement
i mode. µS
Select (pH) mode, using the "Mode_/_ENT" key (10).
14 Record the value (pH) and the reference of the
15 Select (cond) mode, using the "MODE_/
_ENT" key (10).
16 Record the value (µS) and the reference of the
The tester (6) goes out.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
19 Rinse the sensor (7) 3 times, using a wash

11
bottle (11) filled with demineralized water, over the
receptacle (12).
20 Repeat the measurements (°C ; pH ; µS) for all 7
samples (5).
21 Clean the tester (6); see the corresponding chapter.
22 Install the cap (16).
23 Record the cleaning date of the tester (6), on the follow- 12
up document.
24 Empty the contents of the receptacle (12), in
accordance with the applicable legislation.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

6
Temperature measurement (°C):

document.
8 procedure
"MP-B0099MP-B0099". 6
9 16 9
6
10
The tester (6) is ready to measure the
temperature (°C) of the sample (5). 5

11
- If yes °C
- If not
Bring the sample (5) to the correct temperature (°C),
before going to the next step.
12 Record the value (°C) and the reference of the
16 Record the cleaning date of the tester (6), on the follow-
up document .

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

6
Potential hydrogen measurement (pH):

document.
8 procedure
"MP-B0099MP-B0099". 6
9 16 9
6
10

11
12
- If yes °C
- If not
before going to the next step. pH
i mode.
Select "pH" mode, using the "Mode_/_ENT" key (10).
13 Record the value (pH) and the reference of the
up document .

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

6
Conductivity measurement (µS):

document.
8 procedure
"MP-B0099MP-B0099". 6
9 16 9
6
10

11
! The temperature (°C) of analysis of 13water
- If yes °C
- If not
before going to the next step. µS

i mode.
Select "µS" mode, using the "Mode_/_ENT" key (10).
13 Record the value (µS) and the reference of the
up document .
It is possible to successively conduct the different analyses of a given sample (5), by selecting °C - pH -
i µS mode, using the "MODE / ENT" key (10); see the corresponding chapter.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Cleaning of the tester (6) (after use)
! Clean the tester (6) after each analysis campaign. 6 14
1 Dip the tester (6) for 20 min in a plastic tube or a 15

beaker (9) filled with the cleaning
solution (14) provided.
4 Put a few drops of conservation
solution (15) (solution provided) in the cap (16) before
16 9
closing and putting away the tester (6).
up document.
6 Empty the receptacle according to current legislation.
Measurement with the Ryznar index kit cases (A)

1 Carry out the procedure supplied with the Ryznar index
kit case (A).
- Clean the equipment used after each
measurement; see the corresponding chapter. A
- Carry out all the measurements on the same
sample before proceeding with the next sample.
2 Record the results and the reference of the
corresponding sample, on the follow-up document.
3 Repeat the measurements for all of the samples (5).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Total hardness measurement (TH Ca)

1 Take 12,5 ml of water from the sample (5), using a
13
syringe (13).
2 Empty the contents of the syringe (13) in the plastic
6 tube (17). 14
3 Add 20 drop(s) of "réactif A/G" (18).
4 Mix the solution.
17
5 Add 1 spoonfull(s) (19) of "indicateur ECAL" (20).
6 Mix the solution. 12,5 ml
7 Continue mixing, add "liqueur complexométrique" drop
by drop and count each drop (21), until: 5
The solution turns from red (22) to distinct
16 blue (23) after
13passing through purple (24).
8 20
Calcium TH, expressed in French degrees (°f), is
i equal to the number of drops added.
Record the result obtained and the reference of the 18 21
9 Empty the plastic tube (17) into the receptacle (12).
10 Clean the equipment used; see the corresponding
chapter.
19
17
22 24 23

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
10/
MP-B0007 Checking the quality of the water 3
12
Total water hardness measurement "TH"

syringe (13). 25 26 21
tube (17).
3 Add 4 drop(s) of "tampon K10" (25).
4 Add 2 drop(s) of "indicateur NET" (26).
5 Mix the solution.
6 Continue mixing, add "liqueur complexométrique" drop
by drop and count each drop (21), until:
The solution turns from wine red (27) to distinct
blue (28).
7 The total TH, expressed in French degrees (°f), is
i equal to the number of drops added. 17
Record the result obtained and the reference of the
chapter.
27 28
Total alkalinity measurement (TAC)

29 30
syringe (13).
tube (17).
3 Add 5 drop(s) of "réactif TAC" (29).
4 Mix the solution.
5 Continue mixing, add "liqueur alcalimétrique" drop by
drop and count each drop (30), until:
The solution turns from blue green (31) to
pink (32) after passing through gray (33).
6 TAC, expressed in French degrees (°f), is equal
i to the number of drops added.
Record the result obtained and the reference of the 17
chapter.
31 33 32

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
11/
3 Checking the quality of the water MP-B0007
12
Chloride content measurement (Cl-)

syringe (13). 34 36 39
tube (17).
3 Add 4 drop(s) of "indicateur mixte pour chlorures" (34).
The color is purple pink (35).
4 Mix the solution.
5 Add "l'acide nitrique" (36) to the solution,
Until a greenish yellow color (37) is obtained.
6 Add 2 drop(s) of "l'acide nitrique" (36).
7 Mix the solution.
8 Continue mixing, add "nitrate mercurique" drop by drop
and count each drop (39), until
17
The solutions turns from yellow (37) to purple (38) after
passing through orange.
9 The concentration en ions chlorures, expressed
i in French degrees (mg/l), is equal to the number
of drops added, multiplied by 7,1.
Record the result obtained and the reference of the 35 37 38
chapter.
12 Analyze all samples (5) of water taken.
Cleaning the measurement equipment

1 Fill the wash bottle (11) with distilled water.
2 Rinse the plastic tube or beaker (17; 9) using the wash 11
bottle (11) over the receptacle (12).
• Turn the plastic tube or the beaker (17; 9) one full
turn while cleaning.
9
• Repeat this operation 3 times.
3 Empty the plastic tube or beaker (17; 9) into the
container (12).
12

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
12/
MP-B0007 Checking the quality of the water 3
12
Calculating the Ryznar stability index

1 - The calculation sheet (B) "Ryznar index" is
40 B
supplied by Sidel.
- The values (40) (in red) in the xcalculation
sheet (B) are the results of (mS - TH Ca - TAC -
pH) measurements obtained for each sample (5).
The conductivity value in the calculation
! sheet (B) "indice de Ryznar" is expressed in "milli
Siemens" (mS).
1 µS (microsiemens) is equal to 0,001
mS (millisiemens).
Convert into "mS" the conductivity value displayed
in "µS" on the tester (6).
2 Enter the values (40) in the calculation sheet (B).
- Conductivity in mS
- Calcium total hardness (TH Ca) in °f
- Total alkalinity (TAC) in °f
- Potential hydrogen (pH) 41 42
3 - The values (41) (in red) in the calculation
sheet (B) are the temperature setpoints (°C) for use
of water in each circuit, machine in production.
Enter the values (41) in the calculation sheet (B).
- Water temperature for use in °C
4 - The values (42) (in blue) in the calculation
sheet (B) are the results for calculation of
the Ryznar index.
Read and record the values (42) and the reference of
the sample (5), on the follow-up document.
5 Repeat the procedure for all samples (5).
If any of the characteristics do not correspond, the water must be treated in order to ensure that the machine
i functions properly. SIDEL will recommend a suitable water treatment.
6 Check that the results correspond to the levels indicated in the water characteristics table.
For further information regarding the characteristics of the water to be followed, see chapter "Quality of water
i and water distribution circuits", in the Preparation Manual.
Type of analysis to be carried out:
- The tables below indicate the maximum water characteristic values before treatment in order for the
! treatment to be effective.
- If the quality of the untreated water does not comply with the specifications below, the water must
be treated.
Parameter Value maximum / units
RYZNAR INDEX 6 to 6,7 * (required values)
Water temperature during the analysis 20 to 25 °C
Cl- (chloride) 50 mg/l
* At working temperature.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Cleaning / checking the infrared oven modules MP-B0008 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
When the machine stops, the cooling system cools the
infrared oven for 7 min.
MACHINE STATUS

- Oven fan stopped,
- Main electrical circuit switched off and locked
out, voir procédure "OP-B0002".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- Clean, dry, non-abrasive cloth.
PROCEDURE
1 Hold the handle (1) and loosen but do not remove the
attaching parts (2). 1
2 Hold the handle (1) with both hands and lower the
heating module support (A). 2
3 Release the handle (1).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0008 Cleaning / checking the infrared oven modules 2
Checking / cleaning an infrared oven module (B)

1 Clean using a dry clean cloth and check the condition of
the following components:
- Lamp base protections (3),
- Ceramic reflectors (4),
- Lamps(5),
- Power supply wires (6).
B
If these parts are broken, damaged or
i blackened, replace them, voir procédure "MP-
B0090".
2 Repeat the operation on all of the infrared oven 3 4 5
modules (B).
B
3 Close the heating module support (A) by carrying out

A
the steps in the reverse order to opening.
4 Make sure that the cables (7) are in the correct
position.
7
1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Cleaning/checking the oven slit reflectors, dummy lamps and cooling shields MP-B0009 1/3
GENERAL INFORMATION
When the machine stops, the cooling

i system cools the infrared oven for 7 min.
MACHINE STATUS
- Oven fan stopped.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- Cotton wad,
Specific tool
- Soft paintbrush.
PROCEDURE
1 Open all the doors of the infrared oven modules.

1
2 Turn off the machine, see procedure "OP-B0002".
heating module support (A).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0009 Cleaning/checking the oven slit reflectors, dummy lamps and cooling shields 2
Checking / cleaning the reflectors (3) and dummy lamps (4) of the oven
Handle with care so as not to damage the part(s) .

!
1 Clean the dust off the reflectors (3) using a soft brush.
2 Clean the reflectors (3) using cotton wool dipped in
cleaning agent "NET A02".
3 Clean the product remaining on the reflectors (3) using
clean, dry cotton wool.
☞ Check that the following components are in good

condition:
3
+
- The reflectors (3) must not be damaged and
must retain their mirror-effect.
• Otherwise, replace them.
- The dummy lamps (4) must not be damaged.
• Otherwise, replace them.
4
- The dummy lamps (4) are held with pins (5).
4 Repeat the operation on all of the reflectors (3) and
dummy lamps (4).
Cleaning the cooling shields (6)

1 Clean the cooling shields (6) using a clean, dry cloth
and cleaning agent "NET A02".
2 Wipe off any remaining product on the cooling
shields (6) using a clean, dry cloth.
6

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Cleaning/checking the oven slit reflectors, dummy lamps and cooling shields MP-B0009 3/3
END OF OPERATION

A
2 Make sure that the cables (7) are in the correct
position.
3 Turn on the machine, see procedure "OP-B0001".
4 Close the oven doors.
7
1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Inspection/cleaning: braking system MP-B0010 1/9
GENERAL INFORMATION
x2
- The braking system is forced open

i pneumatically and then closes when air is
expelled.
- The number of brakes varies depending on
the machine model and configuration.
Do not inhale the dust from the brake systems.
!
MACHINE STATUS
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Brake linings (4) (if the brake linings are replaced) .
Consumables
- Clean, dry cloths,
- Light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock (if the brake linings
are replaced) .
Specific tool
- Torque wrench ,
- 0,5 mm thick foil.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/9 MP-B0010 Inspection/cleaning: braking system 3
PROCEDURE
Inspection and cleaning of the braking system
Cleaning
Never use air blow guns to clean the braking system. 1 2

!
Do not put any cleaning agent on the brake linings (4) of
! the braking system.
1 Remove the cover panels (1 ; 2).
2 Clean the accessible sections of the brake
disc (3) using a cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET
A04".
3 Use the JOG to make the other sections of the brake
disc (3) accessible.
4 Clean the other sections of the brake disc (3) using a
cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET A04". 3
Thoroughly wipe off the disc to remove any trace of

! cleaning agent.
Inspection
1 Check the condition of all of the parts of the brake
system visually.
2 Check the tightness of the fixing bolts (5) (tightened to a A
torque of 200 N.m. 3
3 Check the tightness of the fixing bolts (6) (tightened to a
torque of 87 N.m.
4 Check the brake linings (4).

5 Replace the brake linings (4):
- If the linings (4) are soiled by oil or grease.
3 Y
- If the wear indicator (Y) of linings (4) can no longer X
be seen.
X
For replacement of the brake linings, see the procedure
i below.
X
4
6 Turn off the JOG.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Braking system safety
Opening and securing of the braking system
! Extreme caution and perfect coordination between

the technicians is required for the following operations. 10
Do not touch the mobile parts of the braking system.
!
Technician No. 1
1 Remove the silencer (10).
2 Press and hold the handle (8).
The braking system is now open. 11
Never fit or remove the safety bolt (11) by hand; always
use a socket wrench.
Technician No. 2
3 Install the safety screw (11) in place of the
silencer (10).
4 Tighten the safety screw (11).
The safety screw (11), supplied, is attached by lug to
the brake system. 8
5 Give the signal to the first technician to release the
handle (8).
The braking system jaws are secured.
6 Cut off and lock out the main pneumatic circuit of the
machine, see procedure "OP-B0002".
Closing of the braking system

1 Remove lockout / tagout, and open the main pneumatic
circuit of the machine, see procedure "OP-B0001".
! Extreme caution and perfect coordination between

the technicians is required for the following operations.
Technician No. 1
2 Press and hold the handle (8).
The braking system is now open.
Never fit or remove the safety bolt (11) by hand; always
use a socket wrench. 10
Technician No. 2
3 Remove the safety screw (11).
The braking system jaws are now free to move.
4 Give the signal to the first technician to release the
handle (8).
The braking system is closed.
11
5 Position the safety bolt (11) in the fixing lug on the
braking system.
6 Replace the silencer (10)and tighten the silencer (10).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Check the gap between the linings (4) and the brake disc (3)
1 Proceed with the opening and securing of the braking
system, see procedure "Braking system safety" above. 3 4
2 Check the gap Ja between the linings and the brake
disc, using a set of thickness shims.
Gap Ja = 0,5 + 0,2/0 mm. Ja
Ja
3 Proceed with the closing of the braking system, see

procedure "Braking system safety" above.
A
4 Repeat the procedure for all of the machine brakes (A).
Replacing the brake linings
! Always replace the brake linings in pairs.
Removing
1 Remove the sensor (9).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

system, see procedure "Braking system safety" above. A
3 Disconnect the hose (12).
12
4 Remove the nuts (13), washers (14 ; 15) and bolts (16).
15 ; 16
5 Remove the brake (A).
13 X; 14

7 Remove the liners (4).
17
17
Replacing
1 Install the new brake linings (4).
2 Apply "LOCTITE 222" threadlock to the bolts (17). A
3 Tighten the bolts (17) to a torque of 30 N.m.
17
222
4 30 N.m

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4 Loosen the screw (18).

5 Loosen the nut (19).
6 Loosen the bolt (20) but do not remove it.
7 Loosen the check nuts (21). 21 22
8 Loosen the bolts (22) by approximately 2 turn(s).

The jaws are now free. 19
18
20 21 22
9 Position the screws (16) and washers (15) on the

brake (A). 11
10 Position the brake (A).
A
16
15
11 Install the nuts (13) and washers (14).

15 ; 16
13 X; 14

11
13 Reconnect the hose (12).
16
87 N.m
12


SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
15 Screw in the detector (9) to stop.

16 Adjust the air gap of the detector 9 (max range1,6 mm). 9
The detector indicator light (9) is on. 10
17 Tighten the lock-nut (23).
23
18 Adjust the gap Ja between the liners (4) and the brake
disc (3), see procedure below.
Adjusting the gap Ja between the linings (4) and the brake disc (3)
Adjusting the gap

1 Check that the notched nuts (24) are correctly
tightened. 24 3 4
2 Loosen the check nuts (21).
3 Loosen the bolts (22) by approximately 2 turn(s).
The jaws are now free. Ja
system, see procedure "Braking system safety" above.
22 Ja
21 4
5 Position a 0,5 mm thick foil between each lining (4) and

the brake disc (3). 25 21 22
procedure "Braking system safety" above. 4
7 Loosen the bolts (22) until they are in contact with
support (25).
8 Hold the screws (22) and tighten the check-nuts (21). 3
26 19 20 18 21 22

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

system, see procedure "Braking system safety" above. 26 4
10 Remove the 0,5 mm thick foil.
11 Loosen the screw (18).
12 Loosen the nut (19). Jb
Ja
13 Adjust the clearance Jb = 0,05 mm between the
screw (20) and the cylinder rod (26), using a set of
thickness shims.
Ja
14 Tighten the nut (19).
15 Tighten up the screw (18). 19 20 18 3 4
17 Press the handle (8) several times to test how the brake
works.
18 Check the gap Ja again between the linings (4) and the
brake disc (3).
• If necessary, commence adjustment again.
8
19 Fit the casings (1 ; 2).

27
20 Make sure there is no interference between the
bolts (27) and the casings (1 ; 2).
1;2
Braking efficiency check
A braking efficiency check, after replacement of the brake linings, is mandatory before starting production on the
! machine.
1 Rotate the machine at production speed.
2 Press one of the emergency stop buttons.
☞ The machine stops immediately.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Check the efficiency of machine braking

• Press keys (T1 ; T2 ; T3). T1
• Key (T2) corresponds to the sub-
family "maintenance".
• The key (T3) corresponds to the
tab "miscellaneous".
T2
• The (A) window appears.
Xxxxx
T3
B
A
4 Check the displayed value.
☞ The displayed value (B) must be less than the threshold value (1) programmed by the customer.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Degreasing/checking the self-lubricated cams MP-B0011 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Parts to be degreased:
- Mold opening/closing cam (1),
- Mold base raise/lower cam (2),
- Loading/offloading cams (3).
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds,
- Recycle carriage removed.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- "LUB A21" grease,
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
1 Block and lock the machine rotation using the flange

system , see procedure "OP-B0027".
2 Remove excess and splashed grease from the
cams (1 ; 2 ; 3) and their surrounding areas using clean,
dry cloths.
3 Clean the cam races (1 ; 2 ; 3) using a brush dipped in
degreasing agent "NET A04".
• Unblock machine rotation and make the other parts
of the cam races (1 ; 2 ; 3) accessible using manual 1
rotation.
• Block and lock the machine rotation using the flange
system.
4 2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0011 Degreasing/checking the self-lubricated cams 2
4 Clean the inside of the grease recovery tank (4), using a

cloth soaked in cleaning agent "NET A04".
5 Check the condition of the cam races (1 ; 2 ; 3) and the
followers .
X
• If there is excess wear, contact SIDEL for full
diagnostics.
X
6 Grease the cam races (1 ; 2 ; 3) using a paintbrush and
3
the "LUB A21" grease. X
Area to be greased. X
• Unblock machine rotation.

• Make the non-greased zones of the cam races accessible
using manual rotation.
END OF OPERATION
Never restart the machine without ensuring that the cam

races are sufficiently lubricated.
1 Turn the machine a few times using the JOG system.
Do not wipe the cam races (1 ; 2 ; 3).
!
2 Wipe off any grease splashes using a clean, dry cloth.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Checking the tension on the timing belt MP-B0012 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The number of timing belts varies according to

i the configuration of the machine.
If the belts lose their tension regularly after the
commissioning period check the settings and
conditions of the various mechanical parts and
replace the belt if necessary.
MACHINE STATUS
3
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
- Frequency meter (3) and instructions for use.
PROCEDURE
Identifying the belt tension values

1 Remove the "transmission kinematics"
A 2
drawings (A) from the drawing file delivered with the
machine.
2 Identify the various belts according to the machine
configuration, using the "transmission kinematics"
drawings (A).
The references (1) indicate the inspection
i points and the tension reference "Tx" of each
belt.
3 Note the belt tension values (2) on the machine, using
the "transmission kinematics" drawings (A).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0012 Checking the tension on the timing belt 2
Checking the tension on the timing belt

1 Check that there are no tears in the belts .
1 B
To check the belt tensions with the frequency
i meter, make the belts vibrate by tapping them
with a flat wrench. X X
2 Check the belt tensions using the frequency meter (3) at
the position indicated. X X
If the tension is incorrect.
• Identify the tensioner (4) of the belt concerned, X X
using the transmission kinematics" drawing (A).
• Adjust the tension of the belt concerned, Xsee X
procedure "MP-B0071".
X X
4

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Checking the alignment of the transmission belts MP-B0013 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The alignment of the belts is checked after their
first 500 and 1000 operating hours.
MACHINE STATUS

B0027".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
7
Specific tool
- Precision spirit level (7).
PROCEDURE
Inspection
1 Check the belt tensions, see procedure "MP-B0071".

2 Make sure that the belt (2) is lined up on the tensioner
roller (3) on each pulley (4). 4
• The belt (2) must be centered on the tensioner 3
roller (3) and on each pulley (4).
☞ If the belt is incorrectly positioned, see the

adjustment procedure below.
4

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0013 Checking the alignment of the transmission belts 2
Adjusting
1 Loosen the tensioner (3) bolts (5) but do not remove
them.
4
5 4
5
2 Adjust the height and flatness of the tensioner using the

bolt/check nut assembly and a spirit level .
3 Check alignment of the belt (2).
7
3 = 0,00 mm/m
4 Tighten the bolts (5).
4
6 3
END OF OPERATION
1 Repeat the operation on all of the transmission belts.

2 Operate the machine a few times and then check the
alignment of the belts again.
3 Check the belt tensions, see procedure "MP-B0071".

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Checking the guiding rollers of the unscrambler rollers MP-B0014 1/1
MACHINE STATUS
- Unscrambler roller assembly clear of preforms, see
PROCEDURE
2
2
1 Check the condition of the rollers (1).

- Smooth appearance.
- No crazing.
- Residues on the unscrambler rollers (2).
In case of problem, contact your maintenance department.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the oven cooling system filters MP-B0019 1/1
GENERAL INFORMATION
! Replace the filter (1) with a technically identical

filter.
The number and size of the filters vary
i according to the machine model and
configuration.
MACHINE STATUS
- Oven cold, 1
- Oven fan stopped.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Filter (1).
Consumables
PROCEDURE
1 Remove the filter (1).

2 Fit the new filter (1).
3 Repeat the operation for all of the filters (1).
! Dispose of the used filters in compliance with

current legislation.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the grease cartridges of the oven automatic greasers MP-B0020 1/3
GENERAL INFORMATION A
There are 2 types of automatic greasers:
- Type A greaser,
- Type B greaser.
Use the applicable procedure. B
The oven is equipped with 2 automatic
i greasers in each access zone (Z1 ; Z2).
For more information about the configuration of
i the automatic greaser control head, see the
manufacturer's manual or contact SIDEL.
MACHINE STATUS
- Oven fan stopped.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Grease cartridge (1).
Z2 Z1
Consumables
PROCEDURE
Type A greaser
1 Identify the connection between each electrical
connector (2) and the corresponding automatic A
greaser (A).
2 Loosen then pull the electrical connector (2).
3 Loosen and remove the automatic greaser (A) by hand. 2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0020 Replacing the grease cartridges of the oven automatic greasers 2
4 Loosen the ring (3) of the control unit (4).

3
! Dispose of the grease cartridge in accordance
with applicable legislation.
5 Clean the support (5) using a clean, dry cloth.
6 Fit the control unit (4) on the new grease cartridge (1). 5
7 Tighten the ring (3) of the control unit (4). 1 4
! Tighten the ring (3) to mark (6): the arrow

point.
9 Screw the automatic greaser (A) lightly onto its
6
base (2).
10 Install and then tighten the electrical connector (2).
! Observe the positioning of the electrical

connector pins (2).
11 Repeat the operation until the cartridges (1) of all the
automatic greasers (A) have been replaced.
Type B greaser
1 Identify the connection between each electrical
connector (2) and the corresponding automatic
greaser (B).
2 Unclip the electrical connector (2) by pulling on its axle.
3 Loosen and remove the automatic greaser (B) by hand.
2 B
4 Remove the cover (8) manually.

8
! Dispose of the grease cartridge (1)
accordance with applicable legislation.
in 5
3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the grease cartridges of the oven automatic greasers MP-B0020 3/3
6 Fit the control unit (9) on the new grease cartridge (1).
7 1 9 8
7 Fit the cover (8) and screw it on manually.
9 Screw the automatic greaser (B) lightly onto its
base (5).
10 Clip on the electrical connector (2).
! Observe the positioning of the electrical

connector pins (2).
11 Repeat the operation until the cartridges (1) of all the
automatic greasers (B) have been replaced.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the guide rings and the scraper seals on the stretching rods MP-B0021 1/3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Warning - magnetic field. For further

information, "see chapter "Safety precautions
when using blowing station electric
stretching"", in the User Manual.
1 2 3 4 5
Users of active implants (pacemaker, hearing
aid, et cetera) or any other ferromagnetic
implant (prosthesis, et cetera) are not qualified T1
for working with these types of devices and
must not approach them.
T2
T3
Do not bring metal or electronic objects (watch,
tool, telephone, etc.) within the vicinity of the
magnetic field.
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds,
- Latex gloves
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Scraper seal (1)
- Guide ring (2),
- Rod seal (3),
- Shoulder guide ring (4),
- O-ring (5).
Consumables
- "LUB A03" grease,
- Sprayer containing alcohol-based disinfectant.
Specific tool
- Extraction tool (T1),
- Dummy stretching rod (T2),

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0021 Replacing the guide rings and the scraper seals on the stretching rods 3
PROCEDURE
Removing
1 Remove the stretching rod , see procedure "CO-

B0002".
2 Remove the cover (6). 6
3 Remove the scraper seal (1) from the cover (6).
4 Remove the guide ring (2).
5 Unlock and open the mold support unit.
6 Remove the nozzle nose from the blow station, see
6 1
7 Remove the rod guide assembly (7) using the

extractor (T3).
T3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the guide rings and the scraper seals on the stretching rods MP-B0021 3/3
R:0
V : 170
8 Remove the following items: xxx

B : 214
A : 255
2 7 3a 3 4 5
- O-ring (5). R : 83
- Shoulder guide ring (4).

V : 170
B : 49
A : 255
1 cm = 78 px
2 cm = 156 px
9 Remove the rod seal (3) and its ring (3a) using the
3 cm = 234 px
4 cm = 312 px
5 cm = 390 px
extraction tool (T1).

6 cm = 468 px
7 cm = 546 px R : 235
V : 110
8 cm = 624 px B : 18
9 cm = 702 px A : 255
10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px
12 cm = 936 px
T1
13 cm = 1014 px
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px R : 226
16 cm = 1248 px V : 25
B : 44
17 cm = 1326 px A : 255
18 cm = 1404 px
243
Replacing
1 Clean the cover (6) the rod-guide (7) and its
housing using a clean dry cloth.
3 3a
2 Spray alcohol-based disinfectant on all items handled
during the procedure.
3 Replace the following parts:
- Scraper seal (1).
- Guide ring (2).
- Rod seal (3) and its ring (3a). 4
1
- Shoulder guide ring (4).
- O-ring (5).
4 Install the elements in the reverse order of the removal,

T2
- Do not grease the ring seals (3 ; 5).
- Install the rod seal (3) and its ring (3a) correctly in
the inner groove of the shoulder ring (4).
- Use the dummy stretching rod (T2) to properly align
all of the parts prior to tightening of the screws (8).
- Grease the threads on the screws (8) using "LUB
A03" grease. 8
6 Remove the dummy stretching rod (T2). 9 N.m
7 Fit the stretching rod .

8 Fit the nozzle tip, see procedure "MP-B0022".
9 Disinfect surfaces and items handled during the
procedure, using a sprayer and alcohol-based
disinfectant.
10 Close and lock the mold support unit.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Reconditioning the nozzles MP-B0022 1/17
GENERAL INFORMATION
Warning - magnetic field. For further information, see chapter

"Safety precautions when using blowing station electric
stretching", in the User Manual.
maintenance interval:
3 2 1 A1
Frequency * Type Sub-assembly
3 000 h Inspection A1
6 000 h Replacement A1 + B + C A2
12 000 h Replacement A1 + A2 + B + C + D
* For information. Refer to the "maintenance schedule" of the machine.
4 5
6 7
MACHINE STATUS
B
- The machine is stopped, 11
- Cold molds.
9 8
- Latex gloves C
12
MATERIALS REQUIRED
16 14
Part D
- Nozzle tip (A1;A2):
- O-rings (1 ; 3),
- Neck rim end-piece stop (2),
- Neck-rim end-piece (4),
- Heel nozzle seal (5).
15
- Nozzle sealing block (B):
- O-ring (6),
- Spring thrust (7) (qty: 2),
T1 T2
- Spring (8),
- Lip seal (9),
- Guiding segment (11).
- Nozzle control (C):
- Antitorque coil (12) (qty: 2).
- Nozzle guide (D): T3
T4
- Scraper seal (14) (qty: 2),
- Adjusting rings (15) (qty: 2),
T5
- Socket (16).
Consumables T6 T7
- Light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock,
- "LOCTITE 243" normal threadlock,
- "LOCTITE 401" adhesive,
- Sprayer containing alcohol-based disinfectant,
Specific tool

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/17 MP-B0022 Reconditioning the nozzles 3
- 32 mm (T1) wrench,
- 45 mm (T3) wrench,
- Cylinder stroke centering device (T4),
- Nozzle control adjustment tool (T5),
- Centerer cover tool (T6),
- Spring thrust glueing tool (T7).
PROCEDURE
T4
1 Remove the stretching rod, see procedure "CO-B0002".
Removal of the nozzle tip (A)

1 Unlock and open the mold support unit.
2 Hold the bell (17) and remove the bolts (18). 18
14
7
T1a
17
T4
3 Remove the bell (17).

The liner (19) is held in place by a seal on the
i sealing block (B).
B
6 19
T1a
17
4 Remove the nozzle ring (20).

17
20

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
5 Remove the o-ring (1).

20
6 Remove the thust (2).
2
7 Remove nozzle seal (5).

17
8 Remove the neck-rim end-piece (4) by pulling it

downwards.
9 Remove the spring (8).
10 Remove the spring thrust (7).
7
8
6
19
7
T1a
4
If the 3 000 h maintenance interval has been reached:

1 Check that the following components are in good
4 3 5 2 1
condition:
- Heel nozzle seal (5),
- O-rings (1 ; 3).
• If one of the components is damaged (abnormal
wear, tear, crack, breakage), replace all of the
components .
2 Fit the nozzle tip (A), see procedure "installing the
nozzle tip (A)".

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

4 3 5 2 1
- O-rings (1 ; 3).
2 Recondition the nozzle sealing block (B), see above.

4 3 5 2 1
- O-rings (1 ; 3).
2 Recondition the nozzle sealing block (B), see above.
Reconditioning of the nozzle sealing block (B)

243
1 Loosen the screw (22) but do not remove it.
20 N.m
22

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Remove the liner (19) manually.

The
243 liner (19) is held in place by a seal on the
i sealing block (B).
20 N.m B
7
19
3 Loosen the sealing block (B) by a few threads using the

wrench (T3).
6 T3
B
T1a
4 Position the tool (T6) on the centerer cover (13).

5 Remove the sealing block (B) using the wrench (T1).
7 B
T6
T1a
T1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
6 Hold the guide pin (26) and remove the bolt (27) and the
21
washer.
Do not change the position of the nozzle up
! rod (21).
7 Remove the bell end-piece (28) / bell-holder (29).
• If necessary, lightly tap using a plastic mallet.
26
29
27 28
On the sealing block (B):

243
1 Remove the o-ring (6).
20 N.m
T4
2 Install the sealing block (B) in a vise equipped with non-

marring jaws.
3 Remove the spring thrust (7).
The spring thrust (7) is glued on the centerer
i cover (13). 7
7 13
T1a
B

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Reconditioning the nozzles MP-B0022

T4 7/17
4 Position the tool (T6) on the centerer cover (13).

T1
5 Remove the centerer cover (13) using tools (T1 ; T6).
You may have difficulty loosening them.
i
7
6
T6
T1a 13
6 Remove the lip seal (9), without marking the sealing

block (B).
T1
7
9
6
T1a
B
On the bell end-piece (28):

1 Remove the guide segment (11) from the bell end-
piece using the extraction tool (T2). 28
7
6
T1a
T2
11

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Reconditioning:
1 Clean all the parts handled during the operation with a
clean, dry cloth.
243
2 Install the sealing block (B) in a vise equipped with non-
marring jaws.
3 Position the new lip seal (9).
20 N.m T6
9
4 Use the centerer cover (13) and tool (T6) to properly
position the lip seal (9) in its housing.
5 Screw in the centerer cover (13) until it stops. 13
The lip seal (9) is positioned on the sealing block.
6 Remove the centerer cover (13).
B B 9
7 Apply "LOCTITE 243" threadlock on the threads of the

centerer cover (13). T1
243
8 Tighten the centerer cover (13) on the sealing
block (B) using tools (T1 ; T6).
20 N.m
T6
13 B
243
9 Position the new spring thrust (7) on the glueing

tool (T7).
10 Apply a small quantity of "LOCTITE 401" glue on the
spring thrust (7). 7
6 1
7
401
T8
T7

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
11 Push the nozzle sealing

block (B) / centerer (13) assembly on the tool (T7). B
☞ Wait for a few seconds.
7
The thrust washer is centered and glued on the
centerer . 6
13
1
T7 B
12 Quickly clean off the traces of glue on the tool T7.

- Guiding segment (11), 401
- O-ring (6). 7
14 Install the nozzle sealing
6
block (B), see above.
T7
39
21
Installation of the nozzle sealing block (B)

7
1 Clean all the parts handled during the operation with a 401
1 B
clean, dry cloth.
2 Install the bell end-piece (28) / bell-
holder (29) assembly.
3 Hold the guide pin (26), and screw in the bolt (27) until 26
contact.
27
29
28

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
10/
MP-B0022 Reconditioning the nozzles 3
17
4 Apply "LOCTITE 222" threadlock on the thread of the

sealing block (B).
7 B
6
222
7
T1a
5 Screw in the sealing block (B) using tools (T1 ; T6).

6 Tighten the sealing block (B) using the wrench (T3).
7 B
6
T3
T6
T1a
T1
7 Position the liner (19) on the sealing block.
Engage the small diameter of the

! liner (19) upwards.
8 Fit the nozzle tip (A), see above.
7 B
6
19
12
T1a
Installing the nozzle tip (A)

clean, dry cloth.
2 Clean the neck rim end-piece (4) using a clean cloth
and cleaning agent "NET A03".
3 Spray alcohol-based disinfectant on all items handled
during the procedure.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
11/
17
Do not grease the ring seals (1 ; 3). 3 4 5 20 2 1

!
NET A03
4 Position respectively the o-rings (1 ; 3) in the neck-rim 17
end-piece (4) and on the nozzle ring (20).
5 Assemble the following parts:
- Nozzle bell cover (17),
- Nozzle ring (20),
- Neck rim end-piece stop (2).

- Spring thrust (7),
- Spring (8). 19
- Neck-rim end-piece7 (4), 13
- Spring thrust (7),6
- Spring (8). 8
8 Position the neck-rim end-piece (4) until it stops on the
centerer cover (13). 7
T1a 18
4
9 Apply "LOCTITE 222" threadlock to the bolts (18).

10 Guide the liner (19) correctly in its housing during
reassembly. Assembly should take place without
obstruction. 7 19
18
11 Install the nozzle bell
6
(17).
12 Tighten the bolts (18). 222
19
T1a
17
13 Close and lock the mold support unit.

14 Fit the stretching rod.
15 For a 3000 h-hour maintenance interval, the procedure
is now complete.
16 If not, continue with the procedure.
Reconditioning the nozzle up control (C)

1 Deactivate the braking system of the stretching slide on
the blowing station concerned, see procedure "OP-
B0042".

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
12/
17

24
The support (24) is held in position with pins.
3 Remove the bearing support (24) without applying force
on the nozzle control rod (21).
23
X
21
4 Remove the antitorque coils (12).

5 If the 12 000 h maintenance interval has been reached: 12
X
• Recondition the nozzle guide (D).
6 If not:
• Install the nozzle up control (C), see procedure
"installing the nozzle up control".
80 N.m
21
Reconditioning the nozzle guide (D)

1 Remove the bolt (27).
2 Remove up rod (21) / guide pin (26) assembly. 21
D 26
27

4 Remove the cover (33). 9 33 X
X
32
34

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
13/
17
6 Hold the bush (16) and remove the nozzle guide (35).
14 15
7 Remove the washer (15) and the scraper seal (14).
35
16
8 Remove the socket (16).

35
X 33 15 14
9 Remove the washer (15) and the scraper seal (14).
10 Fit the nozzle guide, see above.
16
= 14b
Installing the nozzle guide (D)

33 14a 14b 15
clean, dry cloth.
- Socket (16),
- Adjusting rings (15),
- Scraper seals (14).
3 Position the scraper seal (14a+14b) and the
washer (15) in the cover (33).

32
- Cover (33), 35
- Scraper seal (14),
- Adjustment washer (15), 243
- Nozzle guide (35), 16
- Socket (16).
9 N.m
5 Apply "LOCTITE 243" threadlock to the bolts (32). 15
6 Tighten the bolts (32) to a torque of 9 Nm.
33 14 33 35

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
14/
17
7 Position the scraper seal (14a+14b) and the

washer (15) on the support (36). D
8 Hold the bush (16) and install the nozzle guide (D).
15
14a+14b
16
36
9 Position the nozzle guide (D) so that the "station

number" label (37) is visible when facing the nozzle
guide.
37 D
10 Apply "LOCTITE 243" threadlock to the bolts (34).D
34
243
9 N.m
12 Position the nozzle up rod (21) / guide

pin (26) assembly carefully in the nozzle guide (D) to
prevent damage to the seals (14). 21
13 Apply normal "LOCTITE 243" threadlock on the
bolt (27).
14 Hold the guide pin (26) and torque the bolt (27) to a
torque of 80 Nm. 26
15 Install the nozzle up control, see above. 27
243
80 N.m

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
15/
17
Installing the nozzle up control

22
2 Apply "LOCTITE 243" threadlock to the screw (22).
3 Position, but do not tighten, the bolt (22) on the control
rod (21). 243
12
X
4 Orient the support plate (25) (see illustration on the
right).
5 Position the antitorque coils (12).
80 N.m
21 25
6 Check that the 2 pins (38) are in place.

39
9 24 38
X
7 Install the bearing support (24), and position the guide
rods (39) in the antitorque coils (12).
23
X
222
12
18 16 N.m
10 Position the centering tool (T5).

The pins (T5a) are positioned in the holes of the
support plate (25). 39
X
The guide rods (39) pass through the tool (T5). 25
T5a
18 T5
11 Hold the tool (T5), and tighten the bolt (22).

9 X 1
The antitorque coils (12) must rotate freely.
! 22
12 Remove the wrench (T5). 12
12
T5
9 X 1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
16/
17
13 Close and lock the doors.

14 At the HMI, activate the braking system of the stretching
slide and perform the referencing on the blowing station
concerned, see procedure "OP-B0042".
The slide is in the up position.
Checking the nozzle cylinder stroke

1 Install the cylinder stroke adjustment centering
device (T4) on the mold.
2 Check the nozzle cylinder stroke.
The nozzle seal (5) is in contact with the centering
device (T4).
The tool (T4) must slide freely.
3 If the nozzle cylinder has been correctly adjusted, the
procedure is now complete. 5 T4
4 If not:
• Adjust the nozzle cylinder stroke, see above.
Adjusting the nozzle cylinder stroke 9 X 1

B0042".
2 Hold the slide and release the stretching rod.
3 Lower the slide manually as far as it will go and remove
the stretching rod.
4 Loosen the check-nut (41).
5 Loosen the adjusting bolt (42).
42
41
6 Manually lift the nozzle.

7 Install the cylinder stroke adjustment centering 9 X 1
device (T4) on the mold.
device (T4).
5
T4
9 X 1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
17/
17
8 Screw in the bolt (42) until contact with the bolt

head (21).
42
Do not fully tighten the bolt.
!
9 Apply threadlock "LOCTITE 222" to the thread of the
nut (41).
41
21
222

The centering device (T4) must slide without constraint 9 1 42
between the mold and the nozzle.
11 Remove the centering device (T4).
The nozzle cylinder stroke has been adjusted.
41

13 Install the stretching rod by manually lifting the slide . 9 1
5 T4
9 X 1
END OF OPERATION

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the silencers of the mold support unit compensation solenoid valves MP-B0023 1/1
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds,
- JOG in service, or otherwise, manual rotation,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- silencers (1).
Consumables
Specific tool 1
- Mixed key No.3/8".
PROCEDURE
1 Unscrew and remove the silencers (1).
1 N°3/8"
2 Clean the base (2) of the compensation solenoid

valve (3) using a clean dry cloth. 3
3 Fit and tighten the new silencer (1).
2
1 N°3/8"

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the mold-support unit compensation system MP-B0024 1/8
MACHINE STATUS 1 21 2 x4

- Mold and mold base removed, see procedure "MP-
B0100",
B0027",
- Hydraulic circuit of the mold shells drained, see
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
3
- Compensation seal(s) (1 ; 21),
- Compensation box (2) x4,
- Set of slides (3).
Consumables
- Cleaning agent "NET A04", T1
- Light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock.
Specific tool
- Tool adjusting bar ,
- Tool compensation bush (T1): 011808268,
- Torque wrench 5 to 20 daN.
PROCEDURE
Preliminary check(s)
1 Using a bar and the set of thickness gauges, check the 10

height h of the left half-shell support (6) with respect to
the right half-shell support (13). 6
Height h = 0 +0/-0,1 mm. 13
If this is not the case:

h
• Replace the slides . See the following procedure.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/8 MP-B0024 Replacing the mold-support unit compensation system 3
Removing
Make sure that the hydraulic circuit of the mold shells

! has been drained.
5
1 In the presence of a mold neck cooling circuit:

• Remove the bolts (4).
• Remove the distribution block (5) from the left half-
shell support (6).
4
9
7 8
6
T1
7
10
2
2 Remove the hydraulic couplers (7) from the left half-shell support (6).
3 If present, remove the pneumatic coupler (8) from the left half-shell support (6).
The bolts (9) and the compensation boxes (2) are assembled with light threadlock "LOCTITE 222". You
i may have difficulty loosening them.
5 Loosen and remove the compensation boxes (2) using a wrench and the compensation bush (T1).
6 Remove the left half-shell support (6) from the support
block (10).
10

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Depending on the configuration, your machine is fitted

i with type (A) or (B) shell supports.
A
Depending on the process, the type (B) or 1 shell

i supports are fitted with 1 or 2 compensation seals.
7 Remove any installed compensation seals (1 ; 21).
1 21 6
B
8 If necessary, replace the slides (3).

• Remove the bolts (11). 12 11
• Remove the slides (3).
Do not remove the peel shims (12).
!
Replacing
1 Replace the following parts, according to the
recommended frequency:
- Compensation seal(s) (1 ; 21),
- Compensation box (2).
2 Also replace the parts (3) if damaged.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Install the slides (3).

10
5 Position the left half-shell support (6) in the left support 6
block (10). 13
! Make sure that the shell support (6) is resting

on the slides (3). h
6 Close the mold support unit but do not lock it.

7 Using a bar and the set of thickness gauges, check the
height h = 0 +0/-0,1 mm of the left half-shell
support (6) with respect to the right half-shell 10 11
222
support (13).
• If necessary, adjust the number of peel shims (12) to 1,5 N.m
set the height of the left half-shell support (6).

8 After slides (3) setting, apply light threadlock "LOCTITE
222" on the bolts (11).
9 Tighten the bolts (11) to a torque of 1,5 Nm.
10 Remove the left half-shell support (6) from the support 12 3
block (10).
11 Clean the left half-shell support (6) and the left support
block (10) using a cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET A
A04".
12 Never use grease to install compensation
seals (1 ; 21). 12
Position the new seal (1 ; 21) on the left half-shell
support (6).
! Position the lugs (14) of the

5 seal (1 ; 21) in the
half-shell support groove (6).
1 21 14 6
B
4
21
12
6
23
6
14
1 ; 21
B

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
13 Position the left half-shell support (6) in the left support

block (10).
To facilitate the installation of the compensaiton
i seal (1): 6
• Stagger 2 straps around the seal (1) of the
half-shell support (6).
• After the installation, hold the half-shell
support (6) in position and pull on the
straps.
! Make sure that the shell support (6) is resting

on the slides (3).
10
1 6

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
14 Apply "LOCTITE 222" threadlock to the threads of the

compensation boxes (2).
15 Screw in the compensation boxes (2) to press the left
half-shell support (6) against the left support block (10).
! Screw in the compensation boxes (2) crosswire

to correctly position the left half-shell
support (6).
16 Screw in the compensation boxes (2) to a torque of 15
Nm, using a torque wrench and the tool (T1).
18 Tighten the bolts (9) to a torque of 10 Nm. 10 222 10 N.m
9 2 222 15 N.m
7 8 2
6
T1
7
10
19 If present, install the pneumatic coupler (8) of the left half-shell support (6).
20 Install the hydraulic couplers (7) of the left half-shell support (6).
In the presence of a mold neck cooling circuit:
i • Position the distribution block (5) on the left half-shell support (6).
• Tighten the bolts (4).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Adjustment of the clearance X = 0,05 +0,02/0 mm between the support thrusts (15)
1 Close and lock the mold support unit manually. X
10 15
2 Hold the bolts (16) in place and loosen the check-
nuts (17).
3 Loosen the bolts (16).
4 Tighten the thrust bolts (16) by hand to get the
clearance X = 0,05 +0,02/0 mm.
15
10
5 Hold the bolts (16) and torque the lock bolts (17) to 9,5
Nm.
6 Repeat the operation at all of the blowing
stations, making sure that you:
system, before carrying out the work.
16 17 9,5 N.m
END OF OPERATION
1 Turn on the power supplies to the machine.

2 Fit the molds and the mold bases.
3 Check proper locking of the half-molds on the shell supports.
4 Check the proper locking of the mold base on the carriage.
5 Start the machine.
6 Wait for the molds to reach working temperature.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
7 Run the machine through a few production rotations.

8 Check the clearance X = 0,05 +0,02/0 mm between the support thrusts (15).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the locking synthetic rollers of the mold support units MP-B0025 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Locking rollers (1),
- Notched brake nut (2).
Consumables
1 2
Specific tool
- Tool (T1) (01159173801 code).
T1
PROCEDURE
Removing
1 Loosen and remove the notched brake nut (2).

2 Remove the following parts:
- Rollers(1),
1
- Spacer (3).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0025 Replacing the locking synthetic rollers of the mold support units 2
Replacing
- Locking rollers (1),
- Notched brake nut (2).
2 Clean the shaft (4) and the spacer (3) using a clean, dry 4
cloth.
1
making sure that you: 3
• Fit the spacer (3) between the 2 new rollers (1).
4 Make sure that the rollers move freely (1). 1
5 Repeat the operation at all of the blowing stations. 2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the mold support unit dampers MP-B0026 1/1
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Shock absorber (1).
Consumables
Specific tool
- Mixed key No.23,
- Mixed key No.32.
PROCEDURE
Removing
1 Unlock and open the mold support unit manually.

3 Loosen and remove the shock absorber (1) from the
support (3). 3 1
N°23
N°32
Replacing
1 Replace the shock absorber (1) with an identical shock
absorber.
3 Tighten the shock absorber (1) against stop on the
support (3).
! Do not tighten the damper (1). 1 N°23
4 Hold the shock absorber (1) and tighten the counter- 2 N°32
nut (2).
3
5 Close and lock the mold support unit manually.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the transfer arm followers MP-B0027 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following operations are carried out on the

i workbench. The procedure is identical for the
replacement of synthetic or steel rollers.
MACHINE STATUS
- Transfer arm removed, see procedure "MP-
B0051".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
1 2 3 11
- Rollers_(1 ; 2 ; 3)
- Roller (11), in the presence of controlled grips
Consumables
- Clean, dry cloths
- "LUB A15" grease
- "LOCTITE 243" normal threadlock
Specific tool
- Clean, dry paintbrush
PROCEDURE
Replacing the rollers (1 ; 2)
Removing
1 Hold the shaft (4) using the appropriate wrench.
2 Remove the nut (5).
4
1
3
2
3 Remove the bolt (4) and the washer (6).

6

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/4 MP-B0027 Replacing the transfer arm followers 2
4 Collect and keep all the washers (7).
5 Remove the following parts:

1 8 2
- Roller (1),
- Spacer (8),
- Roller (2).
6 Replace the rollers (1 ; 2).
Replacing
1 Clean using a clean, dry cloth:
- Shaft (4),
- Adjusting rings (7),
- Spacer (8).
• Fit all previously removed washers (7).
• Slightly coat the shank of bolt (4) with "LUB
A15" grease using a clean, dry brush. 4
☞ Make sure that the new rollers (1 ; 2) move freely.
Replacing the roller (3)
Removing
The shaft (9) is assembled with normal

i threadlock "LOCTITE 243". You may have difficulty 9
loosening the pin (9).
1 Remove the shaft (9).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the transfer arm followers MP-B0027 3/4
2 Collect and keep all the washers (10).
10
3 Remove the roller (3).

4 Replace the roller (3).
3
Replacing
- Shaft (9),
- Adjusting rings (10).
9
• Fit all previously removed washers (10). 243
• Apply threadlock "LOCTITE 243" to the thread of the

shaft (9).
☞ Make sure that the new roller (3) moves freely.
Replacing the roller (11)
Removing

i threadlock "LOCTITE 243". You may have difficulty
loosening the pin (12).
2
3
11

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/4 MP-B0027 Replacing the transfer arm followers 2

3 Replace the roller (11). 12
11
Replacing
1 Clean the shaft (12) using a clean dry cloth.
• Apply threadlock "LOCTITE 243" to the thread of the 12
shaft (12).
☞ Make sure that the new roller (11) moves freely. 243
3 Repeat the operation at all of the transfer arms .

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the tensioner wheel 3 sector guides MP-B0028 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
! Replace all the upper and lower sectors of the

tensioner wheel during the operation.
The following procedure is carried out in the
zone (A) where the sectors (2 ; 4) are no longer
in contact with the spindle chain .
MACHINE STATUS
- Oven fan stopped,
- Oven UV cabins in lowered position (if present in
the oven)
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- 2 sets of 3 sector guides (1 ; 2).
Consumables
PROCEDURE
Removing
1 Bring the sector to be removed to the work area (A), 3 1
A
using the JOG.
The bolts (3 ; 4) are fitted with light "LOCTITE
i 222" threadlock. You may find some difficulty
loosening the fixing bolts (3 ; 4).
3 Remove the upper sector (1).
5 Remove the lower sector (2).
4 2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0028 Replacing the tensioner wheel 3 sector guides 3
Replacing
1 Clean the contact surfaces using a clean cloth sprayed 5
with cleaning agent "NET A03".
2 Position the lower sector (2) on the tensioner wheel (5).
! Make sure that there is a clearance

of 0,5mm Max between each sector.
Fit the bolts (3 ; 4) having applied "LOCTITE
222" light threadlock
3 Fit and tighten the bolts (4).
4 Position the upper sector (1) on the tensioner
wheel (5).
5 Fit and tighten the bolts (3).
6 Repeat the previous steps until all the sectors (1 ; 2) of
the tensioner wheel (5) have been replaced.
222
4 2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the exhaust silencers on the blow blocks MP-B0029 1/1
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds,
- JOG in service, or otherwise, manual rotation.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Silencer (1).
Consumables
- Teflon tape (3).
1 3
PROCEDURE
Removing
1 Remove the silencer (1).
Replacing
1 Replace the silencer (1).

3 Apply teflon tape (3) on the threaded section of the new silencer (1).
4 Install and slightly tighten the silencer (1).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the rollers of the mold opening/closing levers MP-B0030 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds,
B0027".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Rollers (1),
- Brake nut_(2).
Consumables
- Clean, dry cloths, 1
- "LOCTITE 243" normal threadlock.
Specific tool
- Small vice,
- Embout mâle 6 mm,
- Torque wrench 10 to 50 N.m.
PROCEDURE
Removing
- You may have difficulty removing the bolt (2)
2 Remove the locking washer (4).
3 Remove the rollers (1) and the spacer (5). 1
4 Replace the rollers (1) with new rollers .
5 Clean the following components using a clean, dry 4
cloth:
- The contact surface , 6mm
2
- The bolt (2), the washers (3 ; 4) and the
spacer (5).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0030 Replacing the rollers of the mold opening/closing levers 2
Replacing
- Fit the spacer (5) between the 2 new rollers (1).
- Apply a light threadlock "LOCTITE 243" on the
bolt (2).
- Tighten the bolt (2) to a torque of 34 N.m.
2 Make sure that the rollers move freely (1).
stations, making sure that you:
system , before carrying out the work.
1 5
6mm 34 N.m
3
243 2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the filters of the pneumatic panel and the on-board air system MP-B0031 1/11
GENERAL INFORMATION
Reference Filter designation SIDEL reference

1 MS6-LFP-E 40µm 00000154061
2 MS6-LFP-C 5µm 00000178535
3a Synteq XP 0,01µm 00000177583
3b Synteq XP 0,01µm 00000177586
4 Ultrair S 0,01µm 00000150619
5 LFP-D-MIDI-5M 5µm 00000131856
1 2 3a 3b 4 5
MACHINE STATUS
B 186 mm 135 mm
- The on-board air system is accessible in the work
area ,
B0027",
- Pneumatic circuit cut off and locked out, see
MATERIALS REQUIRED 0000177583

0000177586
Consumables
3a
- Clean, dry cloths, 3b
- "Festo" grease(supplied with the filters (3)).
1 2 3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/11 MP-B0031 Replacing the filters of the pneumatic panel and the on-board air system 2
PROCEDURE
Location of the filters
C A B
3
3
1 2
Reference Designation Filter Filtering capacity T3SIDEL

A reference
A Line 7 bar 1 40 µm 00000154061
A Line 7 bar 2 5 µm 00000178535
B Line 40 bar 3b 0,01 µm 00000177586
C Double line 40 bar (option) 3b 0,01 µm 00000177586

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
E D F G
5 5
3 3
T3 A
Reference Designation Filter Filtering capacity SIDEL reference
D Solenoid valve control line of the blowing system 5 5 µm 00000131856
E Pre-blowing air pressure-reduction line 3a 0,01 µm 00000177583
"push-up" and "pushed-up base" pressure reducing
F 5 5 µm 00000131856
line (option)
00000177583 /
G Recovered air filtration line (option) 3a / 3b 0,01 µm
00000177586
H Dedust air treatment line (option) 4 0,01 µm 00000150619
Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment fitted on the machine and always follow current safety
! regulations.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Replacing the filters (1 ; 2) on the 7 bar line
A
1
1 Make sure there is no pressure in the circuit.
Removing
1 Lower the locking lug (12) and keep it in the down
position.
12 2
2 Turn the bowl (13) a quarter turn and remove it.
3 Repeat this operation to remove the bowl (14).
13 1
4 Unscrew and remove the support (15).
6 Repeat this operation to remove the filter (2).
14 15
7 If fitted on filter (1 ; 2), remove the support (16).
16
15
8 Clean the bases (17).

9 Clean the supports (15) using the clean, dry cloth.
10 Clean the bowls (13 ; 14) using a clean, dry cloth. 17
11 Clean the seal (18) using a clean dry cloth.
☞ Check the condition and the position of the

seal (18).
12 Replace the filters (1 ; 2).
18
Replacing
• If present, clean and install the support (16) in the
filter (1 ; 2).
• Fit the 40 µm filter (1) upstream of the 5 µm filter (2).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Replacing the filters (3) on the 40 bar line
B
3
Removing
3
20
22
21
1 Loosen the connector (20).

2 Remove the automatic purge (21).
3 Remove the bowl (22) using a wrench .
4 Loosen and remove the filter (3).
Replacing
19
24
22
23
3 24
LUB A19
LUB A19
SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Never touch the filter section of the filter element (3). Use the plastic packaging, to handle the filters (3).
1 Partly remove the packaging from the upper part of the filter (3).
2 Handle the new filter (3) by the packaging still on the filter.
3 Lightly grease the o-rings (6; 23; 24), using the grease supplied with the kit.
4 Install the seals (6; 23; 24) in their housings.
5 Lightly grease the thread of the filter (3) using the grease supplied with the filter (3).
6 Screw in the filter (3) until it stops in the filter support (19).
Do not tighten the filter (3).
7 Remove all of the packaging from the new filter (3).
8 Clean the bowl (22) using a clean, dry cloth.
9 Lightly grease the thread of the bowl (22) using the grease supplied with the filter (3).
10 Screw on and tighten the bowl (22).
11 Position the automatic purge (21).
12 Tighten the connector (20).
20
21
If double line (3) , filtershould be replaced using the same procedure as filter(C)
C
3

2 Replace the filter (3)
The procedure is the same as that for replacing the air line filter 40 bar, see procedure above.
i

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Replacing the filter (5) of the control line of the blowing system solenoid valves
Removing
1 Loosen the bowl (25) and remove it.
2 Unscrew and remove the support (26).
29
25
26
Replacing
- The bowl (25). 27
- The support (26).
- The base (27). 5 25
- The support (28).
2 Replace the filter (5).
26
• Check the condition and the positions of the
seals (29).
28

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Replacing the filter (3) of the pressure-reduction line of the pre-blowing air (E)
E
3

i
Replacing the filter (5) of the "push-up" and "push-up base" pressure-reduction line (F)

The procedure is the same as that for replacing the filter of the control line (D) of the blowing system
i solenoid valves, see procedure above.
Replacing the filter (3) of the filtration line of the recovered air (G)
G
3

i

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Replacing the filter (4) of the dedusting air treatment line (H)
Removing
1 Lift and turn the bowl (30) a quarter turn.
2 Remove the bowl (30).
30
30 4

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
10/
MP-B0031 Replacing the filters of the pneumatic panel and the on-board air system 2
11
Replacing
1 Clean the bowl (30) using a clean, dry cloth.
4
! Always wear latex gloves when handling the
packaging or its contents.
☞ Check the condition and the position of

the seals (31 ; 32). 33
• If the seals (31 ; 32) are worn, replace them. 31
2 Grease the o-ring (32) on the bowl (30) with some
vaseline.
32
3 Fit the "SMF" filter (4) in the bowl (30) making sure you
follow the guides (33). 30
4 Postion the bowl (30)/filter (4) assembly in the filter

block (34).
5 Lift and turn the bowl (30) a quarter turn.
☞ Make sure that the arrow (35) is lined up with the

closed padlock symbol (36).
34
4 ; 30
34
36
30
35

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
11/
2 Replacing the filters of the pneumatic panel and the on-board air system MP-B0031
11
Resetting the filter operating hours (H)

1 Press the (T1) button.
1 T1 2 T1 3 T1
The display unit (39) indicates the current differential
pressure. 1x 1x 3s
2 Press the (T1) button.
The display unit (39) indicates the filter operating
hours (39).
3 Press the button (T1) for 3 seconds.
The display unit (39) indicates the resetting of the filter 4 5
operating hours . 10s
4 Wait 10 seconds. 39
The display unit (39) goes out.
END OF OPERATION
! Dispose of the used filters in compliance with current legislation.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the silencers on the pneumatic control circuits MP-B0032 1/4
MACHINE STATUS

MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Type (1) silencers,
- Type (4) silencers.
1 2 3 4
Consumables
PROCEDURE
Placement of the silencers
B A
A Stabilization rail (if present) R Hopper outfeed vibrator (option)

B Mini hopper recycling (option)

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/4 MP-B0032 Replacing the silencers on the pneumatic control circuits 2
D E
C High pressure air inlet F Air recovery circuit (option)

D Low pressure air inlet G Dew point sensor of the blow circuit (option)
E Main pneumatic panel P Activated carbon prefiltration line of low-pressure circuit (option)

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the silencers on the pneumatic control circuits MP-B0032 3/4
I J
I Automatic oven wheel greasing system (option) N Infeed rail ionizer (option)
J Misloaded preform ejection Q Air supply for the handle boxing system (option)
M Bottle outfeed air circuit (option)

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/4 MP-B0032 Replacing the silencers on the pneumatic control circuits 2
Replacing a silencer of type (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4)

Removing
1 Loosen the silencer using a wrench .
Loosen the type (4) silencer using pliers.
i
2 Take out the silencer . 1
3 Clean the contact surfaces using clean dry cloths.
Replacing
1 Manually install the silencer . 4
2 Moderately tighten the silencer using a wrench.
Moderately tighten the type (4) silencer using
i pliers.
! Dispose of the used filters (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4) in compliance

with current legislation.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the safety pin on the mold bases MP-B0033 1/2
MACHINE STATUS

- Cold molds,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Kit with safety pin assembly (A)
Consumables
A
Specific tool
- Douille 19 mm.
A
1 2
PROCEDURE
Removing

The bolt (1) should be fitted with normal
i threadlock "LOCTITE 243". You may have
difficulty loosening the bolt (1).
2 Remove the safety pin (2).
1 2
19mm 243

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0033 Replacing the safety pin on the mold bases 2
Replacing
1 Fit the new safety pin (2) by positioning the flat part of
the pin against the raised section on the mold base
support (4).
2 Apply normal "LOCTITE 243" threadlock on the bolt (1). 3 4
3 Tighten the bolt (1) while holding the safety pin (2) by
the flat part (3).
1 2
19mm 243
END OF OPERATION

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Reconditioning the oven spindles MP-B0034 1/4
This procedure must be carried out on the
i workbench.
Removal / installation of a spindle section, see
Procedure for oven spindles with 40 mm pitch
only.
View (A) shows all the parts to be replaced
for 1 oven spindle. The reconditioning
kit supplied by "SIDEL" contains parts to
recondition 10 oven spindles.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Reconditioning kit (A).
Consumables
- Alcohol at 70 % does not need to be rinsed (non-
residual),
- Cleaning agent "NET A03".
Specific tool
- Clean, dry paintbrush,
- External elastic ring grip.
PROCEDURE
Removing
1 Remove the ejector (1) manually.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/4 MP-B0034 Reconditioning the oven spindles 3
2 Remove the spindle tip (2) by hand.
3 Remove the elastic ring (3).

3
4 Remove the bayonet ring (4), spring (5) and support

ring (6).
4
5 Note the respective positions of the spindle

sprockets (7 ; 8) and the sheaths (12) on the links (14 ; 12
15).
15
To remove the lower sprocket (8), first remove
i the 2 adjacent upper sprockets (7).
6 Remove the spindle sprocket (7). 7
14

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Reconditioning the oven spindles MP-B0034 3/4

9
8 Remove the collar (10).
10
11
10 Remove the sleeve (12).
12

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/4 MP-B0034 Reconditioning the oven spindles 3
Cleaning
Do not degrease the sheaths (12).

! 15 1
Never clean parts from the spindle chain by soaking

them.
Never use excessive amounts of solvent in order to
preserve the lubrication on the bearings.
1 Clean the following parts using a brush, a cloth and the
cleaning agent "NET A03":
- Link (14),
- Link (15).
14
2 Clean the following parts using a cloth dipped in alcohol 2
at 70 %:
- Ejector (1),
- Spindle tip (2).
Replacing
! The following parts must be replaced:

- Elastic ring (3),
13 3 4 12 5 11 6 10 9
- Bayonet ring (4),

- Spring (5),
- Support ring (6),
- Upper pinion (7),
- Lower pinion (8),
- Elastic ring (9),
- Ring (10),
- Elastic ring (11),
- Sleeve (12),
- O-ring (13).
• Fit the seal (13) on the sheath (12).
• Note the respective positions of the spindle
pinions (7 ; 8) and the sheaths (12) on the links (14 ;
15).
2 Sign off the operation on the machine's worksheet.
7 8

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Reconditioning the oven wheel MP-B0035 1/5
GENERAL INFORMATION
According to the maintenance intervals, replace

i the oven wheel bearings only or carry out the
complete procedure.
It is recommended to remove the spindle chain
to make this operation easier..
For questions about the bearing removal tools ,
please contact SIDEL after-sales service.
MACHINE STATUS
- Oven fan stopped.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Bushings ,
- Rings ,
- Spring ,
- Rollers .
Consumables
- "LOCTITE 243" threadlock.
Specific tool
- Slide hammer , expansible extractor /orbushing
removal tool .
PROCEDURE
Removing
1 Remove the cover plate (1).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/5 MP-B0035 Reconditioning the oven wheel 3
2 Loosen the nut (2) but do not remove it.

The spring (3) is slack. 2
3 Turn the shaft (4) a quarter turn.

The nut (5) is now accessible. 3
4 Remove the locknut (5).

5 Remove the washer head screw (16).
5 6 16

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

23
If the "dual roller kit" option is installed: 16 18

7 Remove the locknut (5).
8 Remove the washer head screw (16). B
4
9 Remove the rollers (6).
10 Remove the spacer (18).
X
5
22
6
11 Remove the elastic ring (7). 17
12 Remove the shaft / fork assembly (8) and the

ring / spring (9) assembly. 8

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/5 MP-B0035 Reconditioning the oven wheel 3

- Bushings (10 ; 11 ; 12), 10 11
12
If the replacement interval has been reached:

- Spring (3), 13 13
- Rollers (6 ; 14),
- Rings (15 ; 17).
8 14
15
4
17
7
16
5

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

23
If the "dual roller kit" option is installed: 16 18

2 Replace the 2 rollers (6).
B
4
5
22
6
17
Replacing
1 Clean the shaft / fork assembly using a clean dry cloth.
A B C
• Apply threadlock "LOCTITE 243" to the thread of the
shaft (13),
• Install the 3 rollers on the forks A ; B ; C in
13
the 3 installation positions (A ; B ; C),
• Install the fork assemblies on the oven wheel: strictly
243
observe the 3 positions (A ; B ; C).
14
243
13 14 13 243
14
A B C

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the rotary air union MP-B0036 1/3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Work to be carried out at height: use the

! equipment fitted on or supplied with the machine
and always follow current safety regulations.
MACHINE STATUS
B0027",
- The on-board air system is accessible in the work
area .
- Latex gloves
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Rotary air union (7).
Consumables
- Light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock,
- "LUB A21" grease,
- Sprayer containing alcohol-based disinfectant.
Specific tool
- Lockout padlocks .
PROCEDURE
1 Close the valve (2).
☞ Control the absence of pressure on the pressure

gauges (3 ; 4).
2 Lock out the valve (2).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0036 Replacing the rotary air union 3
Removing
1 Remove the rear upper cross-piece (5).
• Position the ladder (A).
2 Identify and remove the connecting hoses (6) of the

rotary air union (7).
The number of hoses (6) varies according to
i the machine's configuration.
3 Remove the anti-torque rod (8).

7
Do not modify the center distance of the anti-
! torque rod (8). 8
4 Remove the bolts (9) and the washers .
222
5 Remove the rotary union (7).

7
6 Remove the unions (10) and cap(s) (11)(if present).
11
10

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the rotary air union MP-B0036 3/3
7 Recover the o-ring (13).

Make sure that you do not drop anything in the
! center of the electrical collector (12).
13
12
Replacing
1 Fit the unions (10) and cap(s) (11) (if present) onto the
new rotary union (7). 14
2 Using a brush, lightly grease the o-ring (13) with "LUB
A21" grease.
3 Using a brush, lightly grease the o-rings (14) with "LUB
A21" grease. 15
4 Position the tube (15) fully home in the electrical
13 12
collector (12).
5 Position the rotary air union (7).

7 Tighten the screws (9) and the washers , to 11 N.m.
7
222

7
9 Fit the anti-torque rod (8).
10 Fit and tighten the connecting hoses (6) of the rotary air 16
union (7) in accordance with the reference marks .
222
END OF OPERATION
1 Fit the rear upper cross-piece (5).

2 Disinfect surfaces and items handled during the procedure, using a sprayer and alcohol-based disinfectant.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the mold support unit solenoids MP-B0038 1/3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Replacement kit (A) parts: Quantity

1 Solenoid 1
2 O-ring 1
3 Screw 2
4 Silencer 1
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds, A
- JOG connected to the work zone, see procedure 3
"OP-B0008".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Kit (A)see the table above.
4
Consumables
1
Specific tool 2
- Cross-head screwdriver,
- Allen keys size 5,
- Mixed key No.19,
- Mixed key No.3/8".

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0038 Replacing the mold support unit solenoids 3
PROCEDURE
Removing
1 Position the blow station in question in the work area,
using JOG.
2 Cut off and lock out the main pneumatic circuit of the
machine, see procedure "OP-B0002".
☞ ! Make sure that the pneumatic circuit is

closed.
3 Disconnect the hose (4).
4 Remove the electrical connector (5).
5 Hold the solenoid (1) and remove the screws (3).
6 Remove the solenoid valve (1).
4
1
N°19
1 X
3 N°5
5

i workbench.
6 N°19
6
7 Remove the union (6).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the mold support unit solenoids MP-B0038 3/3
Replacing
4 6
2 Perform the removal operations in the reverse order, N°3/8" N°19

• Install a new silencer (4).
• Fit the union (6).
• Check the position of the seal (2).
• Apply a little light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock on the
bolts (3).
3 Remove lockout / tagout, and open the main pneumatic
circuit of the machine, see procedure "OP-B0001".
X
3 222 N°5

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Reconditioning of blow blocks MP-B0039 1/6
GENERAL INFORMATION
- Depending on machine configuration, the blow
block may be of the "AirEco1", "AirEco2
NF" or "AirEco2" type.
- The procedure is identical for the 3 types of blow
blocks.
- The illustrations of this procedure correspond to
the "AirEco2" type blow block.
Reconditioning kit components (A): " AirEco1 "
Designation Qty
1 Assembled piston 6
" AirEco2 NF "
2 Damping disc 6
3 O-ring 18
4 M5 x 100 bolt 1
" AirEco2 "
5 Brush 1
6 Plastic bag 1 A
Grease tube KLUBER UNISILKON LCA 3801 1
1
Make sure that the pneumatic circuit is closed.
! 3 4
MACHINE STATUS 2
- Cold molds,
- Machine rotation locked out, see procedure "OP- 5
B0027",
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Reconditioning kit (A), (see the table above).
PROCEDURE
Removing
1 Disconnect the electrical connector (9).

3 Remove the feed block (11).
10
X 9 11
X

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/6 MP-B0039 Reconditioning of blow blocks 3
4 Hold the blow block (12) and remove the screws (13).
5 Remove the blow block (12).
12 13
X 12
Reconditioning
1 Remove the solenoid valves (14), using a screwdriver.
14 15
If removing the solenoid valves (14 ; 15), do not
! mix them up. Solenoid valves (14) are of
the "NF" type, and solenoid valve (15) is of
the "NO" type.

16 17
The screws (16) are torqued to 20 Nm. You
i may have difficulty loosening them.
3 Remove the cover (17).
4 Remove the damping discs (2), using a screwdriver.

Do not damage the bush (18) with the
! screwdriver. 18

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
5 Remove the asssemblies, bush (18) / piston (1), by

lifting them with a flat-head screwdriver. 18
The lower part of the piston (1a) stays in position in the
blow block (12).
12 19 1
6 Separate the piston (1) and the bush (18).

18 1
7 Remove the o-ring seals (3).
8 Turn over the blow block (12), making sure not to

damage the flow limiter (19).
9 Push the lower pistons (1a) a few millimeters, using a
1a 20
tool Ø 6 mm.
Do not completely push in the lower piston (1a),
! otherwise you risk damaging the guiding
surface (20) of the piston.
10 Turn over the blow block (12).
11 Remove the lower pistons (1a) and the lower damping 12 1a 1b 4
discs (1b) using the screw M5 (4).
12 Evacuate the following components, in accordance with
the applicable legislation:
- Damping disc (2),
- Piston (1),
- Lower piston (1a),
- Damping disc (1b),
- O-rings (3).
13 Clean the bushes (18), using a soft, lint-free cloth.
14 Clean the boreholes (20) of the blow block (12), along
their entire length, using a soft, lint-free cloth.
12 20 18

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
15 Apply grease on the brush (5) by rotating the brush.

6
16 Spread the grease evenly on the brush (5), using the
plastic bag (6).
The grease tube is sufficient for complete
i reconditioning of a blow block.
! Wear latex gloves.
17 Grease the boreholes (20) of the blow block (12), along

their entire length, using the brush (5).
5 18
• Start by greasing the interior of the
boreholes (20) using back-and-forth movements and
then rotation of the brush (5).
• If necessary, re-apply grease on the brush (5).
• Grease the top part of the boreholes (20) of the blow
block (12).
- The top part is not a sliding area and requires
little grease. 20 12
18 Grease the inside of the bushes (18), using the
brush (5) coated with grease .
• If necessary, re-apply grease on the brush (5).
19 Replace all the components with those supplied in the
reconditioning kit (A).
20 Lightly grease the o-rings (3).
3 1
21 Position the 3 o-rings (3) on the bush (18).
22 Assemble the bushes (18) and the pistons (1).
- The pistons (1) are delivered assembled and
greased. 21
! The bush (18)
degassing "EX" has 2 grooves (21). The other
for
18
bushes have 1 groove (21). Align the
grooves (21) of the different bushes (18) with
the marks (22) on the blow block (12).
23 Position the assemblies, bush (18) / piston (1), in the
boreholes (20) of the blow block (12).
12
22
18
20

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
24 Screw the screw M5 (4) into the piston (1).

4
25 Push the piston (1) to stop in the borehole (20) of the
blowing block (12) in order to position the damping
disc (1b) in its housing. 20 12
26 Lightly grease the sliding area on the bush (18), using
the tip of the brush (5).
27 Lift the piston (1), using the M5 screw (4), leaving
a 2mm space with respect to the bush (18), except for
2 mm
the degassing piston, which must be in contact with the
bottom of the housing. 23
28 Position the damping disc (2), complying with the
groove (23) on the bush (18).
29 Repeat the operation for all the assemblies,
1
bush (18) / piston (1).
18 2
30 Fit the cover (17).

16 17
☞ Check the presence and condition of the seals and

screws on the solenoid valves (14).
32 Fit the solenoid valves (14).

• Comply with the placement of each solenoid 14 17 24 26 25
valve (14), using the mark (24) on:
- The solenoid valve cable (25),
- The cover (17),
- The connection box (26).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Replacing
• Check the condition of the o-rings of the blow
block (12).
• If necessary, replace the following parts.
• Lightly grease the o-rings.
• Tighten the bolts (13) to a torque of 55 N.m.
• Tighten the bolts (10) to a torque of 55 N.m.
10
X 12 13
X
55 N.m 55 N.m

stations, making sure that you: 27
system , before carrying out the work. 28
• Use a new brush (5) for each blow block .
It is possible to rotate the machine by
i connecting an external 7b supply (27) to the
pneumatic panel (28).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Reconditioning the mold opening/closing retractable guide MP-B0041 1/5
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Bolt (6a ; 10a),
- Stop thrust (6b),
- Pin (6c),
- Shoe (10b),
- Peel shims (10c),
- Elastic ring (11),
- Bearings (12).
Consumables
- LUB A21 grease,
6a 10a
Specific tool
- Tool (T1) (codes: 13007 x 2 , 15305 x 30 cm ,
10b
14109 x 1 & 14139 x 1),
- Small vice, 6b
10c
- Set of thickness gauges.
6c 11
12
T1
PROCEDURE
1 Position the blow wheel using the manual rotation so that the retractable cam is accessible and no roller is in
contact with the retractable cam.
2 Block and lock the machine rotation using the flange system , see procedure "OP-B0027".
Removing
1 Position the tool (T1) inside the spring (1).
5 4
2 Screw the threaded rod (2) to compress the spring (1).
The retractable cam (4) is no longer in contact with the
thrust (5).
2 3 1
T1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/5 MP-B0041 Reconditioning the mold opening/closing retractable guide 3
4 Remove the thrust assembly (6).

5 Remove the pin assembly (7). 6 7
6 Remove the bolts (8) and the washers.

8
7 Remove the retractable cam assembly (9).

8 Recover the spacer (13).
9
13

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
9 Remove the shoe assembly (10).
10
10 Install the retractable cam assembly in a vice with soft

11
jaws.
12 Remove the bearing (12) using the press. 12

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/5 MP-B0041 Reconditioning the mold opening/closing retractable guide 3
Replacing
• Bolt (6a ; 10a), 10a
6a
• Stop thrust (6b),
• Pin (6c), 10b
• Shoe (10b),
• Peel shims (10c),
10c
• Elastic ring (11),
• Bearings (12).
6b
clean, dry cloth.
6c 11
12

14
• Check dimension X maxi = 1 mm.
- If necessary, peel the peel shim (10c) to get
dimension X.
• Apply a little light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock on the
bolts (6a).
• Grease the cam race (14) using a paintbrush and
the LUB A21 grease. 6a
X 222
10c

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

5
5 Unscrew the threaded rod (2).
The retractable cam (4) is in contact with the thrust (5).
4
3 2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the transfer arm springs MP-B0042 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
! The following operations are carried out on the

workbench.
Always replace the springs (1 ; 2) in pairs to
avoid stress on the guide system.
MACHINE STATUS
- Transfer arm removed, see procedure "MP-
B0051".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part A
- Spring (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4),
- Bolt (5 ; 6),
- Washer (7 ; 8 ; 9 ; 10),
- Roller (11 ; 12),
- Elastic ring (13). 3
Consumables
1;2
PROCEDURE
Removing
1 Remove the bolts (4) and the washers (5).
- You may have difficulty removing the bolt (4).
2
3 Remove the washer (6).
4 Repeat the operation for the spring (2). 1
5
4
6

3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0042 Replacing the transfer arm springs 2
Replacing
5
making sure that you: 6
• Use new springs (1 ; 2 ; 3).
4
• Use new bolts (5) and washers (5 ; 6). 5
• Apply a little light "LOCTITE 243" threadlock on the 243
bolts (5). 4
3 Repeat the operation at all of the transfer arms (A). 243
1 2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the spindle chain MP-B0043 1/13
GENERAL INFORMATION
x3
- The spindle chain is delivered in sections (A).

Number of spindles per section (A)
Oven of 40 pitch 8
Oven of 50 pitch 6
Oven of 60 pitch 5
- The number of each link (B) of the new spindle A

chain can be engraved at the customer's request.
- Install and remove the spindle chain per section of
spindles (A).
MACHINE STATUS
- Oven cold.

B
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Number of spindle sections (A) needed.
Consumables

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/13 MP-B0043 Replacing the spindle chain 3
PROCEDURE
Preparation prior to removal
1 For reconditioning of the spindle chain :

• Measure and record the length "L" of the spring (5).
2 Get enough slack in the spindle chain using the

nut (6) to release the bushes (7).
3 Using a string or clamping collar (8), hold the spindle

chain on the tensioner wheel (1). 1 8

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Removing
Step 1:removal of sections of spindles (A1 , A2 ; A3) located on the tensioner wheel (1)
1 Disconnect the spindle section (A1)(if necessary,

consult the spindle section connection / disconnection
procedure at the end of this procedure).
A1
A3
A2
2 Remove the spindle section (A1), making sure not to

damage the links (B) or the guide (3).
3 Repeat the above operations to remove the spindle
chain (A2).
4 Remove the spindle chain (A3).
3 B

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Step 2:removal of spindle sections (A4 ; A5) located on the sides of the oven
9 A5
9 A4
1 At the level of the guide (9), disconnect the part (A4) of

the spindle chain .
2 For each spindle section , remove the part (A4) of the
spindle chain as indicated above for the removal of the
section (A1).
3 Repeat the above operations to remove the spindle
chain (A5). 9 A4

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Step 3:removal of spindle sections (A7 ; A8)
10 A7
10 A8 1
X3
1 Operations to perform simultaneously:

• Operator1-2 :pull on each end of the remaining
spindle sections (A7 ; A8), using a rope or manually,
to make them taut during their movement in the
turnover ramps (10).
• Operator3 :using manual rotation, advance the
spindle section (A7 ; A8).
• Stop the advancement of the spindle
sections (A7 ; A8) once they arrive at the
tensioner wheel (1). A7
A8
2 Remove the accessible spindle sections as previously
indicated for the removal of spindle section (A1).
3 If necessary, repeat the above operations to remove all
of the remaining spindle sections .
10

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Replacing
Step 1:cleaning of turnover ramps (10 ; 11) and slides (25)
10 25
11 25
1 Clean the turnover ramps (10 ; 11) with a clean, dry

cloth and cleaning agent "NET A03".
10
2 Clean the slides (25) with a clean, dry cloth and

cleaning agent "NET A03".
25
10
3 Position the new spindle sections (A) near the tensioner

wheel .

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Step 2installation of the spindle section (A9):
10 A9 1
1 Delicately install the spindle section (A) between the

tensioner wheel (1) and the guide (4).
- For a spindle chain with engraved links (B), start
with the spindle chain (A) with link n°1.
- Position the rollers (25) on the cam (4), with the
spindle tips (12) pointing up.
2 Insert, following the order of the links if engraved, and A
connect a sufficient number of spindle sections (A) to
cover the space between the tensioner wheel (1) and
the turnover ramp (10).
12
1 25

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Step 3:positioning of the spindle sections (A9) on the oven wheel (2) and in the turnover ramps (10 ; 11)
2 A9 10 1
11
X3

• Operator1 :using a rope or manually, pull the spindle
section (A9) sufficiently in order to insert it in the
second turnover ramp (11).
• Operator2 :pull the spindle sections (A9) to the rear,
using a rope or manually, to make the spindle
sections (A9) taut during their movement.
• Operator3 :check and hold the position of the spindle
section (A9) on the first turnover ramp (10) and the 10
oven wheel (2).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
A9 2 1
11

• Operator1 :manually insert the spindle
section (A9) on the oven wheel (2) and in the second
turnover ramp (11).
• Do not damage the detector (13) and the 10
guide (14).
• Operator2-3 :pull on each end of the spindle
section (A9), using a rope or manually, to make the
spindle section (A9) taut during its movement.
2
14
13
Step 4:installation of the spindle section (A10)
A9 2 10 A10 1
10 A10

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
10/
MP-B0043 Replacing the spindle chain 3
13
1 Insert, following the order of the links if engraved, and

connect a sufficient number of spindle sections to cover
the space between the tensioner wheel (1) and the
turnover ramp (10).
2 Position and link the remaining spindle sections until
full assembly of the spindle chain .
Step 5
1 Make the spindle chain taut using the nut (6).
2 Rotate the machine for a few turns, at low speed and
without heating the ovens.
☞ Check the length "L" of the spring (5).

- For full replacement of the spindle chain :the
length "L" of the spring (5) must be : L = 270 +/-
20 mm.
- For reconditioning of the spindle chain :see the
value "L" measured at the start of procedure.
• If necessary, adjust the length of the spring (5),
using the nut (6). 6

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
11/
3 Replacing the spindle chain MP-B0043
13
Disconnection / connection of a spindle section (A)

1 Remove the ejector (15) and the spindle tip (16) at the
start of the section (A) to be removed.
16
15
17

18

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
12/
MP-B0043 Replacing the spindle chain 3
13
4 Remove the support ring (19)/spring (20) assembly.

20
19
5 Remove the spindle sprocket (21).
21
22

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
13/
3 Replacing the spindle chain MP-B0043
13
23
24

10 Repeat the above operations on the bush (7) at the
other end of the section (A). 7
11 Repeat the above operations, in reverse order, to
connect a section of spindles (A).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Removing / installing a nozzle MP-B0045 1/8
GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE STATUS
- The relevant blowing station is positioned in the
work area, T3
- Cold molds,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
T1
Specific tool
- Nozzle centering cone tool (T1),
- Dummy stretching rod (T2), T5
- Nozzle orientation tool (T3),
- Nozzle control adjustment tool (T4),
- Cylinder stroke centering device (T5). T2
T4
PROCEDURE
Removing the nozzle
1 Deactivate the braking system of the stretching slide on X

1
B0042".
2 Hold the slide (1) and release the stretching rod (2). 3
• Pull the indexing pin (3).
• Turn the stretching rod (2) a quarter turn. X
2
3 Lower the slide (1) manually as far as it will go and
remove the stretching rod (2).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/8 MP-B0045 Removing / installing a nozzle 2
4 Remove the pressure sensor (4).
5
Do not loose the washers and the O-ring.
!
Move the blow station (5) away and attach it to
i the nearby blowing station using a plastic
collar. X
6

8
The support (8) is held in position with pins.
7 Remove the bearing support (8) without applying force
on the nozzle control rod (9). 7
X
8 Remove the antitorque coils (10).

10
X
80 N.m

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
9 Hold the guide pin (11) and remove the nozzle control
rod (9).
Left-hand thread. 10
9
!
11
X
10 Hold the nozzle (12) and loosen the 4 screws (13).

11 Remove the nozzle (12).
13
13
X
12
Installing the nozzle

1 Clean the contact surfaces and the vicinity of the nozzle
using a clean, dry cloth.
2 Install the nozzle (12) using 4 screws (13).

Do not tighten the 4 screws (13).
!
13
13
X
12

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Apply "LOCTITE 243" threadlock to the threads of the

nozzle raising rod (9).
4 Hold the guide pin (11) and tighten the nozzle control 9
10
rod (9).
243
11
X
Centering the nozzle
The molds must be installed for this operation.

i
T2
1 Fit the base and the centering cone (T1) on the neck
ring (14) of the mold.
2 Install the dummy stretching rod (T2).
The dummy stretching rod (T2) must pass through the
nozzle (12) and the centering cone (T1). 12
T1
14
3 Position the nozzle orientation tool (T3) between

the 2 magnets (19). 19
12
T3
T2
10

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4 Center the nozzle (12).

The dummy stretching rod (T2) must freely slide in the
centering cone (T1). 12
T2
T1
14
! The tools (T1 ; T2 ; T3) must not be in a

strained condition.
T3
6 Remove the dummy stretching rod (T2), the base and T2

14
13
the centering cone (T1).
7 Remove the nozzle orientation tool (T3).
The nozzle has been centered. 30 N.m
12

15
9 Apply "LOCTITE 243" threadlock to the screw (15).
10 Position, but do not tighten, the bolt (15) on the control
rod (9). 243
10
X
11 Orient the support plate (16) (see illustration on the
right).
12 Position the antitorque coils (10).
80 N.m
9 16
25
13 Check that the 2 pins (17) are in place.

18
9 8 17
X
14 Install the bearing support (8), and position the guide
rods (18) in the antitorque coils (10).
16 Tighten the bolts (7) to a torque of 15,6 Nm.
X
7
222
10
18 15,6 N.m

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
17 Position the centering tool (T4). The pins (T4a) are

positioned in the holes of the support plate (16). The
guide rods (18) pass through the tool (T4). 18
X
16
T4a
18 T4
18 Hold the tool (T4), and tighten the bolt (15).

9 X 1
The antitorque coils (10) must rotate freely.
! 15
19 Remove the wrench (T4). 10
10
T4
There are 2 types of blowing blocks (A ; B) (see

! illustration on the right). Comply with the tightening
A 9 X 1
torque corresponding to the present blowing block.
20 Check that O-ring is installed on the blow block (5). 5
21 Install the blow block (5) on the blow unit.
22 For a blowing block of type (A), tighten the bolts (6) to a
torque of 55 N.m.
X
6
55 N.m
23 For a blowing block of type (B), tighten the bolts (6) to a

B
torque of 42 N.m.
37
5
20
6
42 N.m

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
24 Install the pressure sensor (4).
Adjusting the nozzle cylinder stroke

2 Loosen the adjusting bolt (21).
21
20
3 Manually lift the nozzle (12).

4 Install the cylinder stroke adjustment centering 9 X 1
device (T5) on the mold. 12
device (T5).
22
T5
5 Screw in the bolt (21) until contact with the bolt

head (15). 9 X 1 21
Do not fully tighten the bolt (21).
!
nut (20).
20
15
222
9 1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

The centering device (T5) must slide without constraint
21
between the mold and the nozzle.
8 Remove the centering device (T5).
The nozzle cylinder stroke has been adjusted.
20
9 Close and lock the doors .

10 At the HMI, activate the braking system of the stretching 9 1
11 Fit the stretching rod (2).
22 T5
---------- The procedure is now complete ---------- 9

X 1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the bearings of the belt tensioners MP-B0046 1/3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Identify the different tensioners using the

i "transmission kinematics" drawings.
MACHINE STATUS

B0027".
Part
- Bearings (2).
Consumables
PROCEDURE
Removing
1 Loosen the bolts (3) but do not remove them.
2 Loosen the counter nuts (4) but do not remove them.
3 Tighten the screw (5) to loosen the belt. X
3
Do not loosen the screws (12). The
! screws (12) are used to adjust the height of the X
4
belt tensioner.
4 Remove the bolts (3 ; 6).
12 12
X
3 X
3
12 12
6 7

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0046 Replacing the bearings of the belt tensioners 3
5 Remove the tensioner (7).

i workbench.
8
7 Remove the roller (9) using a lever or mallet.
8 Remove the bearings (2).

Do not damage the spacer (10) when removing
! the bearings (2).
10

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the bearings of the belt tensioners MP-B0046 3/3
Replacing
1 Clean the roller (9), rod (11) and spacer (10), using a
clean, dry cloth.
11 9
2 Install the new bearings (2) and the spacer (10).
3 Perform the removal operations in the reverse order.
10
4 Repeat the operation on all of the tensioner rollers.

5 Adjust the tension of the belts, see procedure "MP- 2 10
B0071".

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the transmission belts MP-B0047 1/4
MACHINE STATUS
B0027".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Transmission belts (2).
PROCEDURE
Replacing the transmission belts on the motor pin

1 Note the route of the belt (2) on the pulleys and the
tensioner . 3
2 Remove the casings (3).

3 Loosen the belts (2) using the tensioners (5).
Do not loosen the screws (4). The
! screws (4) are used to adjust the height of the
belt tensioner.
X
2
X
2
4

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/4 MP-B0047 Replacing the transmission belts 3
1 Loosen the set screws (7) but do not remove them.

X
7
2 Remove the bearing (8).
3 Remove the bearing support (9).
4 Remove the belts (2).
The motor shaft bearing support (9) differs
i according to the configuration of the machine.
X
8
12
2
X
9
Replacing
1 Install the new belts (2).
2 Center the belts (2) on the pulleys and the tensioners .
3 Install the bearing support (9) on the frame.

10
4 Install the bearing (8) without pre-loading the
motor (10) shaft. 8
5 Tighten the set screws (7) up to contact.
Excessive tightening of the set 9
i screws (7) marks the motor shaft and makes
7
the following work difficult.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the transmission belts MP-B0047 3/4
Replacing a transmission belt
The replacement procedure is identical for all the other

i transmission belts .
1 Note the route of the belt (2) on the pulleys and the
tensioner .
Removing
1 Remove the support (13)/torque
limiter sensor (6) assembly.
2
13
6
2 If present and if necessary, disconnect or remove the

coder (16).
16
Do not loosen the screws (14). The screws (14) are

! used to adjust the height of the belt tensioner.
3 Loosen the belt (2) using the tensioner (15).
Some belts are protected by a protective
i cover. In this case, the protective cover must be
removed.
4 Remove the belt (2).
X
2 14
9
15

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/4 MP-B0047 Replacing the transmission belts 3
Replacing
1 Install the new belt (2).
2 Center the belt on the pulleys and the tensioner roller.
2
3 Install the torque limiter sensor (6).
4 Position the sensor (6) such that you obtain X = 1,5 12
mm and Y = 0,5 mm between the detection pin (11) and Y 13
the control disc (12), see procedure "MP-B0006. "
5 Tighten the support (13) attachment screws.
6 Connect or install the coder (16).
X
7 Repeat the operation on all of the transmission belts.
11
8 Adjust the tension of the belts, see procedure "MP-
B0071".
9 Install and fix the housings . 15
6
16
If there is an intervention on the coder :

10 Reinitialisation of the machine coder, see procedure "OP-B0017".

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the filters on the preform and bottle ejection actuators MP-B0050 1/1
GENERAL INFORMATION B
E
A Ejection of preforms from the infeed wheel
ZE 2
B Ejection of preforms at oven outfeed (if present)
C Ejection of preforms from the transfer wheel
D Ejection of bottles from the transfer wheel (x 2 optional)
2*
A
E Ejection of bottles from the bottle outfeed (if present)
D C
MACHINE STATUS
MATERIALS REQUIRED X
1
Part
- Filter discs (1).
Consumables
PROCEDURE
Removing
1 Loosen and the remove the bolts (2).
2 Gently disengage the distributor (3) to facilitate access.
3 Remove the filter discs (1).
X
2
Replacing
1 Clean the bases (4) using a clean, dry cloth, and
replace the filter discs (1).
X
4 1
2 Fit the distributor (3).
4 Proceed in the same manner for all of the ejection
actuators.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Removal/refit: transfer arms MP-B0051 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
Specific tool
- Tool (1).
1 2
PROCEDURE
Removing
1 If present, remove the protective covers from the
1 2 A
transfer table; see procedure "MP-B0249" (option).
2 Position tooling (1) head (2) on the transfer arm (A).
- Hold the fork (2) of the head upwards.
3 Position the base (3) on the screw (4).
3 4
4 Lock the tooling (1) with the bolt (5).

- The bolt (5) must be in contact with the bolt (4).
4 5

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0051 Removal/refit: transfer arms 2
5 Turn the crank (6) clockwise to lift the roller (7) away
from the cam (8).
- Never tighten the tooling (1) fully.
7 8

9 ; 10
7 Remove the transfer arms (A).
A 1
8 Turn the crank (6) anti-clockwise until the

springs (11) are completely extended.
10 Remove the wrench (1). 11
6 11
5
Replacing
1 Install the tooling (1) on the transfer arm (A) as
described in the removal procedure. 9 ; 10
2 Position the transfer arm (A).
3 Insert the bolts (9) and fit the washers (10).
4 Remove the wrench (1).
5 If present, refit the protective covers of the transfer
table; see procedure "MP-B0249" (option).
A 1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Draining / filling the hydraulic lines MP-B0052 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION 2 4
The fluids must be collected in accordance with
! applicable legislation.
6 5 3
- Each line is identified by labels glued on the
i hydraulic panel.
- Depending on the size of the machine and
the number of molds, the machine contains
between 20 and 60 liters of fluid. 1
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold hydraulic interface panel.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
- Means of collection: drain pan, suitable
hoses, misc.
PROCEDURE
Drainage
1 Close and lock out the inlet and return valves (1 ; 2 ; 3 ;
4 ; 5 ; 6). 1;2;3 ;4;5;6
2 Install a means of collection.

- Under the purge valves (8 ; 9 ; 10 ; 11).
- Under the purge valves (12 ; 13).
3 Gently open the purge valves (8 ; 9 ; 10 ; 11 ; 12 ; 13).
The fluid drains out of the purge valves .
☞ Wait for the fluids to drain out.
9 8 11 10
13
12

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/4 MP-B0052 Draining / filling the hydraulic lines 2
4 Turn the switch to (C1).

5 Press keys (T1 ; T2 ; T3). T1
The key (T3) corresponds to the tab:fluid test.
C1
T2
Xxxxx
T3
6 Press keys (T4). T4 T4 T4

The solenoid valves are open.
7 Connect the inlet purge valves (8 ; 10 ; 12) to a low-

pressure air supply hose.
8 Turn on the low pressure air circuit.
The fluid drains out of the return purge valves (9 ; 11 ;
13).
☞ Wait until the water has completely drained out.
9 8 11 10
9 Switch off the low pressure air supply.
10 Disconnect the low-pressure air supply hose.
13
12

The solenoid valves are closed.
12 Remove the means of collection.
The hydraulic lines have been drained.
Any servicing on the lines is possible.
i

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Draining / filling the hydraulic lines MP-B0052 3/4
Filling
1 Press keys (T4).
The solenoid valves are open.
2 Close the inlet purge valves (8 ; 10 ; 12).
☞ Check that the return purge valves (9 ; 11 ; 13) are

open.
3 Install a means of collection, under the purge valves (9 ;
11 ; 13).
9 8 11 10
13
12
4 Unlock the valves (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6).

1;2;3 ;4;5;6
5 Gently open the inlet valves (1 ; 3 ; 5).

2 4
6 Once the fluid has drained out of the purge valves (9 ;
11 ; 13), close the purge valves (9 ; 11 ; 13).
7 Open the outlet valves (2 ; 4 ; 6).
6 5 3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/4 MP-B0052 Draining / filling the hydraulic lines 2

The solenoid valves are closed.
END OF OPERATION
1 Remove the means of collection.

2 Clean the work area.
3 Install the grating .
4 Check for leaks, see procedure "AM-B0009".

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Removal / installation of a spindle section MP-B0053 1/5
GENERAL INFORMATION
For greater ease, the spindle section to be

i removed must be positioned next to the
tensioner wheel.
MACHINE STATUS
- Oven cold.
PROCEDURE
1 Get enough slack in the spindle chain using the

nut (1) to release the bushes (2).
2 Using a string or clamping collar (4), hold the spindle

3 4
chain on the tensioner wheel (3).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/5 MP-B0053 Removal / installation of a spindle section 2
Removing
1 Remove the ejector (5) and the spindle tip (6) at the
start of the section (A) to be removed.

8

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4 Remove the support ring (9)/spring (10) assembly.

10
5 Remove the spindle sprocket (11).
11
12

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/5 MP-B0053 Removal / installation of a spindle section 2
13
14

10 Repeat the above operations on the bush (15) at the
other end of the section (A). 15
Replacing
1 Repeat the above operations, in reverse order, to connect a section of spindles (A).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Make the spindle chain taut using the nut (1).

The length "L" of the spring (16) must be L = 270 +/- 20
mm
3 Rotate the machine for a few turns, at low speed and
without heating the ovens.
4 Check the tension on the spindle chain, see procedure

"AM-B0016". 16
5 Check the tension of the fixed chain , see procedure

"AM-B0018".

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Removal/refit: heating module MP-B0054 1/3
GENERAL INFORMATION

Handle with care so as not to damage the
! part(s) .
MACHINE STATUS
- Oven fan stopped.
- Latex gloves
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
PROCEDURE
1 Open the oven doors.

1
2 Turn off the machine, see procedure "OP-B0002".

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0054 Removal/refit: heating module 2
Removing
1 Disconnect the connector (3).
Do not place the connector (3) on the ground,
! particularly on a ground which is damp or 5
dusty.
2 Loosen the attachments (4).
5
4
3 Raise the heating module (5) to release the

hooks (6) from their housing (7). 5
4 Remove the heating module (5).

- Never let the heating module (5) rest on its
lamps .
- Never touch the lamps with your fingers.
Replacing
2 Position the hooks (6) in their housing (7) and lower the
heating module (5).
3 Tighten the fasteners (4).
☞ Check that the heating module (5) is correctly

aligned with the other modules.
4 Connect the connector (3).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Removal/refit: heating module MP-B0054 3/3

A
☞ Make sure that the cables (8) are in the correct

position.
6 Clean the surfaces and parts handled during the
operation with a clean, dry cloth.
8
1
END OF OPERATION
1 Turn on the machine, see procedure "OP-B0001".

2 Close the oven doors.
☞ Machine in production: Make sure that the heating module(s) (5) function correctly.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the unscrambler roller drive belt MP-B0055 1/5
MACHINE STATUS
- Unscrambler roller assembly clear of preforms, see
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Belt (1).
PROCEDURE
Replacement
Removing
1 When the "lockable switch at motor base" option is
present, switch off the power supply to the motor
concerned using the isolating switch (2) and lock it out
- If not.
• Switch of the power supplies to the feeder using the
main isolating switch (3) and lock it out.
2 3
2 Loosen the tensioner arm (4) manually and remove the

belt (1).
1
4

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/5 MP-B0055 Replacing the unscrambler roller drive belt 2
Replacing
1 Loosen the tensioner arm (4) and fit the belt (1)
4 1
following the direction of assembly.
The frame visible from one side of the
! belt (1) must be located inside the loop.
Check alignment of the belt (1)

1 Turn on the power supply to the preform feeder.
2 Turn the switch to (C1). T1
3 Press keys (T1 ; T2 ; T3).
The key (T3) corresponds to the tab:"orienting roller
tests".
The (A) window appears.
T2
C1
Xxxxx
T3
4 Enter the minimum setpoint for the orienting roller

rotation (8).
5 Press the key (9).
A 9 8

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1
6 Press button (10). 10 11
The unscrambler rollers are functioning.
A B
7 Check the rotation and correct alignment of the orienting roller belt .
The belt must be centered on the tensioner roller and on each pulley.
The unscrambler rollers are stopped.
☞ If the belt is incorrectly positioned (A ; B): Adjust

alignment of the belt (1).
C2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/5 MP-B0055 Replacing the unscrambler roller drive belt 2
Adjusting the alignment of the belt (1)
Method (A)
15
12 13 14

3 Rotate the nut (14) a quarter-turn..
5 Tighten the bolt 12.
6 Check alignment of the belt (1), see procedure above.
7 Repeat the method (A) until alignment of the belt (1) on the pulley (15).
Method (B)
15
12 13 14

3 Rotate the nut (13) a quarter-turn..

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

5 Tighten the bolt 12.
6 Check alignment of the belt (1), see procedure above.
7 Repeat the method (B) until alignment of the belt (1) on the pulley (15).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing and adjusting a conveyor belt MP-B0056 1/12
GENERAL INFORMATION
x2
The number of conveyor belts (1) varies

i according to the configuration.
! Replace the part(s) (1) with equipment

identical technical characteristics.
with
1
The HMI screen display(s) may differ depending
i on the model and the configuration of the
machine. 1 1
Depending on the machine configuration, the

i conveyor belts (1) may be type (A) or type (B).
The roller side where the drive system (M) is
i located has no position adjustment (3).
MACHINE STATUS
- Feeder cleared of preforms, see procedure "OP-
B0024". A B

11
1
12
10
- Latex gloves
2
9 1
2
12
10
Part
- Conveyor 12
belt
1 (1), 12
- Holding rod (2).
Consumables
11
Specific tool 9
3
T3
- Raised platform for working at heights.
T3
M
1 1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/12 MP-B0056 Replacing and adjusting a conveyor belt 3
PROCEDURE
The preform feeder can be equipped with conveyor belts (1) at the following locations:
i - Under the hopper,
- In the elevator column,
- On the intermediate conveyor (depending on the machine configuration),
- In the mini-hopper elevator column (depending on the machine configuration),
- On the mini-hopper recycling belt (depending on the machine configuration),
- Under the orienting rollers (depending on the machine configuration),
- On the mini-hopper emptying belt (depending on the machine configuration).
The adjustment procedure varies depending on the type of conveyor belt (A ; B).
i
In the case of modular conveyor belts (B), the rollers are equipped with drive pinions.
i
Starting /stopping the preform feeder
2 Press keys (T1 ; T2). T1
T2
C1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Select the required tab (4).

The (C) window appears.
4 Activate the conveyor belt (1) to be replaced, using
the (5) key. 4
5 Enter the minimum setpoint value (6).
C 5 5 5 6 5 6

The conveyor belt (1) is running.
7 Stop the conveyor belt (1), with the button (8).
The conveyor belt (1) is no longer running.
7 8

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Replacing the conveyor belts, type (A)

1 Move the end of the conveyor belt (1) to the most
accessible location.
2 Slacken the conveyor belt (1).
• Perform the operation on both sides of the return
drum.
• Loosen the bolts (9).
• Loosen the check-nut (10).
• Loosen the bolt (11). 9
3 10 11
3 Open or remove the casings providing access to the
conveyor belt concerned.
10 11
T3
9 9 10 11

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

T3
4 Carefully remove the holding rod (2).

A 11
12
The conveyor belt (1) is opened.
! Mark the link between the old belt and the new
belt (1). 1
Follow the direction of assembly of the

cleats (12) (if present) identically to the old 13
conveyor belt (1).
2
5 Install the new belt (1) at one end of the belt to be
removed using the holding rod (2). 13
6 Carefully pull the old belt (1) by its free end to bring the
new belt in fully.
1
7 Carefully remove the holding rod (2).
8 Remove the old belt (1).
12
11
! Make sure that the edges (13) of the conveyor
belt (1) are perfectly aligned.
9 Connect the 2 ends of the new belt (1) using the holding
rod (2).
The new conveyor belt (1) is installed.
10 Adjust the tension of the conveyor belt (1).
11 Adjust the centering of the conveyor belt (1).
12 Repeat the procedure on all the conveyor belts (1).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235T3 A
Replacing the conveyor belts, type (B)
Replacing a conveyor belt (1), keeping the same B

i number of links (14) and cleats (12).
11
12
1 Identify the direction of rotation (S) of the conveyor

belt (1) in production. 1
14
2 Open or remove the casings providing access 13
Rto the
conveyor belt concerned. END
13
3 Mark "START" a link (14) of the conveyor belt (1), with a END
permanent marker. 2 START
4 Mark "END" the previous link (14), depending12 on the START
direction of rotation (S). 13
5 Make a complete rotation of the conveyor
12 1
belt (1) counting the number of links (14). S
6 Remove the holding rod (2) between the links (14) with
the "START / END" marks. 12
11
The conveyor belt (1) is opened.
7 Mark "START" the first link (14) of the new conveyor
belt (1).
! Follow the direction of assembly of the

cleats (12) (if present) identically to the old
conveyor belt (1).
8 Install the new conveyor belt (1) on the link (14) with
the "END" mark of the old conveyor belt (1), with the aid
of the holding rod (2).
9 Carefully pull the old belt (1) by its free end to bring the
new belt in fully.
The links (14) with the "START /END" marks are
accessible.
10 Remove the holding rod (2) between the links (14) with
the "START / END" marks.
11 Remove the old conveyor belt (1).
! Make sure that the edges (13) of the conveyor

belt (1) are perfectly aligned.
12 Connect the 2 ends of the new belt (1) using the holding
rod (2).
The new conveyor belt (1) is installed.
13 Adjust the tension of the conveyor belt (1).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts, type (A)
The setting for the conveyor belt should eliminate:

i - Slipping on the rollers,
- Flapping at a slack belt section,
- Centering faults on the rollers.
! Perform the operation on both sides of the return drum.
1 Remove the return drum using the adjusting

3
9 10 11
screws (11), so that the tension of the conveyor
belt (1) is neutral.
2 Make two reference marks, at a distance of X = 1
m from each other, on the conveyor belt (1).
3 Increase the tension of the conveyor belt (1) using the
setting screws (11) so that its initial length increases
by (0,3 - 1 %).
The distance between the two marks must be
between X = 1,003 & 1,01 m.
10 11
T3
9 9 10 11
9
3 1
9
X
T3
M

11 SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
12
1
8/12 MP-B0056 12
Replacing and adjusting a conveyor belt 3
12
10
B
Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts, type (B)
2
9
In the case of conveyor belts (1) type (B), the rollers are
i 12 drive pinions (13).
10
equipped with
12
21
13
1
The setting12
for
1 the conveyor belt should eliminate:
i - Slipping on the pinions (13),
! Perform the operation on both sides of the return drum.

11
11
1 Remove the protective casings to view the tension of
12
1
the slack strands (Y) of the conveyor belts (1) during
adjustment. 1
T3 14
X
12
10
2
9
13
12
10 M
12
1 12
Y
11 14
T3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Loosen the fixing bolts (9).

3 Loosen the check nuts (10).
4 Tighten or loosen the screws (11) to adjust the
tension of the conveyor belt (1).
The conveyor belts (1) of type (B) must present, on the
return part, a soft strand (Y) with a clearly visible belly
without excess.
5 Tighten up the check nuts (10) 9
3 10 11
6 Tighten the fixing screws (9) on each side of the
roller (14).
The tension of the conveyor belt (1) is adjusted.
10 11
A B
T3
11 9 9 10 11
12
1
1
14
12
10
2
9
1
12
10 M
12
1 12
Y
11 14
T3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
10/
MP-B0056 Replacing and adjusting a conveyor belt 3
12
9
Adjusting the tension of a type (B) two-way conveyor belt (1)
3
In this configuration, it is the weight of the roller (14) and
i 9
its drive system (M) that create the tension of the
1
conveyor belt (1).

3
1 Loosen the fixing screws (9) on each side of the
roller (14).
The weight of the roller (14) and of its drive
system (M) tension the conveyor belt (1).
2 Loosen the check nuts (10). T3
3 Tighten or loosen the screws (11) to adjust the
tension of the conveyor belt (1).
4 Tighten the fixing screws (9) on each side of the 14 M
9
roller (14).
The tension of the conveyor belt (1)
3 is adjusted.
9
1
3
14
9
T3
T3
11
14
10 M

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
11/
3 Replacing and adjusting a conveyor belt MP-B0056
12
Centering the conveyor belts, type (A)
The centering of a conveyor belt (1) is adjusted with the

i adjustment system (3) on only one side of the
roller (14).
1 Rotate the conveyor belt (1).
The conveyor belt (1) is running.
☞ Check the behavior of the conveyor belt (1).
2 If centering is not correct, Loosen the fixing bolts (9). 9

3 10 11

4 Tighten or loosen the screw(s) (11) to center the
conveyor belt (1) on the roller (14).
The conveyor belt (1) is centered on the rollers (14).
5 Tighten up the check nuts (10).
6 Tighten the fixing bolts (9).
7 Adjust the centering of the conveyor belt (1) on each
roller (14).
8 Stop the rotation of the conveyor belt (1).
The conveyor belt (1) is no longer running.
9
10 11
A B
T3
11 9 9 10 11
12
1
1
14
12
10
2
9
1
12
10 M
12
1 12
Y
11 14
T3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
12/
MP-B0056 Replacing and adjusting a conveyor belt 3
12
END OF OPERATION
1 Clean all the parts handled during the operation using cleaning agent "NET A03" and a clean, dry cloth.
2 Remove all debris in accordance with applicable legislation.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Adjusting the tension of the spindle chain and the stationary chains MP-B0070 1/3
GENERAL INFORMATION B C
This operation is performed in 3 steps:
Step Zone
1 Release of the fixed chain A-C
Adjusting the spring tension on the
2 B
tensioning wheel
Adjusting the tension on the A
3 A-C
stationary chain
MACHINE STATUS
- Oven fan stopped,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
- Caliper .
PROCEDURE
Step 1: release of the fixed chain

1 Loosen the counter nuts (1 ; 2) but do not remove
them. X
3 X
1 X
2 X
4
2 Loosen the nuts (3 ; 4).
The springs (5 ; 6) are relaxed.
X
5 X
6

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0070 Adjusting the tension of the spindle chain and the stationary chains 2
Step 2: adjusting the spring tension on the tensioning wheel

1 Adjust the nut (7) to obtain the dimension L= 270 ± 20
mm. 7 8
Use a pin spuller in the holes on the nut (7) to set the
tension on the spring (8) more easily.
Step 3: adjusting the tension on the stationary chain

1 Tighten the nuts (3) in order to obtain: J1
• J1 = 90 ± 1 mm X
3
J1 X
1
3 Tighten the nuts (4) in order to obtain:

J3
• J2 = 115 ± 1 mm J2
X
4
5 Adjust the screws (9) to obtain:
• J3 = 5 +0,4/0 mm
6 Close the safety doors.
X
9
X
2 J2 J3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Adjusting the tension of the spindle chain and the stationary chains MP-B0070 3/3
END OF OPERATION
1 Make a complete rotation of the spindle chain

using JOG.
2 Check the clearances J1 ; J2 ; J3.
• J1 = 90 ± 1 mm
• J2 = 115 ± 1 mm
• J3 = 5 +0,4/0 mm
If the clearances J1 ; J2 ; J3 are outside the tolerance
ranges, restart the procedure at step 3.
If not, the procedure is now complete.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Setting the tension on a transmission belt MP-B0071 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
! Before any work on the tension of the timing

belts, check the adjustment values on the
drawings delivered with the machine., see
If the belts lose their tension regularly after the
i commissioning period check the settings and
conditions of the various mechanical parts and
replace the belt if necessary.
3
MACHINE STATUS
B0027".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
- Frequency meter (3) and instructions for use.
PROCEDURE

2
2 Loosen the counter nuts (6 ; 7) but do not remove
them.
4
The screws (4) are used to adjust the height of
i the belt tensioner.
7
3 Adjust the position of the tensioner roller (2) using the
screw (8) and the check nut (7) until the recommended
belt tension is obtained. 6
• During the operation, check the belt tension using
the frequency meter (3), see procedure "MP- 8
B0012".
4 Tighten up the check nuts (6 ; 7).
4 5
6 Release machine rotation, making sure that the flange
system (1) is positioned in its housing .
After each belt tension adjustment, operate the
i machine without any articles and check the belt
2
tension values.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0071 Setting the tension on a transmission belt 2
END OF OPERATION
1 Rotate the machine several times using the manual

rotation system.
2 Check the belt tensions using the frequency meter (3) at
the position indicated, see procedure "MP-B0012".
3 Check the synchronization of the machine before
starting production.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Cleaning and inspection of molds out of machine MP-B0072 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
- The cleaning of molds prior to storage must

! be carried out when the molds are at
ambient temperature.
- The removed molds must be cleaned prior
to storage in order to remove any humidity
and prevent corrosion.
Never use oxygenated or chlorinated cleaning
agents.
This procedure can be performed outside the
i planned maintenance time or format changeover
time.
MACHINE STATUS
- Mold and mold base removed, see procedure "MP-

B0100".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
Specific tool
- Sectionned pallets.
PROCEDURE
Cleaning
1 Clean the half-molds and the mold bases , using a
3 1 3
clean, non-abrasive cloth soaked in cleaning
agent "NET A05".
2 Carefully clean the following parts:
- Centering studs and holes (1).
- Partition lines (2) of half-molds and mold bases.
4 4
- Preform centering ring (3).
- Cavities (4) of half-molds and mold bases.
3 Check for the absence of abnormal wear or damage on 1 1
the mold cavity and on the partition line .
2 2
4 2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0072 Cleaning and inspection of molds out of machine 1
Storage
1 Pack the half-molds and mold bases in bubble wrap.
2 Store the molds on sectionned pallets.
3 Make sure there is no chlorine in the storage area.
4 Monitor the humidity level in the storage area (less
than 70%).
5 Monitor the temperature in the storage area
(from 20°C to 25°C).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Greasing the stretching guides MP-B0073 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

information, see chapter "Safety precautions

implant (prosthesis, et cetera) are not qualified

magnetic field.
Never exceed the recommended amount of

grease as this may cause permanent damage to
the parts being greased.
i 1 cm3 of "LUB A19" grease corresponds

to 1 shot from the "ALGI" grease gun.
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- "LUB A19" grease,
Specific tool
- "ALGI" grease gun.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0073 Greasing the stretching guides 1
PROCEDURE
1 Wipe off the grease nipples (1) using a clean dry cloth.
2 Inject 1 cm3 of "LUB A19" grease into each
nipple (1) using the grease gun "ALGI".
4 Clean off excess grease.
5 Repeat the operation at all of the blowing stations. 1
6 Close the safety doors.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Greasing the transfer arm guides MP-B0074 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
- Recycle carriage removed,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- "LUB A19" grease,
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
1 Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the

machine.
2 Remove the protective covers from the transfer
table (option); see procedure "MP-B0249MP-B0249".
grease as this may cause permanent damage
to the parts being greased.
! -
-
Inject 2 cm3 of grease in 2 steps.
1 cm³ of "LUB A19" grease corresponds
to 1 shot from the "ALGI" grease gun.
Step 1
1 Clean the greasing nipple (2) using a clean, dry cloth.
2 Inject 1 cm³ of "LUB A19" grease into the
nipple (2) using the "ALGI" grease gun.
3 Repeat the operation at all of the transfer arm
guides (3). 3
! To ensure a uniform distribution of grease, you

must turn the transfer wheel by 1 turn(s) using
the JOG before carrying out step 2.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0074 Greasing the transfer arm guides 1
Step 2
1 Repeat step 1 to inject again 1 cm³ of grease at all of
the transfer arm guides (3).
3 Remove any excess grease using a clean, dry cloth.
4 Refit the protective covers of the transfer
table (option); see procedure "MP-B0249MP-B0249".
5 Close the safety doors to the working zone.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Greasing the reducer motor bearing MP-B0075 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

! Inject 6 cm³ of grease in 2 steps. 1 cm³ of "LUB

A21" grease corresponds to 1 shot from
the "ALGI" grease gun.
MACHINE STATUS
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- "LUB A21" grease,
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
Step 1
3 Turn the machine 1 time(s) using the JOG.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0075 Greasing the reducer motor bearing 1
Step 2
1 Repeat step 1 to inject again 3 cm³ of grease into the
grease nipple (1).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Greasing the mold base support guides MP-B0076 1/1
GENERAL INFORMATION

i to 1 shot from the "ALGI" grease gun.
The new rails are factory pre-greased and do not
need to be greased when they are assembled for
the first time.
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- "LUB A19" grease,
Specific tool
PROCEDURE


SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Greasing the oven wheel shaft bearings MP-B0077 1/1
GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE STATUS
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- "LUB A21" grease,
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
2 Inject 4 cm³ of "LUB A21" grease into each
3 Turn the machine 1 time(s) using the JOG, to ensure a 2 1
uniform distribution of the grease in the bearings (2) of
the oven wheel.
4 Inject 4 cm³ of "LUB A21" grease again into each
5 Turn the machine 1 time(s) using the JOG.
6 Clean any excess grease off the nipples (1) and
bearings (2) using a clean dry cloth.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Greasing the tensioner wheel guide MP-B0079 1/1
GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE STATUS
- Spindle chain removed (1), see procedure "MP-
B0043",
- Oven cold.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- "LUB A19" grease,
Specific tool
PROCEDURE

Inject 14 cm³ of grease "LUB A19", in several
i steps, for full greasing of the guide .
3 Move the carriage (4) on the rail (5) to spread the
grease.
4 Repeat the previous steps, from step 2, until the
guide has been completely greased.
5 Clean the greasing nipple (3) using a clean, dry cloth. 1
6 Clean off excess grease.

2
5 4 3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Greasing the mold base carriage MP-B0081 1/1
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- "LUB A21" grease,
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
1 Remove the mold base , see procedure "MP-B0100".

2 Clean the carriage (1) using a clean, dry cloth. 1
3 Grease the fixing system (2) and the centering
piece (3) of the carriage (1).
4 Fit the mold base, see procedure "MP-B0100".
5 Use the JOG to access the remaining mold bases.
1
3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Checking and adjusting the viewfinder of an infrared camera MP-B0084 1/1
MACHINE STATUS
- Oven cold.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- Certified standard preforms for the type of
production being carried out.
PROCEDURE
Inspection
1 Install 1 preform on the spindle nose, at the oven
infeed (A). A
☞ Check the position of the camera (1).

- The camera (1) must be pointed towards the
preform body (process parameters) .
Adjusting
1 Loosen the nut (2) but do not remove it.
2 Position the camera (1) depending on the heating zone 2
of the preform to be checked.
4 Remove the preform.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Checking the mold support unit safety devices MP-B0086 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
! When rotating manually, always turn the

machine in the normal direction of production
(except when following
specific SIDEL instructions).
The purpose of this procedure is to check the
i change in status of the sensors or failing this,
that the alarm messages corresponding to the
various operation safety devices are displayed.
MACHINE STATUS

- Cold molds.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- Adhesive tape.
Specific tool
- 10 mm plastic thickness gauge(1).
PROCEDURE
Mold closing and locking safety cams
1 Place a 10 mm thick plastic gage (1), using adhesive

tape, on the left half mold (2) of the open mold support
unit (A). 6
2 Bring the mold support unit (A) around using manual
rotation, so that the roller (3) is in contact with the mold
closing retractable safety cam (4).
7
The lamp on the detector "-3401B3" (5) goes out.
The alarm message corresponding to the fault appears 3 4 5
8
on the message bar at the "HMI".
rotation, so that the roller (6) is in contact with the mold 2
locking retractable safety cam (7).
The alarm message corresponding to the fault appears 1
rotation, so that the mold locking roller (6) is no longer in A
contact with the cam (9).
The led on the "-3401B3" sensor (5) lights up. 6
The led on the "-3401B2" sensor (8) lights up.
5 Acknowledge the faults at the "HMI".
The alarm message clears.
6 Open the mold support unit (A).
7 Remove the gauge (1).
8 Close and lock the mold support unit (A) manually.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/4 MP-B0086 Checking the mold support unit safety devices 2
Safety: mold not locked

1 Manually pivot the safety tag (10).
2 Pivot the safety device (10) to its initial position.
☞ Check that the alarm message corresponding to the

fault is present on the "HMI".
3 Acknowledge the fault at the "HMI". 11 10 11 10
4 Repeat the operation on the second safety tag (10).
Check operation of the detector "-3451B9".
Safety: mold open at mold opening/closing cam outfeed

1 Manually pivot the detector plate (12) (the plate is held
in position by a magnet).
The lamp on the detector "-3401B4.1" (13) goes out.
on the message bar at the "HMI"
The led on the "-3401B4.1" sensor (13) lights up.

3 Acknowledge the fault at the "HMI". 4 12 13 12
Safety: mold open at mold opening/closing cam infeed

1 Manually pivot the detector plate (14) (the plate is held
in position by a magnet).
15 14 3 15 14
on the message bar at the "HMI"

3 Acknowledge the fault at the "HMI".

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Checking the mold support unit safety devices MP-B0086 3/4
Safety: the mold is not free

1 Manually pivot the detection rod (16).

The alarm message clears. 16
Safety: mold opening/closing lever adjustment tooling

1 Remove the cam (17).
17
2 Install the cam (17) on its support (19).
The led on the "-3402B5.1" sensor (18) lights up. 18

19

The led on the "-3402B2.1" sensor (29) lights up.

fault is present on the "HMI". 29
28
Mold base roller sensor

1 Position the roller (20) in front of the
sensor "-3402B3" (21) using manual rotation.
rotation so that the roller (20) is no longer in front of the
sensor "-3402B3" (21).
The lamp on the detector "-3402B3" (21) goes out. 20
21

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/4 MP-B0086 Checking the mold support unit safety devices 2
Safety: shell support not locked, in the presence of a bottle switch type l mold-support unit (see figure (B))
1 Manually pivot the detection rod (26).

2 Pull the positioning pin (27), pivot the safety (26) to the
initial position and release the positioning pin.
3 Acknowledge the fault at the "HMI". 26
27
END OF OPERATION
If one of the machine safety devices is not operating correctly::
Never start the machine if one of the safety devices is not operating correctly.
1 Check the sensor setting.

2 If damaged, replace the sensor .
3 Check operation of the safety device after carrying out any work.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Checking the operation of the blower emergency stop buttons and the door locked
2 MP-B0087 1/5
position
GENERAL INFORMATION
! The number and position of the emergency stop buttons varies according to the configuration of the
machine, refer to the emergency stop electrical layout drawing.
The number and position of the safety doors vary according to the configuration of the machine, refer to the
i "machine wiring" electrical drawings for the wheel and the oven.
For more information on the function: opening and closing a door, see procedure "OP-B0014".
i
For more information on the function: opening and closing a confinement area door, see procedure "OP-
i B0015".
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE
Localisation
Reference Designation Remark
Emergency stop button
Emergency stop button Depending on the configuration of your machine

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/5 MP-B0087 2
position
The view above shows the configurations of the machine with the dedust option and bottle outfeed.
i
Checking the emergency stop buttons
1 Press one of the emergency stop buttons (1).
An siren sounds and an alarm light appears.
A corresponding fault message is displayed on 1
the HMI.
- If the emergency stop button (1) does not work,
replace it.
2 Release the emergency stop button.
3 Turn on the machine.
• Press the green button on the main electrical
cabinet.
4 Acknowledge the fault at the HMI.
The alarm siren stops.
The red part of the light alarm flashes.
The alarm remains on the display.
5 Acknowledge the fault at the HMI.
The alarm message corresponding to the fault
The light alarm disappears.
6 Repeat the operation for all the emergency stop
buttons (1).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 MP-B0087 3/5
position
Checking door locking in JOG mode
Z4 Z3 Z0 Z2 Z1 Z8 Z6
*
* : Z8 is present if the machine is equipped with the dedust option.
! This procedure requires good knowledge of the use of

the JOG, see procedure "OP-B0008". 33*
1 Connect the JOG unit (3) to the socket corresponding to
the work zone on the machine.
*: JOG depending on the machine equipment.
☞ Check that it is impossible to open the other

machine doors .
2 Repeat the operation for all the JOG (3) operation
zones .
Checking the door locked position at the PCC

1 Insert the key in the switch .
2 Turn the switch to (C1). T1
T2
C1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/5 MP-B0087 2
position
3 Press keys (T1; T2).

B
The (B) window appears.
4 Press the key (T4).

The key (T4) turns to orange. T4
The safety doors (6) are unlocked.
All the safety doors (6) which are closed and not locked
are displayed in green at the PCC.
5 Open a machine safety door (6).

The key (T4) returns to its original state. T4
The safety doors (6) are locked.
The machine safety doors (6) which are closed and
locked are no longer displayed at the PCC.
The safety door (6) which is open is displayed in red at
the PCC.
7 Check that the safety door (6) which is open, is
displayed in red at the PCC.
☞ Otherwise, contact your maintenance team.
8 Press (T6) for 2 seconds.

The "door open" message #xx is displayed in the alarm T6
window.
The machine must not start up.
☞ Otherwise, contact your maintenance team.
9 Close the machine safety door (6).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 MP-B0087 5/5
position

The key (T4) turns to orange. T4
The safety doors (6) are unlocked.
All the safety doors (6) which are closed and not locked
are displayed in green at the PCC.
6 T1

The key (T4) returns to its original state. T4
The safety doors (6) are locked. T5
The machine safety doors (6) which are closed and
locked are no longer displayed at the PCC.
12 Check all the machine safety doors (6).
13 Press the key (T1) or (T5) to return to the home screen.
T1 T5

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Checking the feeder emergency-stop buttons MP-B0088 1/1
GENERAL INFORMATION
! The number and position of the emergency stop buttons varies according to the configuration of the
machine, refer to the emergency stop electrical layout drawing.
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE
1 1
Checking the emergency stop buttons

1 Press one of the emergency stop buttons (1).
A corresponding fault message is displayed on
the "HMI".
- If the emergency stop button (1) does not work,
replace it.
2 Release the emergency stop button (1).
1
3 If the remote hopper is present, press the green button 1
on the electrical box.

The alarm message corresponding to the fault
5 Repeat the operation for all the emergency stop
buttons (1).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the filters of the blower electrical cabinets MP-B0089 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
- The number of electrical cabinets depends on the
machine configuration.
- The filters (2) are located on the sides of the
electrical cabinets (1).
- The number and size of the filters (2) vary
according to the electrical cabinets but the
replacing procedure remains the same.
1
MACHINE STATUS
B0027".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Filters (2).
Consumables
Specific tool
- Raised platform for working at heights.
PROCEDURE
Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment

! fitted on the machine and always follow current safety 3 3 2
regulations.
1 Remove the cover (3) using a screwdriver.
! Dispose of the used filters (2) in compliance

with current legislation.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0089 Replacing the filters of the blower electrical cabinets 2
3 Clean the cover (3) and the support (4) using a clean
dry cloth.
4 Fit the new filter (2) on the cover (3). 4
5 Fit the cover (3) and the new filter (2) on the
3
support (4).
6 Repeat the operation at all of the electrical cabinets (1).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Replacement of lamps / inspection of lamp base protections and ceramic reflectors

3 MP-B0090 1/6
on oven modules
GENERAL INFORMATION
! - The following operations are carried out on

the workbench.
- Always hold the lamps (1) by their ends.
Never install an infrared oven module (A) in
contact with its lamps (1).
MACHINE STATUS
- Heating module removed, see procedure "MP-
B0054".
- Cotton gloves
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Lamp 2 500 W (7or9 per module, depending on the 2 14 1
configuration),
- Lamp 3 000 W (1 per module),
- Lamp base protection (if needed),
- Ceramic reflector (if needed).
Consumables
Specific tool
- Electrician's screwdriver 2 mm .

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

2/6 MP-B0090 3
on oven modules
PROCEDURE
Removal of lamps (1)

3;4 A 2 3;4
2 Pull the tab (5).
The lower part of the cover (2) releases.
4 Repeat the operation for removal of the second
protection (2) of the oven module (A).
5 Remove the nuts (6).
6 Open the cover (7).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

3 MP-B0090 3/6
on oven modules
7 Disengage the supply leads (8) from the through

holes (B). B
8 Remove the protective cover plate (9).
8 9
9 Identify the position of the supply leads (8) of the

lamp to be disconnected from the connector (10) using C
the diagram (C).
8 10
10 Disconnect the leads (8) from the connector (10) using

a screwdriver . C 8
10
11 Separate the mobile support (11) and simultaneously

take out the lamp base (12). 12
11

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

4/6 MP-B0090 3
on oven modules
12 Disengage the second lamp base (12) from the fixed

support (13).
13
12
13 Take out the lamp (1) and supply leads (8).

8
14 Repeat the operation for all lamps (1).
☞ Check the condition of the protections (2).

- If the protections (2) on the lamp bases are
deformed and / or dark in color, replace them.
15 Clean the protections (2) using a clean, dry cloth.
☞ Check the condition of the reflectors (14).

- If the ceramic reflectors (14) are dark in color 8
and / or broken, replace them. 1
14

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

3 MP-B0090 5/6
on oven modules
Replacement of reflectors (14) (only if necessary)

15 ; 16
2 Remove the support (17).

17
3 Slide the reflector (14) by separating it slightly from the

support (18). 14
4 Remove all of the reflectors (14) to be replaced.
5 Install the new reflectors (14). 18
6 Install the support (17) using the washers (16) and

bolts (15). 15 ; 16
17

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

6/6 MP-B0090 3
on oven modules
Installation of lamps (1)

making sure that you: D
- Use new lamps (1).
- Connect the lamps (1) using the diagram (C).
- Install the lamp 3 000 W (yellow supply leads) in
zone (1) (the first zone from the bottom of the
heating module (A)).
- Check that the supply leads (8) are correctly
positioned (see figure (D)) .

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing a module of the beacon stack MP-B0091 1/1
! Access to servicing areas is limited to personnel

designated and trained by the customer.
The beacon stack (1) is composed of 4 light
i modules (2) and a sound module (3).
1
MACHINE STATUS
out, see procedure "OP-B0002".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
2 3
Part
- Component modules of the beacon stack.
PROCEDURE
1 Turn the module (2) to align the module and

base (5) reference marks (4).
2
2 Remove the beacon stack (1) from the base (5).
3 Replace the faulty part with a new part of the same
color.
Make sure that the colored parts are in the
! correct order when reassembling the beacon 4
stack . (see figure A)
4 Lock the various modules (2 ; 3) together.
The module is locked when the arrow (6) is opposite 5
the reference mark (4).
5 Lock the beacon stack (1) onto the base (5).
6 Check that the beacon stack (1) operates correctly, see 6
2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing the filters on the feeder electrical cabinets MP-B0093 1/1
GENERAL INFORMATION
- The number of electrical cabinets (1) depends on
the machine configuration.
- The number and size of the filters (2) vary
according to the electrical cabinets (1) but the
replacing procedure remains the same.
! Replace a filter (2) with a technically identical

filter .
MACHINE STATUS
out, see procedure "OP-B0002".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- New filter(s) (2).
Consumables
PROCEDURE
1 Remove the cover (3) using a screwdriver.

! Dispose of the used filters (2) in compliance

with current legislation. 3
3 Clean the cover (3) and the support (4) using a clean
dry cloth.
4 Fit the new filter (2) on the cover (3).
5 Fit the cover (3) and the new filter (2) on the 1
support (4).
6 Repeat the operation at all of the electrical cabinets (1). 3
4 3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the batteries of the PLCs MP-B0095 1/3
GENERAL INFORMATION
2
! - Access to electrical areas is restricted to
qualified and authorized personnel only. 1
- It is advisable to replace the batteries of all
PLCs.
! Dispose of the used batteries in accordance with

current legislation.
3
Alarm messages requiring replacement of the
! PLC batteries: 4
- Battery fault: PLC transfer.
- Battery fault: PLC blow wheel.
- Battery fault: PLC oven.
no message for the PLC (4).
1-2-3
MACHINE STATUS
- Touch control screen powered off, see procedure
"OP-B0002".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Lithium batteries "CR2477N".
Specific tool
- Electrician's screwdriver ,
- Stepladder .
PROCEDURE
Programmable logic controller (PLC)(1 ; 2 ; 3)

2 Identify the polarity of the battery (5).
The + pole is on top of the battery.
i
3 Extract the used battery (5) with a small flathead
screwdriver.
4 Insert the new battery (5).
5 4

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0095 Replacing the batteries of the PLCs 3
Programmable logic controller (PLC)(4)

1 Open the cover (6).
2 Identify the position of the battery in the

cavity (figure A) . A
3 Pull the tab to extract the used battery (figure B) .

4 Pull the tab taut (figure B) . B

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the batteries of the PLCs MP-B0095 3/3
5 Push the new battery into the bottom of the

cavity (figure C) . C
6 Fold the tab over the battery to install the

cover (figure A) . A

The battery has been replaced.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the battery of the feeder PLC MP-B0096 1/1
GENERAL INFORMATION
! Access to electrical areas is restricted to

qualified and authorized personnel only.
The disposal of the used battery must always be
! done in accordance with the applicable
legislation.
MACHINE STATUS
- Touch control screen powered off, see procedure
"OP-B0002".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Lithium batteries "CR2477N".
Specific tool
- Electrician's screwdriver .
PROCEDURE

2 Identify the polarity of the battery (2).
The + pole is on top of the battery.
i
3 Extract the used battery (2) with a small flathead
screwdriver.
4 Insert the new battery (2).
The battery has been replaced.
The procedure is now complete. 2 1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Calibrating the multi-parameter tester MP-B0099 1/5
GENERAL INFORMATION
Materials required:
Equipment supplied Equipment to be
with the Ryznar index provided by user
kit cases (A)
Spray bottle (11)
6 A
Container (12)
Thermometer (2)
Buffer pH (5)
x3
Conductivity
solution (13)
x2
11 12 2
Multi-parameter
tester (6)
Glassware
- Latex gloves
PROCEDURE
Check the expiration date (exp) before using a product. Never use an expired analysis product, to avoid an
! erroneous result.
Cleaning of the tester (6) (before use)
! -
-
The following operations must be carried out in the laboratory.
Comply with health and safety instructions for the products in use.
- Wear safety equipment for body, hands and face. 6
For further information regarding the multi-parameter tester (6) refer to the documentation supplied with the
i equipment.
This cleaning procedure should be applied prior to

i calibration of the tester (6) and as indicated in the
calibration procedure.
8
1 Fill the beaker (9) up to 2/3 with tap water. 6
- Never use de-ionized water. 2/3 7
- Do not turn on the tester (6) during this phase.
9 16 9

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/5 MP-B0099 Calibrating the multi-parameter tester 3
5 Rinse the sensor (7) 3 times, using a wash

16 6 11
bottle (11) filled with demineralized water, over the
receptacle (12).
6 Drain the tester (6). 7
The tester (6) is ready for use.
12
Cleaning the measurement equipment

1 Fill the wash bottle (11) with distilled water.
2 Rinse the plastic tube or beaker (9) using the wash 11
bottle (11) over the receptacle (12).
• Turn the plastic tube or the beaker (9) one full turn
while cleaning.
9
• Repeat this operation 3 times.
3 Empty the plastic tube or beaker (9) into the
container (12).
12

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

6
Temperature calibration (°C)

2
3 Submerge the sensor (1) of the thermometer (2), in the
beaker (9) filled with tap water. 8
Wait for the temperature (°C) to stabilize on the 6
thermometer (2).
The tester (6) lights up.
5 Submerge the sensor (7) of the tester (6), in the 2/3 1 7
beaker (9) filled with tap water. 9 16 9
☞ Wait for the temperature (°C) to stabilize on the
tester (6).
- If the reading on the tester (6) is not the same 6
as the reading on the standard thermometer (2),
perform the following procedure:
• Select "pH" mode using the "MODE_/ 3 4
_ENT" (10) button.
• Press the key "CAL"(3).
The selection has been validated.
• Press "HOLD" (4) for 5 seconds.
The display reading changes. 13 10
8
• Set the temperature using the keys (3 ;
4) until you obtain the temperature on the
standard thermometer (2).
14
• Press the key "MODE_/_ENT"(10).
The tester (6) has been calibrated.
7 Empty the beaker (9) in the receptacle (12).
8 Clean the equipment used; see the corresponding °C
chapter.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/5 MP-B0099 Calibrating the multi-parameter tester 3

6
Calibration of hydrogen potential (pH) and conductivity (µS)
The calibration principles for pH and conductivity are

i strictly identical to each other.
5
1 Fill the beaker (9) up to 2/3 with the calibration

8
solution (5). 6
2 Submerge the sensor (7) of the tester (6) in the
calibration solution (5).
☞ Wait until the reading on the tester (6) stabilizes.

- The reading on the tester (6) must correspond 2/3 7
to the value indicated on the label of the
calibration solution (5) flask. 9 16 9
• In case of inconsistency between values,
replace the batteries or the sensor (7), refer
to the technical documentation supplied 5 13
with this equipment.
! To validate the reading, the sensor (7) must be

immersed in the solution .
The tester (6) lights up.
i mode.
Select the calibration mode using the "MODE /
ENT" key (10).
The modes that can be selected are "pH" and "µS".
5 Press the key "CAL"(3). 6
The selection has been validated.
6 Press the key "MODE_/_ENT"(10).
The reading has been validated. 3 4
8 Empty the beaker (9) in the receptacle (12).
chapter.
8 10
10 Repeat the calibration operation with each calibration
solution (5). 12
- The pH calibration is done using the 3 pH buffer
solutions provided (5).
- The conductivity calibration is done using
the 2 conductivity solutions provided (13).
pH µS

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Cleaning of the tester (6) (after use)
! Clean the tester (6) after each analysis campaign. 6 14
1 Dip the tester (6) for 20 min in a plastic tube or a 15

beaker (9) filled with the cleaning
solution (14) provided.
4 Put a few drops of conservation
solution (15) (solution provided) in the cap (16) before
16 9
closing and putting away the tester (6).
up document.
6 Empty the beaker (9) in the receptacle (12)
chapter.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Removal/refit: molds and mold bases MP-B0100 1/4
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Mold set.
Consumables
PROCEDURE
Removing
1
1 Pull the indexing pin (1) and turn the handle (2).
2 Push the distribution block (3).
The distribution block (3) is disconnected.
3 Repeat the operation for the other half-mold .

5 Disconnect the hydraulic quick connections (4) from the
mold base (A).
4 A

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/4 MP-B0100 Removal/refit: molds and mold bases 2
6 Disconnect the permanent air hose (5) from its storage

unit (6).
An alarm message appears at the "HMI".
5
7 Hold the mold-support unit open and connect the

hose (5) on the carriage (7).
The carriage (7) is no longer carrying the mold
base (A). 8 9
8 Remove the mold base (A).
A
Distinguish the left half-mold (8) from the right half-

i mold (9). The right half-mold (9) is equipped with
centering studs.
8
10 Slide the support thrust (11) outwards.
11 Pivot and remove the half-mold (8).
12 Proceed in the same way for the opposite half-mold (9).
11
10
12

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Removal/refit: molds and mold bases MP-B0100 3/4
Replacing
1 Clean all of the contact surfaces of the mold shell (12 ;
13) using a clean, dry cloth.
2 Position the half-mold (8) on its shell support (12).
3 Slide the support thrust (11) inwards.
4 Tighten the bolts (10) to a torque of 14 Nm. 12 13
5 Proceed in the same way for the opposite half-mold (9).
6 Clean the carriage (7) using a clean, dry cloth.
Do not remove the grease present on the fixing
i system (16) and the centering piece (17) of the
carriage (7).
7 Position the mold-base assembly (A) on the pneumatic 16
17
carriage (7) using the centering piece (17).
8 Disconnect the hose (5) from the carriage (7).
☞ Check the proper locking of the mold base (A) on

the carriage (7).
7
9 Connect the hose (5) on its storage unit (6). 5

To make this connection easier, close the
i hydraulic circuit inlet valve and drain a few 8
centimetres off the circuit.
11 10
14 N.m
12
10 Connect the hydraulic quick connections (4) on the mold

base (A).
11 Close and lock the mold support unit manually. 4

2 15
12 Position the safety catch (14) on the lug (15).
13 Pivot the handle (2).
The indexing pin (1) is locked.
The distribution block (3) is connected.
14
14 Repeat the operation for the other half-mold .
3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/4 MP-B0100 Removal/refit: molds and mold bases 2
END OF OPERATION
1 Clean the half-molds and the mold bases, using a clean, non-abrasive cloth soaked in cleaning agent "NET
A05", see procedure "AM-B0005 / AM-B0012".

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Cleaning/greasing the "FESTO" blow block MP-B0103 1/7
GENERAL INFORMATION
blocks.
Make sure that the pneumatic circuit is closed. " AirEco1 "
!
MACHINE STATUS " AirEco2 NF "
- Cold molds,
" AirEco2 "
B0027",
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- KLUBER UNISILKON LCA 3801(1) grease"LUB
A35", plastic bag .
Specific tool 1 T1
- Brush (T1),
- M5 bolt (T2).
T2
PROCEDURE
Removal of blow block

Move the blow station away and attach it to the
i nearby blowing station using a plastic collar.
X
3 2 X
4

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/7 MP-B0103 Cleaning/greasing the "FESTO" blow block 3
5 X
6 5
Removal of parts to be greased

1 Remove the solenoid valves (7), using a screwdriver.
7 8
If removing the solenoid valves (7 ; 8), do not
! mix them up. Solenoid valves (7) are of
the "NF" type, and solenoid valve (8) is of
the "NO" type.

9 N°6
10
The screws (9) are torqued to 20 Nm. You may
i have difficulty loosening them.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4 Remove the damping discs (11), using a screwdriver.

Do not damage the bush (12) with the
! screwdriver. 12
11
5 Remove the asssemblies, bush (12) / piston (13), by

lifting them with a flat-head screwdriver. 12
The lower part of the piston (13a) stays in position in
the blow block (5).
5 14 13
6 Separate the piston (13) and the bush (12).

12 13
7 Turn over the blow block (5), making sure not to

damage the flow limiter (14).
8 Push the lower pistons (13a) a few millimeters, using a
13a 15
tool Ø 6 mm. 8mm
Do not completely push in the lower

! piston (13a), otherwise you risk damaging the
guiding surface (15) of the piston.
9 Turn over the blow block (5).
10 Remove the lower pistons (13a) and the lower damping 5 13a 13b T2
discs (13b) using the screw M5 (T2).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Greasing
1
i - The grease tube (1) is sufficient for the
complete greasing of a blow block.
- After the greasing operation, it is
recommended to not keep the brush (T1) for
future use.
5 15 12
2 Clean the boreholes (15) of the blow block (5), along

their entire length, using a soft, lint-free cloth. 13
3 Clean the bushes (12) and the pistons (13) using a soft,
lint-free cloth.
4 Apply grease (1) on the brush (T1) by rotating the

brush. 16
5 Spread the grease evenly on the brush (T1), using the
plastic bag (16).
! Wear latex gloves.
1 T1
6 Grease the boreholes (15) of the blow block (5), along

their entire length, using the brush (T1).
T1 12
• Start by greasing the interior of the
boreholes (15) using back-and-forth movements and
then rotation of the brush (T1).
• If necessary, re-apply grease on the brush (T1).
• Grease the top part of the boreholes (15) of the blow
block (5).
- The top part is not a sliding area and requires
little grease. 15 5
7 Grease the inside of the bushes (12), using the
brush (T1) coated with grease .
• If necessary, re-apply grease on the brush (T1).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
8 With a finger, grease the o-rings (17) and the guiding 1

bands (18) with grease (1).
Do not grease the ends of the piston .
A 18
? A
17
? 17
?
Fitting of greased parts

1 Assemble the bushes (12) and the pistons (13).
12 13
The bush (12) for
! degassing "EX" has 2 grooves (19). The other
bushes have 1 groove (19). Align the
grooves (19) of the different bushes (12) with
19
the marks (20) on the blow block (5).
2 Position the assemblies, bush (12) / piston (13), in the

boreholes (15) of the blow block (5).
13
20
22
12
15

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Screw the screw M5 (T2) into the piston (13).

T2
4 Push the piston (13) into place in the borehole (15) of
the blow block (5).
5 Lightly grease the sliding area on the bush (12), using 15 5
the tip of the brush (T1).
6 Lift the piston (13), using the screw M5 (T2), leaving a
space of 2 mm with respect to the bush (12).
7 Position the damping disc (11), complying with the
2 mm
groove (21) on the bush (12).
8 Repeat the operation for all the assemblies, 21
bush (12) / piston (13).
13
12 11

9 10
10 Tighten the bolts (9) to a torque of 20 Nm. 20 N.m 6mm
11 Fit the solenoid valves (7).

• Comply with the placement of each solenoid
valve (7), using the mark (22) on:
- The solenoid valve cable (23),
- The cover (10),
- The connection box (24).
☞ Check the presence and condition of the

seals (7a) and screws on the solenoid valves (7).
7a 7 10 22 24 23

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Fitting of blow block

• Check the condition of the o-rings of the blow
block (5).
• If necessary, replace the following parts.
• Lightly grease the o-rings .
• Tighten the bolts (3 ; 6) to a torque of 55 N.m.
X
3 5 X
6
55 N.m 55 N.m

stations, making sure that you: 25
system , before carrying out the work. 26
• Use a new brush (5) for each blow block .
It is possible to rotate the machine by
i connecting an external 7b supply (25) to the
pneumatic panel (26).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Adjusting the height of the unscrambler unit MP-B0106 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

! equipment fitted on the machine and always
follow current safety regulations.
! First adjust the neck rim guides of the

stabilization rail, see procedure "MP-B0116".
MACHINE STATUS
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
During production, the preforms must not be blocked

! between the unscramber blades (1) and the neck rim 1
guide (2).
! Only the fallen preforms or the correctly positioned

preforms must pass under the unscramber blades . Any
preforms positioned differently must be ejected by the
unscranbler.
The unscrambler height D corresponds to E
- D : unscrambler blades (1) tangent to the neck rim
guide (2)
Position E of the unscrambler blades (1) corresponds to
- E : unscrambler blade (1) closest to the end of the neck D
rim guide (2) 2
1 Loosen the nuts (3) but do not remove them.
2 Adjust the height and position of the
unscrambler (1) using the nuts (3), to obtain
dimensions D ; E.
! Maintain a 60° angle between the unscrambler

blade axis and the preform flow axis.
3 Tighten the nuts (3). 3
☞ Check the movement of a fallen preform under the

unscramber blades (1).
1
2
60°

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0106 Adjusting the height of the unscrambler unit 2
END OF OPERATION

clean, dry cloth.
☞ Check the unscrambler operation during

production.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Adjusting the body guides of the stabilization rail MP-B0107 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

! First adjust the unscrambler roller assembly, see

The adjustment dimensions in the procedure are
i theoretical values. The settings will be fine-
adjusted according to the characteristics of the
preforms and behaviour of the preforms in
production.
MACHINE STATUS
- Feeder cleared of preforms.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
Pre-adjustments
1 Check dimension X. Xa 1
Height X must comply with 2 requirements:
- Xa = 1 mm minimum, between the preform bearing
Xb
point on the rollers (1) and the top of the under-
neck guides (2).
- The top of the under-neck guides (2) must be
below Xb. Xb is the point of tangency between
diameter P7 of the neck-ring, of a fallen preform on
the rollers (1) and the diameter of the rollers (1).
2
P7
P11

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/4 MP-B0107 Adjusting the body guides of the stabilization rail 1
2 Check dimension Y.
Gap Y must comply with 2 requirements: 1
- Y = 0,5 mm between the rollers (1) and the under-

neck guides (2).
- Y = is less than thickness P11 of the neck-ring.
Y
2
1
X
Y
2
Adjusting dimension X
1 Loosen the button nut (3).
2 Unscrew the knurled check nut (4).
When adjusting dimension X, check that the
! under-neck guides (2) of the stabilization
rail are not in contact with the unscrambler
rollers (1).
☞ If necessary: adjust dimension Y.
3 Adjust the button screw (5) to raise or lower the

stabilization rail , in order to obtain dimension X.
4 Tighten the knurled check nut (4).
5
5 Tighten the button nut (3).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Adjusting the body guides of the stabilization rail MP-B0107 3/4
Adjusting dimension Y
1 Loosen and remove the screw (6).
2 Pivot the spacer (7), in order to obtain dimension Y.
3 Install and tighten the screw (6).
4 Proceed in the same way for the spacer (8).
6 7 8 8 7 6
Adjusting the body guides (9 ; 10) (dimension B) 9 ; 10
Gap B between the body guides (9 ; 10) corresponds to 9
- B = Ø body P9 + 3 mm 10
P9
! The adjustment must be the same on each side of the

body guides (9 ; 10), so that the axis of the body
guides remains in the same alignment as the axis of
the under-neck guides .
1 Position 1 preform between the under-neck guides .
B

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/4 MP-B0107 Adjusting the body guides of the stabilization rail 1
2 Loosen the star-shaped buttons (18) of the body

guides (9).
3 Adjust the body guides (9), in order to obtain
dimension B.
4 Tighten the star-shaped button (18).
5 Loosen the screws (19) on the body guide (10) of the
ejection gate.
6 Adjust the body guide (10), in order to obtain
dimension B.
9
18
10
19 19
END OF OPERATION
1 Remove the preforms.

2 Adjust the body guides of the infeed rail, see procedure
"MP-B0108".
clean, dry cloth.
The preforms must be routed and transferred
i fluidly and freely.
☞ Check the behavior of the preforms during

production.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Adjusting the body guides of the infeed rail MP-B0108 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

! - First adjust the body guides of the

stabilization rail, see procedure "MP-
B0107".
- Adjust the upper and lower parts of the
infeed rail at the same time.
MACHINE STATUS
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
Adjusting the body guides (1) (dimension B ; C)
Gap B between the body guides (1) corresponds to

- B = Ø preform body P9 +2 mm
1 P9
Height C of the body guides (1) corresponds to
- C = 3/4 C1
! Gap B and height C must be constant along the entire

length of the infeed rail.
C C1
1 Position some preforms between the under-neck
guides .
B

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0108 Adjusting the body guides of the infeed rail 2

guides (1).
3 Adjust the gap between the body guides (1) using the
knurled nuts (3), in order to obtain dimension B.
4 Adjust the height and tighten the star-shaped
buttons (2) on the body guides, in order to obtain
dimension C.
Adjusting the blocking thrust of overlong preforms (dimension E)
Height E of the blocking thrust (4) corresponds to

- E = 10 mm under the preform (minimum clearance to
permit passage of the preforms in the production)
1 Loosen the star-shaped button (5). 5

2 Adjust the height of the blocking thrust of the overlong
preforms (4) in order to obtain dimension E and tighten
the star-shaped button (5).
4
E
END OF OPERATION

If a reinforced elbow rail is installed: replace the
i personalisation body guides.
clean, dry cloth.

production.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Adjusting the neck guides of the stabilization rail MP-B0109 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION


production.
MACHINE STATUS
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
Pre-adjustments
1 Check dimension X. Xa 1
Xb
neck guides (2).
below Xb. Xb is the point of tangency between
2
P7
P11

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/4 MP-B0109 Adjusting the neck guides of the stabilization rail 1
Gap Y must comply with 2 requirements: 1

neck guides (2).
Y
2
1
X
Y
2
1 Loosen the button nut (3).
2 Unscrew the knurled check nut (4).
rollers (1).

4 Tighten the knurled check nut (4).
5

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Adjusting the neck guides of the stabilization rail MP-B0109 3/4
6 7 8 8 7 6
Adjusting the neck guides (11 ; 12) (dimension B) 11 ; 12

P7 11
Gap C between the neck guides (11 ; 12) corresponds to
- C = Ø body P7 + 2 mm 12

neck guides (11 ; 12), so that the axis of the neck
1 Position 1 preform(s) between the under-neck guides 2.
2 Loosen the screws (20) located along each neck

guide (11). 21 20
3 Adjust the neck guides (11), in order to obtain
dimension C.
5 Loosen the screws (21) on the neck guide (12) of the
ejection gate.
6 Adjust the neck guide (12), in order to obtain
dimension C.
12 21
20 11

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/4 MP-B0109 Adjusting the neck guides of the stabilization rail 1
END OF OPERATION

clean, dry cloth.

production.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Greasing the mold support unit pivot shafts and the mold opening / closing lever
1 MP-B0112 1/2
shafts
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never exceed the recommended amount of grease as this may cause permanent damage to the parts being
greased.
1 cm³ of "LUB A21" grease corresponds to 1 shot from the "ALGI" grease gun.
i
MACHINE STATUS

- Cold molds,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- "LUB A21" grease,
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
Mold support unit pivot shaft

1
3 Inject 6 cm³ of "LUB A21" grease into each
5 Remove the spent grease from the length of the
shaft using a clean, dry cloth.
6 Disinfect the elements in contact with the article, using a
sprayer and alcohol-based disinfectant.
7 Close and lock the mold support unit . LUB A21

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Greasing the mold support unit pivot shafts and the mold opening / closing lever
2/2 MP-B0112 1
shafts
Mold opening/closing lever shaft

1 Clean the greasing nipple (2; 3) using a clean, dry
cloth.
2 Inject 2 cm³ of "LUB A21" grease into each nipple (2;
3) using the grease gun "ALGI".
2
3 Clean the greasing nipple (2; 3) using a clean, dry
cloth.
4 Remove the spent grease from the length of the
shaft using a clean, dry cloth. 3
END OF OPERATION

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Adjusting the unscrambler rollers MP-B0113 1/5
GENERAL INFORMATION

production.
MACHINE STATUS
- Feeder cleared of preforms,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
Adjusting the unscrambler rollers (1) (dimension X)
Adjusting the unscrambler rollers (1) changes:

i - The adjustment of the body guide wires (2),
3
- The adjustment of the deflectors (3).

gap X between the rollers (1) corresponds to:
In the upstream zone: X = Ø preform neck rings P7 -1 to -2 mm

In the downstream area: X = Ø preform under-neck P1 +1 to 2 mm
1 If necessary, move the casing (4) located downstream

of the unscrambler rollers (1) to a maximum distance
using the screws (5).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/5 MP-B0113 Adjusting the unscrambler rollers 3
2 Position 10 preform(s) on the unscrambler rollers (1). P7

1
! The gap between the unscrambler
rollers (1) must be slightly increased in the P1
upstream zone.
3 Adjust the rollers (1) using the buttons (6), in order to
obtain dimension X.
4 Position the casing (4) as close as possible to the
unscrambler rollers (1) but do not bring them into
contact.
X

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Adjusting the body guide wires (2) (dimension Y ; Z)
- The body guide wires help to stabilise the preforms

i in the unscrambling rollers.
- The gap between the body guide wires can be P9
increased to a maximum distance when there are
preforms with a short under-neck length: Z1.
gap Y between the body guide wires (2) corresponds to:
- Y = Ø preform body P9 + 2 to 3 mm Z
Z1
height Z of the body guide wires (2) corresponds to:
- Z = 3/4 Z1
1 Position 10 preform(s) on the unscrambler rollers (1).
In the downstream zone of the unscrambler rollers (1): 2
1 Y
2 Remove the casings (7).
3 Loosen the nuts (8) but do not remove them, to slacken
the body guide wires (2).
1
2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/5 MP-B0113 Adjusting the unscrambler rollers 3
In the upstream zone of the unscrambler rollers (1):

2 Adjust the height of the body guide wires, in order to
obtain dimension Z.
5 Adjust the gap between the body guide wires, in order
to obtain dimension Y.
2
1 2
10
10
9
In the downstream zone of the unscrambler rollers (1):

2 Adjust the gap between the body guide wires, in order 1
to obtain dimension Y.
2
11
4 Adjust the position of the tensioner rings (12) using the

nuts (8), to tension the body guide wires (2).
5 Tighten the nuts (8).
6 Fit the casings (7). 2
8 12

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Adjusting the deflectors (3)
- In the upstream zone, the deflectors require no

i particular adjustment.
- In the downstream zone, the deflectors generally
are parallel to the unscrambler rollers or with a
slightly smaller gap to facilitate correct positioning 3
of the preforms.
- The gap between the deflectors must be greater
than the total length of a preform to prevent
preforms from getting blocked.
1 Adjust the gap between the deflectors (3) using the
button(s) (13).
13
Depending on the configuration of your machine, the

i buttons (6; 13) may be provided with a position
indicator (14). 15
2 Read and record the value in the display unit (15), when
the adjustments (1; 2 ; 3) have been completed. 14
11
6; 13
END OF OPERATION

2 Adjust the stabilization rail assembly , see procedure "MP-B0114".
3 Clean all the parts handled during the operation with a clean, dry cloth.
The preforms must be routed and transferred fluidly and freely.
i
☞ Check the behavior of the preforms during production.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Adjusting the stabilization rail MP-B0114 1/7
GENERAL INFORMATION


production.
MACHINE STATUS
- Elbow rail removed (if present), see procedure "CO-
B0012".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
Specific tool

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/7 MP-B0114 Adjusting the stabilization rail 3
PROCEDURE
Pre-adjustments
1 Check dimension X.
neck guides (2).
Xa 1
below Xb. Xb is the point of tangency between Xb
Gap Y must comply with 2 requirements:
neck guides (2). 2
P7
P11
Y
2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Loosen the button nut (3). 1
4 Unscrew the knurled check nut (4). X

rollers (1).

6 Tighten the knurled check nut (4). 2
Y
6 7 8 8 7 6

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Setting the under-neck guides (2) (dimension A
Adjusting the under-neck guides (2) changes

i - The adjustment of the body guides (9 ; 10),
- The adjustment of the neck guides (11 ; 12), 13
- The adjustment of the infeed neck rim guide.
The gap between the under-neck guides A corresponds
2
to:
If the machine is equipped with a straight rail
- A = Ø under neck P1 + 0,8 mm
If the machine is equipped with an elbow rail (14)
- A = gap between the elbow rail guides
1 Measure gap A of the new elbow rail (14).
11 ; 12 09
9 ;;10
10
2
P1
14

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
The gap between the under neck guides (2) may be

i slightly increased at the unscrambler rollers .
13
2
To increase the gap between the under-neck guides
2 . Loosen the knurled nuts (23 ; 15)

guides .
4 Turn the star-shaped button (17) clockwise and tighten 22 23
13 22
the knurled nuts (16), in order to obtain dimension A.
5 Tighten the knurled nuts (15).
6 Tighten the knurled nuts (22) until contact is felt.
15 16
17
To reduce the gap between the under-neck guides

8 Loosen the knurled nuts (22 ; 16).
9 Position some preforms between the under-neck guides .
10 Turn the star-shaped button (17) anti-clockwise and tighten the knurled nuts (15), in order to obtain
dimension A.
12 Tighten the knurled nuts (23) until contact is felt.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Adjusting the body guides (9 ; 10) (dimension B) 9 ; 10
Gap B between the body guides (9 ; 10) corresponds to 9

- B = Ø body P9 + 2 mm 10
P9
The adjustment must be the same on each side of the
i body guides (9 ; 10), so that the axis of the body
1 Position 1 preform between the under-neck guides .

guides (9).
3 Adjust the body guides (9), in order to obtain
dimension B.
5 Loosen the screws (19) on the body guide (10) of the
ejection gate.
6 Adjust the body guide (10), in order to obtain
dimension B.
9
18
10
19 19

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Adjusting the neck guides (11 ; 12) (dimension C) 11 ; 12

P7 11
Gap C between the neck guides (11 ; 12) corresponds to
- C = Ø neck-ring P7 + 3 mm 12

neck guides (11 ; 12), so that the axis of the neck
1 Position 1 preform(s) between the under-neck
guides (2).
C
2 Loosen the screws (20) located along each neck

guide (11). 21 20
3 Adjust the neck guides (11), in order to obtain
dimension C.
5 Loosen the screws (21) on the neck guide (12) of the
ejection gate.
6 Adjust the neck guide (12), in order to obtain
dimension C.
12 21
20 11
END OF OPERATION

2 Adjust the infeed rail assembly , see procedure "MP-
B0115".
3 Adjust the height of the infeed neck rim guide , see
clean, dry cloth.

production.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Adjusting the infeed rail MP-B0115 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

! - First adjust the stabilization

assembly, see procedure "MP-B0114".
rail
- Adjust the upper and lower parts of the

infeed rail at the same time.
MACHINE STATUS
- Elbow rail removed (if present), see procedure "CO-
B0012",
- Infeed block removed, see procedure "CO-B0006".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
1 Open the gates of the lower and upper protection

casings, if present, in order to do the adjustments.
Setting the under-neck guides (1) (dimension A)
Adjusting the under-neck guides (1) changes the

i adjustment of the body guides (2). P1
1
The gap between the under-neck guides A corresponds to:
- A = gap between the infeed block (3) guides.
1 Measure gap A of the new infeed block (3).

A
! Gap A should be constant along the entire

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/4 MP-B0115 Adjusting the infeed rail 2
2 Loosen the bolts (4).

3 Position some preforms between the under-neck X
1
guides (1).
4 Loosen the knurled nuts (5).
5 Adjust the gap between the under-neck guides (1) using
the knurled knobs (6), in order to obtain dimension A.
One turn of the knurled knob (6) corresponds
i to 1 mm.
X
4
6 5

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Adjusting the infeed rail MP-B0115 3/4
Adjusting the body guides (2) (dimension B ; C)

Gap B between the body guides (2) corresponds to:
- B = Ø preform body P9 + 2 mm.
Height C of the body guides (2) corresponds to: 1
2 P9
- C = 3/4 C1.
! Gap B and height C must be constant along the entire

C C1
guides .
guides (2). B
3 Adjust the gap between the body guides (2) using the
knurled nuts (8), in order to obtain dimension B.
4 Adjust the height and tighten the star-shaped
buttons (7) on the body guides, in order to obtain
dimension C.
Adjusting the blocking thrust of overlong preforms (dimension E)

Height E of the blocking thrust (9) corresponds to:
- E = 10 mm under the preform (minimum clearance to
permit passage of the preforms in the production)
1 Loosen the star-shaped button (10).
2 Adjust the height of the blocking thrust of the overlong 10
preforms (9) in order to obtain dimension E and tighten
the star-shaped button (10).
E 9

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/4 MP-B0115 Adjusting the infeed rail 2
END OF OPERATION

2 Install the new infeed block , see procedure "CO-
B0006".
3 Install the new elbow rail kit (if present), see procedure
"CO-B0012".
If a reinforced elbow rail is installed: replace the
i personalisation body guides.
4 Adjust the neck rim guides of the preform feeder, see
clean, dry cloth.
6 Close the upper and lower gates of the protection
casings.

production.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Adjusting the neck rim guides of the preform feeder MP-B0116 1/3
GENERAL INFORMATION

! First adjust the stabilization rail assembly, see

procedure "MP-B0114", and the infeed rail, see
MACHINE STATUS
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
production being carried out,
PROCEDURE
Adjusting the neck rim guides (1) of the infeed rail (dimension D)
! Height D of the neck rim guides (1) should be the same D

along the entire length.
1
Height D of the neck rim guides (1) corresponds to

- D = 3 to 5 mm then adjust to the preform

guides .
2 Loosen the star-shaped buttons (4) located along the
neck rim guides (1).
3 Adjust the height of the neck rim guides (1) using the
knurled buttons (5), in order to obtain dimension D.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0116 Adjusting the neck rim guides of the preform feeder 1
Adjusting the neck guides (2 ; 3) of the stabilization rail (dimension E ; F)
Height E of the outfeed neck rim guide (2) corresponds to 2 3

- E = 3 to 5 mm then adjust to the preform
Height F of the infeed neck rim guide (3) corresponds to
- F = minimum clearance to let the fallen preforms reach F
the gate and permit the fallen preforms to be straightened
up

outfeed neck rim guide (2).
E
2 If necessary, loosen the star-shaped buttons (7) located
along the infeed neck rim guide (3).
3 Adjust the longitudinal position of the outfeed neck rim
guide (2) until it is in contact with the neck rim guide of
X
6 X
7
the elbow rail kit (1).
4 Position a preform under the outfeed neck rim
guide (2).
5 Adjust the height of the outfeed neck rim
guides (2) using the knurled nuts (8), in order to obtain
dimension E. 23
2 22
3
The preform moves freely under the neck rim
guide (2).
6 Tighten the star-shaped button (6). 6 7
infeed neck rim guide (3).
8 Position a fallen preform under the infeed neck rim 8
guide (3). 9
9 Adjust the height of the infeed neck rim guide (3) using
the knurled nuts (9), in order to obtain dimension F.
The fallen preform moves freely under the neck rim
1 2 3
guide (3).
10 Adjust the longitudianl position of the infeed neck rim
guide (3) until it is in contact with the outfeed neck rim 2
guide (2).
12 Position a fallen preform under the infeed neck rim
guide (3).
13 Manually move the fallen preform forward to the outfeed
neck rim guide (2).
☞ Check that the fallen preform is stopped by the

outfeed neck rim guide (2).
3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Adjusting the neck rim guides of the preform feeder MP-B0116 3/3
END OF OPERATION
1 Adjust the unscrambler, see procedure "MP-B0106".

clean, dry cloth.

production.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Checking the hinge points of the mold support units MP-B0118 1/1
MACHINE STATUS

- Cold molds,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
- Caliper (1).
PROCEDURE
1 Unlock and open the mold support unit .

2 Remove the mold base , see procedure "MP-B0100".
3 Check dimension Z using a caliper (1).
☞ Z = 7 (+0,3 / -0,5 mm)
4 If Z is out of tolerance, contact SIDEL.

Z
5 Fit the mold base, see procedure "MP-B0100".
6 Close and lock the mold support unit .

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Checking the height of the shell supports MP-B0119 1/2
MACHINE STATUS

- Mold and mold base removed, see procedure "MP-B0100",
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
- Plastic mallet (1),
PROCEDURE
1 Checking the hinge points of the mold support units, see

2 Unlock and open the mold support unit . 5
1
3 Use a plastic mallet (1) to seat the shell supports (4;
5) in their bottom position.
4
4 Close the mold support unit .
The mold support unit must be closed and unlocked.
a stable surface.
6 Place the comparator (2) sensor on the right shell

support (4). 2 3
8 Lift the comparator (2) pin and move the blowing station
forward using the JOG until it reaches the left shell 2
support (5).
9 Position the comparator (2) sensor on the left shell
support (5).
5

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0119 Checking the height of the shell supports 3
10 Check that the position of the comparator pointer is

between:
• X = 0 (0/-0,1 mm) 5 4
11 If X is out of tolerance, replace the forward and rear
slides on the mold support uni, see procedure "MP-
B0024".
12 Close and lock the mold support unit .
X
X
END OF OPERATION

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Checking the mold base guide rails MP-B0120 1/1
MACHINE STATUS

- Mold and mold base removed, see procedure "MP-B0100".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
PROCEDURE

2 Unlock and open the mold support unit .
a stable surface.
4 Position the comparator (2) sensor on the mold-base
support (3). 3 2
6 Pull the mold-base support (3) manually.

7 Check that the gap read on the comparator (2) is less
than 0.2 mm.
If not, contact SIDEL.
8 Close and lock the mold support unit . 3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Setting the preform detection system at the machine infeed MP-B0136 1/3
MACHINE STATUS
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
1 Using the crank, position the hole corresponding

to "POINT 0" of the wheel below the housing (2).
The wheel has a second hole corresponding
! to "POINT 0" of the robot. Do not put the pin 2
1
gauge in this hole.
POINT 0
2 Remove the pin gauge (1) and put it in the housing (2).
The pin gauge blocks the wheel in the "POINT 1
0" position.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0136 Setting the preform detection system at the machine infeed 3
Position hands so that fingers are not crushed when 4

! resetting as dragging along of the hand could occur, see
3 Pivot the retractable guide (3) manually.
4 Turn the infeed plate firmly by a quarter of a turn in the
counterclockwise direction.
5 Install several preforms on the infeed plate (4) at the

retractable guide (3). 4
6 Turn the plate (4) in the counterclockwise direction so

as to:
- Position the preforms in the detector (5) zone,
- Reset the torque limiter.
5
3
7 Loosen the nuts (6).

8 Adjust sensitivity of detector (5) to "7".
5
9 Check sensitivity of detector (5) by moving it in front of
the preforms.
The LED (8) should come on when passing in front of a
preform and go off when no longer in front of a
preform.
☞ If the LED (8) stays on: reduce the sensitivity.

8 6
☞ If the LED (8) stays off: increase the sensitivity.
7
10 Centre the detector (5) between 2 preforms. 5

11 Tighten the nuts (6).
12 Clear all of the preforms.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Setting the preform detection system at the machine infeed MP-B0136 3/3
13 Return the pin gauge (1) to its initial housing.
END OF OPERATION
1 Start the production of a few preforms, see procedure

"OP-B0003" or "OP-X0010".
2 Check aurally that the preforms started in production
have been blown.
☞ If blowing is correct as from the first preform, the

detector (5) is correctly adjusted.
☞ If the first blowing operation is done with no

preform in the mold (abnormal noise heard at first
blowing operation), readjust the detector (5) by 5
moving it to the left.
☞ If the last blowing operation is done with no preform

in the mold (abnormal noise heard at last blowing
5
operation), readjust the detector (5) by moving it to
the right.
Centre the detector (5) between 2 preforms
! whenever the detector is readjusted.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Checking the mold base safety pin MP-B0137 1/1
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
- Tool (T1) (01168375701 code).
T1
PROCEDURE
1 Install the tool (T1) in the safety pin (1) groove.

1
T1
2 Make sure that the tool slides in the safety pin groove.
☞ If the tool does not slide in the safety pin groove,

replace the safety pin, see procedure "MP-B0033".
1
T1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing a mold base support up/down roller MP-B0146 1/3
MACHINE STATUS
- The machine is stopped

- Cold molds
- JOG connected to the work zone
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Roller (1)
Consumables
Specific tool
- Socket 19 mm,
- Socket 13 mm, 7
- Soft jaw vice,
- Torque wrench.
PROCEDURE
Removing

1 2
19mm 243

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0146 Replacing a mold base support up/down roller 2
! Use the flats (3) of the safety pin (2) to block it;
otherwise, the pin (A) may be damaged. 2
A 3
3 Block the safety pin (2) at the flats (3) in a vise with non-
marring jaws (4).
6 5
243 13mm
5 Remove the roller (7). 7
4 4
2
7 5
Replacing
1 Install the new roller (7).
2 Apply normal "LOCTITE 243" threadlock on the bolt (5). 7
3 Install the washer (6) and torque the screw (5) to 24
Nm.
6
4 Make sure that the roller (7) rolls freely.
5
243
24 N.m 13mm
5

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Replacing a mold base support up/down roller MP-B0146 3/3
6 Refit the safety pin (2) by positioning the flat (8) of the
pin against the boss of the mold base support (9).
7 Apply normal "LOCTITE 243" threadlock on the bolt (1).
8 Tighten the bolt (1) while holding the safety pin (2) by 8 9
the flat part (8).
9 Inspect the safety pin, see procedure "MP-B0137".
1 2
19mm 243

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Degreasing / cleaning the spindle rollers, the rails and the turnover ramps MP-B0152 1/3
MACHINE STATUS
- Oven cold,
- JOG connected to the work zone, see procedure
"OP-B0008",
- If the option is present: cabins UV in raised
position, see procedure "OP-B0032".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- "LUB A13" grease,
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
1 Clean and wipe off the rails (1) and guide wheels (2) using a clean, dry cloth and "NET A04" cleaning agent.
2 2
2 2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0152 Degreasing / cleaning the spindle rollers, the rails and the turnover ramps 2
2 Clean and wipe off the rails (3) and rollers (4) using a
clean, dry cloth and "NET A04" cleaning agent.
3 Clean and wipe off the inside of the turnover ramps (5 ;

6) using a clean, dry cloth and "NET A04" cleaning
agent.
4 Move the spindle chain forward using the JOG to get
access to the rollers (4) and remove the used grease 3
from the turnover cams (5 ; 6).
5 Repeat the above steps until the following components
been completely degreased / cleaned:
- Rail (1 ; 3)
- Guide wheel (2) 4
- Roller (4)
5 6
- Turnover ramp (5 ; 6)

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Degreasing / cleaning the spindle rollers, the rails and the turnover ramps MP-B0152 3/3
6 Grease the guide wheel (2) using a brush and "LUB

A13" grease.
2 2
7 Grease the rollers (4) using a brush and "LUB

A13" grease.
8 Move the spindle chain forward using the JOG to get
access to the other rollers (4).
9 Repeat the above steps until the following components
have been completely greased: 4
- Guide wheel (2)
- Roller (4)
Never restart the machine without prior lubrication.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Adjustment of bottle / mold transfer synchronization MP-B0153 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use the procedure, particularly in the following cases:
- During the first start-up of the machine.
- In case of misalignment between the transfer
grippers and the moulds.
- During any intervention on the transmission (belts,
pulleys, bearings, etc.) 1 cm = 78 px
2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px
Non-symmetrical spacing of transfer grips, marks

i
4 cm = 312 px
5 cm = 390 px
6 cm = 468 px
around the preform neck or transfer problems

7 cm = 546 px
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
are the result of a synchronization fault.

10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px
12 cm = 936 px
13 cm = 1014 px
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px
MACHINE STATUS
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px

R:0
V : 170

B : 214
A : 255
243 80 N.m L
R : 83
V : 170
B : 49
xxx
A : 255
R : 235
MATERIALS REQUIRED
V : 110
B : 18
A : 255
Specific tool
- Dummy grip tool (T1),
R : 226
V : 25
B : 44
T1
A : 255
- Dummy grip ring (T2), T2

- Torque wrench 10 - 50 N.m.
T3
PREREQUISITES
This procedure must be carried out with the moulds at

i process temperature when this is higher than 60°C.
Provide adequate protective equipment (gloves, long-
sleeved jacket, etc.).
1 Do the following operations before you start the
procedure:
• Check the belt tensions, see procedure "MP-
B0012".
• Check that no torque limiter has been tripped.
• Check the centering of the nozzle cylinders, see

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/4 MP-B0153 Adjustment of bottle / mold transfer synchronization 2
PROCEDURE
1 Make the reference transfer arm (1) accessible, using

manual rotation. T1
T2
The reference arm, item side, has the lowest
i number.
2 Remove the transfer grips from the reference
arm (1), see procedure "CO-B0003".
3 In the presence of controlled grips:
• Remove the roller (2).
4 Position the ring (T2) on the dummy grip tool (T1).
5 Install the dummy grip tool (T1).
1
T1;T2
6 Remove the stretching rod (3) from the blow station N°1
(U1), see procedure "CO-B0002".
7 Remove the nozzle nose (4) from the blow station N°1 3
1 cm = 78 px
U1
2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px
4 cm = 312 px
5 cm = 390 px
6 cm = 468 px
7 cm = 546 px
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px
12 cm = 936 px
13 cm = 1014 px
4
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px
8 Advance the blow station (U1) until the synchronization

point with the transfer arm (1), using JOG.
R:0
1 V : 170
B : 214
A : 255
243 80 N.m LU
The speed roller (5) of the reference transfer
arm (1) must be positioned on the "DEBUT" mark of 1 cm = 78 px
xxx 5
R : 83
2 cm = 156 px
the transfer cam (6).

V : 170
3 cm = 234 px B : 49
A : 255
4 cm = 312 px
5 cm = 390 px
6 cm = 468 px
7 cm = 546 px
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px R : 235
V : 110
11 cm = 858 px B : 18
12 cm = 936 px A : 255
13 cm = 1014 px
14 cm = 1092 px
6
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px R : 226
V : 25
B : 44
A : 255
R:0
V : 170
B : 214
A : 255
243 80 N.m LU
R : 83
V : 170
B : 49
xxx
A : 255
R : 235
V : 110
B : 18
A : 255

R : 226
V : 25
SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Adjustment of bottle / mold transfer synchronization MP-B0153 3/4

4
8
10
The arm support plate (10) has an angle of freedom.
1 cm = 78 px
2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px
4 cm = 312 px
5 cm = 390 px
6 cm = 468 px
7 cm = 546 px
9
4
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
7
11 cm = 858 px
12 cm = 936 px
13 cm = 1014 px
7
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px
Tighten either screw (9) to turn the arm support 6

i plate (10) a few degrees in either direction.
R:0
V : 170
B : 214
A : 255
243
T3
80 N.m
12 Install the dummy stretching rod (T3) using the R : 83

xxx
nozzle and the guiding ring (T2).
V : 170
B : 49
A : 255
13 Adjust the position of the arm support plate (10), using

11 T2
the screws (9) of the synchronization device. R : 235
V : 110
B : 18
The dummy stretching rod (T3) must slide without

A : 255
constraint in the guiding ring (T2).

R : 226
V : 25
The position roller (11) must be in contact with 1 B : 44

T1
!
A : 255

The speed roller (5) must always be aligned
! with the mark "DEBUT". If this is not the
case, turn the wheel, using JOG or manual
rotation, to align the roller and the marker and
repeat the adjustment.
- If a bolt (9) is at the end of stroke or the bolts (7) are at the
bottom of the hole:
• Uncouple the arm support plate (10), using the 10
screws (12). 12
• Adjust the position of the arm support plate (10), so as 37 N.m
to center the screws (7) in the lights.

1 cm = 78 px
1 2
Do not start tightening with the screws on either side
2 cm = 156 px
! of the slot (13).

3 cm = 234 px
4 cm = 312 px
5 cm = 390 px
6 cm = 468 px 1
3 5
1
2 3
7 cm = 546 px
8 cm = 624 px
7 4
• Tighten crosswise and moderately the screws (12). 9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
8 8
11 cm = 858 px 2 5
• Tighten the screws (12) clockwise to the torque of 37 13
12 cm = 936 px
13 cm = 1014 px
14 cm = 1092 px
6 4 7 6
N.m.
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px
- Repeat several times until all screwsare finally

tightened. R:0
• Resume the synchronization setting.

V : 170
B : 214
A : 255
243 80 N.m
R : 83
V : 170
B : 49
xxx
A : 255
R : 235
V : 110
B : 18
A : 255
R : 226
V : 25
B : 44
A : 255

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/4 MP-B0153 Adjustment of bottle / mold transfer synchronization 2

8
10
1 cm = 78 px
2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px
4 cm = 312 px
5 cm = 390 px
6 cm = 468 px
7 cm = 546 px 7 4
9
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px
12 cm = 936 px
13 cm = 1014 px
7
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
12
18 cm = 1404 px
17 Remove the dummy stretching rod (T3).

R:0
V : 170
B : 214
A : 255
1 243 80 N.m LU
manual rotation.
19 Remove the dummy grip tool (T1) and the guiding R : 83
V : 170 xxx
ring (T2).
B : 49
A : 255
1
R : 235
2
V : 110
B : 18
A : 255
R : 226
V : 25
B : 44
A : 255
T1;T2

• Install roller (2).
21 Install the pair of transfer grips, see procedure "CO-B0003".
22 Fit the nozzle tip (4), see procedure "CO-B0008".
23 Fit the stretching rod (3), see procedure "CO-B0002".
! If the arm support plate (10) has been uncoupled during the procedure:
• Check the height of the transfer arms between them, see procedure "MP-B0161".
- if the result is not correct:
• Resume assembly of the arm support plate on the transfer bearing.
END OF OPERATION
1 Install 3 preforms, whose bodies are cut, in the transfer

clamps, upstream of the meeting point.
Extreme caution and perfect coordination between
operations.
2 Advance the transfer arms , using manual rotation.
3 Check the correct synchronism between the transfer
arms and the moulds.
4 Evacuate the preforms.
The setting can be optimized later on. At normal
i production speed, the slacks and inertia of the parts can
vary the settings.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Adjustment of the synchronism of the transfer preforms / mould MP-B0154 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
- In case of misalignment between the transfer
grippers and the moulds.
- In the event of repeated defects in the loading of the
moulds. 1 cm = 78 px

2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px
4 cm = 312 px
pulleys, bearings, etc.)

5 cm = 390 px
6 cm = 468 px
7 cm = 546 px
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px

i
10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px
12 cm = 936 px

13 cm = 1014 px
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px

16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px
MACHINE STATUS
R:0
V : 170

B : 214
A : 255
243 80 N.m L
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT R : 83

V : 170
B : 49
xxx
A : 255
R : 235
V : 110
B : 18
A : 255
MATERIALS REQUIRED R : 226

V : 25 T1
B : 44
Specific tool
A : 255
T2
- Dummy grip ring (T2),
- Torque wrench 10 - 50 N.m. T3
PREREQUISITES
This procedure must be carried out with the moulds at

i process temperature when this is higher than 60°C.
Provide adequate protective equipment (gloves, long-
sleeved jacket, etc.).
procedure:
B0012".
• Check the centering of the nozzle cylinders, see

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/4 MP-B0154 Adjustment of the synchronism of the transfer preforms / mould 2
PROCEDURE

manual rotation. T1
2 Remove the transfer grips from the reference T2
• Remove the roller (2).
4 Position the ring (T2) on the dummy grip tool (T1).

1
T1;T2
6 Remove the stretching rod (3) from the blow station N°1
7 Remove the nozzle nose (4) from the blow station N°1 3
1 cm = 78 px
U1
2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px
4 cm = 312 px
5 cm = 390 px
6 cm = 468 px
7 cm = 546 px
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px
12 cm = 936 px
13 cm = 1014 px
4
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px
8 Advance the blow station (U1) until the synchronization

point with the transfer arm, using JOG.
R:0
V : 170
B : 214
The speed roller (5) of the reference transfer 5 A : 255

243 80 N.m LU
arm (1) must be positioned on the "FIN" mark of the

1 cm = 78 px
1
2 cm = 156 px
R : 83
xxx
transfer cam (6).
V : 170
3 cm = 234 px B : 49
A : 255
4 cm = 312 px
5 cm = 390 px
FIN
6 cm = 468 px
7 cm = 546 px
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px
R : 235
V : 110
B : 18
6
12 cm = 936 px A : 255
13 cm = 1014 px
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px R : 226
V : 25
B : 44
A : 255
R:0
V : 170
B : 214
A : 255
243 80 N.m LU
R : 83
V : 170
B : 49
xxx
A : 255
R : 235
V : 110
B : 18
A : 255

R : 226
V : 25
SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Adjustment of the synchronism of the transfer preforms / mould MP-B0154 3/4

4
8
10
The arm support plate (10) has an angle of freedom.
1 cm = 78 px
2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px
4 cm = 312 px
5 cm = 390 px
6 cm = 468 px
7 cm = 546 px
9
4
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
7
11 cm = 858 px
12 cm = 936 px
13 cm = 1014 px
7
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px
Tighten either screw (9) to turn the arm support 6

i plate (10) a few degrees in either direction.
R:0
V : 170
B : 214
A : 255
243
T3
80 N.m
12 Install the dummy stretching rod (T3) using the R : 83

xxx
nozzle and the guiding ring (T2).
V : 170
B : 49
A : 255
13 Adjust the position of the arm support plate (10), using

11 T2
the screws (9) of the synchronization device. R : 235
V : 110
B : 18
The dummy stretching rod (T3) must slide without

A : 255
constraint in the guiding ring (T2).

R : 226
V : 25
The position roller (11) must be in contact with 1 B : 44

T1
!
A : 255

The speed roller (5) must always be aligned
! with the mark "FIN". If this is not the case, turn
the wheel, using JOG or manual rotation, to
align the roller and the marker and repeat the
adjustment.
- If a bolt (9) is at the end of stroke or the bolts (7) are at the
bottom of the hole:
• Uncouple the arm support plate (10), using the 10
screws (12). 12
• Adjust the position of the arm support plate (10), so as 37 N.m
to center the screws (7) in the lights.

1 cm = 78 px
1 2
Do not start tightening with the screws on either side
2 cm = 156 px
! of the slot (13).

3 cm = 234 px
4 cm = 312 px
5 cm = 390 px
6 cm = 468 px 1
3 5
1
2 3
7 cm = 546 px
8 cm = 624 px
7 4
• Tighten crosswise and moderately the screws (12). 9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
8 8
11 cm = 858 px 2 5
• Tighten the screws (12) clockwise to the torque of 37 13
12 cm = 936 px
13 cm = 1014 px
14 cm = 1092 px
6 4 7 6
N.m.
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px
- Repeat several times until all screwsare finally

tightened. R:0

V : 170
B : 214
A : 255
243 80 N.m
R : 83
V : 170
B : 49
xxx
A : 255
R : 235
V : 110
B : 18
A : 255
R : 226
V : 25
B : 44
A : 255

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/4 MP-B0154 Adjustment of the synchronism of the transfer preforms / mould 2

8
10
1 cm = 78 px
2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px
4 cm = 312 px
5 cm = 390 px
6 cm = 468 px
7 cm = 546 px 7 4
9
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px
12 cm = 936 px
13 cm = 1014 px
7
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
12
18 cm = 1404 px
17 Remove the dummy stretching rod (T3). R:0

V : 170
In some cases, be aware of the risk of interference

i
B : 214
A : 255
1 243 80 N.m LU
between the tooling (T2) and the turntable
ejectors when rotating the arm support plate (10). xxx
R : 83
V : 170
B : 49
A : 255
18 Make the reference transfer arm (1) accessible, using 1

manual rotation. R : 235
2
V : 110
B : 18
19 Remove the dummy grip tool (T1) and the guiding

A : 255
ring (T2).
R : 226
V : 25
B : 44
A : 255
T1;T2

22 Fit the nozzle tip (4), see procedure "CO-B0008".
23 Fit the stretching rod (3), see procedure "CO-B0002".
! If the arm support plate (10) has been uncoupled during the procedure:
• Check the height of the transfer arms between them, see procedure "MP-B0161".
- if the result is not correct:
• Resume assembly of the arm support plate on the transfer bearing.
END OF OPERATION
1 Install 3 preforms, whose bodies are cut, in the transfer

clamps, upstream of the meeting point.
Extreme caution and perfect coordination between
operations.
2 Advance the transfer arms , using manual rotation.
3 Check the correct synchronism between the transfer
arms and the moulds.
4 Evacuate the preforms.
The setting can be optimized later on. At normal
i production speed, the slacks and inertia of the parts can
vary the settings.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Reconditioning the spindle tips MP-B0155 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION 1
i - This procedure must be carried out on the

workbench.
- Remove the spindle tip , see procedure "CO-
B0009".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- O-ring (1).
Consumables
PROCEDURE
4
3
2 2
1 Install the spindle tip (2) in a vice with soft jaws.

Tighten the jaws moderately to prevent damage to the spindle tip (2).
!
3 Remove the assembly (4): (centering piece , o-ring , "3-sector" ring).
4 Replace and position the O-ring (1) correctly.
4
1
1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0155 Reconditioning the spindle tips 2
5 Clean all the parts handled during the operation using

cleaning agent "NET A03" and a clean, dry cloth. 3
6 Install the assembly (4): (centering piece , o-ring , "3- 4
sector" ring).
7 Apply a light threadlock on the bolt (3), install and
tighten the screw (3).
8 Check the assembly (4) for correct position and

elasticity: (centering piece , o-ring , "3-sector" ring).

X;Y
SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
X X
X;Y;Z
3 Checking the height of the transfer arms MP-B0161 1/3
GENERAL INFORMATION
! This procedure must be carried out with the

molds at process temperature xxx
where this is
greater than 60°C.
MACHINE STATUS
- The machine is stopped, T1 T2
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
- Adjusting bar (T2),
- Comparator and magnetic support.
PROCEDURE
Checking the height of the reference transfer arm

1 Remove the mold and mold base N°1, see procedure
"MP-B0100".
1
2 Make the reference transfer arm (1) accessible,
using JOG.
The reference arm, preform side, has the
i number N°1. 1 cm = 78 px
2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px
4 cm = 312 px
The reference arm, item side, has the lowest

5 cm = 390 px
6 cm = 468 px
7 cm = 546 px
number.
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px

12 cm = 936 px
13 cm = 1014 px
14 cm = 1092 px

15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
T1
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px

5 Advance the reference transfer arm (1) until the meeting
point with blow station N°1 (U1).
R:0
V : 170
B : 214
A : 255
243 80 N.m
- For the preform transfer arm: U1
R : 83
xxx
V : 170
B : 49
A : 255
arm (1) must be positioned on the "FIN" mark of the 3

transfer cam (3). R : 235
V : 110
- For the item transfer arm:

B : 18
A : 255
1 cm = 78 px
The speed roller (2) of the reference transfer 2

2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px
4 cm = 312 px R : 226
arm (1) must be positioned on the "DEBUT" mark of

5 cm = 390 px V : 25
B : 44
6 cm = 468 px A : 255
7 cm = 546 px

8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px
12 cm = 936 px
1
13 cm = 1014 px
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
4
18 cm = 1404 px

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0161 Checking the height of the transfer arms 3
6 Position the adjusting bar (T2) on the shell supports of

the mold support unit. 1
7 Check the dimension X between the dummy grip
tool (T1) and the adjusting bar (T2), using a set of
thickness gauges. T1
Preform transfer arm Item transfer arm
X = 1 +/- 0.05 mm X = 0.7 +/- 0.05 mm
- If the dimension X is correct:

• Remove the adjusting bar (T2).
• Remove the dummy grip tool (T1).
X
• Install the pair of transfer grips, see procedure
T2
"CO-B0003".
- If the dimension X is not correct:
• Adjust the height of the transfer arm (1) to obtain
the dimension X (see the following procedure).
8 Repeat the procedure for the second reference arm.
Checking the height of the other transfer arms

1 Position the reference preform transfer arm (1) in the
5 1
work zone, using JOG. =0
2 Install the comparator and its magnetic support under

the reference transfer arm (1).
3 Position the feeler of the comparator under the grip.
4 Set the dial of the dial gauge to "0".
5 Lower the rod of the comparator and, using, position the
Y
transfer arm to be testedabove the comparator.
6 Position the feeler of the comparator under the grip.
7 Check the dimension Y = 0 +/- 0.05 mm with respect to
the reference transfer arm (1).
- If the dimension Y is correct:
• Check the height of the following preform
transfer arms (5).
- If the dimension Y is not correct:
• Adjust the height of the transfer arm (5) to obtain
the dimension Y (see the following procedure).
8 Remove the comparator and its magnetic support.
9 Repeat the procedure for all of the item transfer
arms (5).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Checking the height of the transfer arms MP-B0161 3/3
Adjusting the height of a transfer arm

1 Loosen, but do not remove, the lock-nut (6).
2 - For the reference transfer arms (1):
• Screw in or unscrew the pin (7) to obtain the 6
dimension X.
- For the other transfer arms (5):
• Screw in or unscrew the pin (7) to obtain the
dimension Y.
4 Check the position of the rollers (2) on their cam

races (3).
- If the position is not correct:
• Adjust the position of the rollers (2), see
procedure "MP-B0165". 3
3 2
END OF OPERATION
1 Install the mold and mold base N°1, see procedure "MP-B0100".
2 Disconnect the JOG.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Adjusting the height of the transfer arm rollers MP-B0165 1/5
GENERAL INFORMATION
! The height of the transfer arm rollers must be adjusted before adjusting the rollers , see procedure "MP-
B0161".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Peel shims (1).
Consumables
PROCEDURE
Transfer arm rollers

1 Measure the dimension E between the top face of the
roller (2) and the cam (3), to determine the thickness of
the peel shims (1) .
E must be equal to 0. 4
3
1
E=0
3 2
2 Remove the transfer arms (4), see procedure "MP-

5
B0051". 4
3 Hold the shaft (5) using the appropriate wrench. 6
4 Remove the nut (6).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/5 MP-B0165 Adjusting the height of the transfer arm rollers 3

7
6 Adjust the number of peel shims (1) to get the correct

adjustment.
1
7 Install the pin(5)/rollers (2)/ peel shims (1) assembly on

5
the transfer arm (4). 4
8 Tighten the nut (6). 6

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
9 Install the transfer arm (4) in its original location, see

10 Check the position of the rollers (2) on their cam
races (3).
• If necessary, commence adjustment again. 3
3 2
Arm head roller

1 Check the centred position of the roller (8) on the cam
race (9).
- If the position is correct:
• The procedure is now complete.
- If the position is not correct: 9 4
• Measure the positioning fault of the roller (8) to
determine the thickness of the peel shims (1) to
be fitted. 1
=
2 Remove the transfer arms (4), see procedure "MP-
B0051".
8
=

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/5 MP-B0165 Adjusting the height of the transfer arm rollers 3

i threadlock "LOCTITE 243". You may have difficulty 4
loosening the pin.
10
4 Adjust the number of peel shims (1) to get the correct

adjustment.
1
5 Clean the shaft (10) using a clean dry cloth.

shaft (10).
8 10
7 Install the pin(10)/roller (8)/ peel shims (1) assembly on
the transfer arm (4).
8 Tighten the pin (10). 243

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
9 Install the transfer arm (4) in its original location, see

10 Check the centred position of the roller (8) on the cam
race (9).
• If necessary, commence adjustment again. 9 4
1
=
8
=

The grip opening roller (11) is not adjustable. Make sure
that the rollers (8 ; 11) are in contact with the cam 8
races throughout their height.
11

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the quartz bars MP-B0176 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

The quartz bars can be replaced directly on the
i machine or at the workbench, by removing the
oven module, see procedure "MP-B0054".
Never install an infrared oven module (A) in
contact with its lamps .
MACHINE STATUS
1
- Oven fan stopped,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Quartz bars (1).
PROCEDURE
Removing
3;4 A 3;4

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0176 Replacing the quartz bars 3
2 Pull the tab (5).

The lower part of the cover (2) releases. 2

4 Repeat the operation for removal of the second
protection (2) of the oven module (A).
5 Remove the quartz bar (1) by making it slide out of its

supports (6).
6 1
Replacing
! Handle the quartz bars carefully by their ends.
1 Install a new quartz bar (1) by making it slide into its

supports (6).
2 Fit the protections (2).
3;4 A 2 3;4
3 Fit the screws and washers (3 ; 4) and tighten.
4 Repeat the operation for all quartz bars (1).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Checking spindle pins MP-B0177 1/1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Pronounced wear of the spindle pins can lead to

i incorrect heating of the preforms.
MACHINE STATUS
- Oven cold,
- JOG connected to the work zone or otherwise,
manual rotation.
PROCEDURE
1 Check that the spindle pin (1) correctly moves in

translation.
• Pull on the pin pinion (1).
• Release the pin pinion (1). 1
☞ The spindle pin (1) must return to its initial position.
2 Check that the spindle pin (1) correctly rotates.
☞ No distortion or sticking point.

If this is not the case, recondition or replace the
spindles.
3 Check the condition of the pin pinion (1).
☞ No broken tooth or pronounced wear.

If this is not the case, recondition or replace the
spindles.
4 Move the spindle chain forward using the JOG or
otherwise, manual rotation in order to obtain access to
the next spindle.
5 Repeat the operation on all the spindle pins (1).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Cleaning / checking the magnet ways MP-B0180 1/3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment fitted on the machine and always follow current safety
! regulations.
Due to the strong magnetic attraction, special care must be taken when in the direct vicinity of the magnetic
! paths (at less than 100 mm). While the magnetic forces are invisible, their effects are generally underestimated
within their immediate vicinity. The magnetic attraction forces can start suddenly and can increase up to
several thousand newtons near (iron or steel) ferromagnetic objects of an average size.
This pictogram, present on all stretching consoles, informs users about the potential hazards related to the
magnetic fields generated by the electrical stretching slides.
Users of active implants (pacemaker, hearing aid, et cetera) or any other ferromagnetic implant
(prosthesis, et cetera) are not qualified for working with these types of devices and must not approach
them.
Keep at a minimum safety distance with respect to the equipment.
Electronic equipment and measuring equipment may be affected or destroyed by the high magnetic flux
density.
Avoid putting devices with magnetic parts near computers, monitors and all magnetic data mediums (disks,
credit cards, audio and video cassettes, et cetera).
Use non-magnetic tools for working on or near these types of device.
MACHINE STATUS
- JOG in service.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
Specific tool
- Non-magnetic tools.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0180 Cleaning / checking the magnet ways 2
PROCEDURE
Cleaning
1 Position the blow station in question in the work area, A

using JOG.
2 Clean the accessible magnet ways using a clean, dry
cloth (A).
! Always move the cloth in the same direction, do

not make back-and-forth movements.
B0042".
4 Hold the slide (1) and release the stretching rod (2).
• Pull the indexing pin (3).
• Turn the stretching rod (2) a quarter turn.
5 Lower the slide (1) manually as far as it will go and X
1
remove the stretching rod (2).
cloth (B).
3
not make back-and-forth movements.
7 Fit the stretching rod (2). X
2
• Position the stretching rod (2) in the box (4).
• Manually lift the slide (1).
• Manually turn the stretching rod (2) until the indexing
pin (3) clicks in.
8 Close the door .
concerned, see procedure "OP-B0042". B 1
2
4

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Cleaning / checking the magnet ways MP-B0180 3/3
Removal of a foreign object

1 Position the relevant treatment station in the work area
using the JOG. 1 2 1
3
2 Move the foreign object (1) towards the edge of the
magnet way using a non-magnetic tool (2).
3 Remove the foreign object (1) using non-magnetic
pliers (3).
cloth (C).

not make back-and-forth movements. C D
☞ Check the surface condition of the magnet

ways (D).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Adjusting the synchronization of the oven wheel / preform transfer MP-B0185 1/5
GENERAL INFORMATION
- In case of poor alignment between transfer grips and
spindles.
pulleys, bearings, etc.) 1 cm = 78 px
2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px

i
4 cm = 312 px
5 cm = 390 px
6 cm = 468 px

7 cm = 546 px
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px

10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px
12 cm = 936 px
13 cm = 1014 px
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px
MACHINE STATUS
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px

R:0
V : 170

B : 214
A : 255
243 80 N.m L
R : 83
V : 170
B : 49
xxx
A : 255
R : 235
MATERIALS REQUIRED C
V : 110
B : 18
A : 255
Consumables
T2
R : 226
V : 25
B : 44
A : 255
Specific tool
1 cm = 78 px
2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px
4 cm = 312 px
- Dummy grip tool (T1), 5 cm = 390 px

6 cm = 468 px
7 cm = 546 px
- Oven wheel dummy sector tool (T2), 8 cm = 624 px

9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
- Centering device (T3). 11 cm = 858 px

12 cm = 936 px
13 cm = 1014 px T3
14 cm = 1092 px
T1
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px
PREREQUISITES
R:0
V : 170
B : 214
A : 255
243 80 N.m L

procedure:
R : 83
V : 170
B : 49
xxx
A : 255

B0012". R : 235
V : 110

B : 18
A : 255
R : 226
PROCEDURE
V : 25
B : 44
A : 255

1
manual rotation.
arm (1), see procedure "CO-B0003". 1
• Remove the roller (2). 2
T1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/5 MP-B0185 Adjusting the synchronization of the oven wheel / preform transfer 3
5 Remove the oven outfeed guide, see procedure "CO-

B0007".
6 Remove the ejector and the tip from the

spindles located in the meeting zone with the transfer
arms , see procedure "CO-B0009".
7 Advance the reference transfer arm (1) until the

synchronization point with the oven wheel, using 3
manual rotation.
arm (1) must be positioned on the "SYNCHRO" mark
of the transfer cam (4). SY
NC
HR
O
1 cm = 78 px
2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px
4 cm = 312 px
4
5 cm = 390 px
6 cm = 468 px
7 cm = 546 px
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px
12 cm = 936 px
13 cm = 1014 px
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px
8 Remove the infeed plate sector from the oven

wheel, see procedure "CO-B0007".
R:0
V : 170
B : 214
A : 255
243 80 N.m LU
R : 83
V : 170
B : 49
xxx
A : 255
R : 235
V : 110
B : 18
A : 255
R : 226
V : 25
B : 44
A : 255

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
9 Install the dummy sector tool (T2) on the oven

wheel (5).
• Position the tool using the centering devices (T2a).
• Tighten the bolts (T2b).
5
T2
1 cm = 78 px
2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px
4 cm = 312 px
5 cm = 390 px
T2a
1
6 cm = 468 px
7 cm = 546 px
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px
12 cm = 936 px
13 cm = 1014 px
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
T2b
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px

4
7
R:0

V : 170
B : 214
A : 255
243 80 N.m
The oven wheel (5) has an angle of freedom.
R : 83
V : 170
B : 49
xxx 6
9
A : 255
1 cm = 78 px
2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px R : 235
V : 110
4 cm = 312 px B : 18
5 cm = 390 px A : 255
6 cm = 468 px
4
8
7 cm = 546 px
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px 6 R : 226
12 cm = 936 px
13 cm = 1014 px
14 cm = 1092 px
V : 25
B : 44
A : 255
5
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px
R:0
V : 170
B : 214
A : 255
243 80 N.m
R : 83
V : 170
B : 49
xxx
A : 255
R : 235
V : 110
B : 18
A : 255
R : 226
V : 25
B : 44
A : 255

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/5 MP-B0185 Adjusting the synchronization of the oven wheel / preform transfer 3
To make adjustment easier, the following operation may

i be done with 2 technicians.
T3
Tighten one of the screws (8) to rotate the oven 4

wheel by a few degrees, in one direction or the other.
13 Position the oven wheel (5), using the bolts (8) of the 1 cm = 78 px
2 cm = 156 px T2
synchronization device so that the centering 103 cm = 234 px
4 cm = 312 px
5 cm = 390 px
device (T3) passes through the dummy grip (T1) and

6 cm = 468 px
7 cm = 546 px
8 cm = 624 px
the dummy sector (T2).

9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px
The centering device (T3) must slide without stress T1

12 cm = 936 px
13 cm = 1014 px
14 cm = 1092 px 5
through the tools (T1 ; T2).
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px
The position roller (10) must be in contact with

! the transfer cam (4). R:0
5
V : 170
B : 214
- If a bolt (8) is at the end of stroke or the bolts (6) are

A : 255
243 80 N.m LU
at the bottom of the hole:

12
R : 83
V : 170 xxx
B : 49
A : 255
• Loosen the belt (11) using the tensioner (12).1 cm = 78 px

2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px R : 235
• Shift the transmission belt (11) by one tooth in

V : 110
4 cm = 312 px B : 18
5 cm = 390 px A : 255
6 cm = 468 px
order to center the bolts (6) in the holes. 7 cm = 546 px

8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
• Adjust the tension of the belt (11), see procedure

10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px
11
R : 226
12 cm = 936 px V : 25
B : 44
"MP-B0012".
13 cm = 1014 px
A : 255
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
• Redo the synchronization adjustment, using the

17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px
bolts (8).
Do not change the position of the oven wheel during
!
R:0
4
7 V : 170
B : 214
tightening.
A : 255
243 80 N.m LU
14 Tighten the bolts (6). R : 83

V : 170 xxx 6
9
B : 49

A : 255
16 Tighten up the check nuts (7). 1 cm = 78 px

2 cm = 156 px R : 235
3 cm = 234 px V : 110
4 cm = 312 px B : 18
5 cm = 390 px A : 255
6 cm = 468 px
4
8
7 cm = 546 px
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px
12 cm = 936 px
6 R : 226
V : 25
B : 44
13 cm = 1014 px A : 255
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px
17 Remove the centering device (T3). R:0
18 Remove the dummy sector tool (T2).

V : 170
B : 214
A : 255
243 80 N.m LU
19 Remove the dummy grip tool (T1). T1
R : 83
V : 170
B : 49
xxx
A : 255
1 cm = 78 px
2 cm = 156 px
3 cm = 234 px R : 235
T2
V : 110
4 cm = 312 px B : 18
5 cm = 390 px A : 255
6 cm = 468 px
7 cm = 546 px
8 cm = 624 px
9 cm = 702 px
10 cm = 780 px
11 cm = 858 px R : 226
12 cm = 936 px V : 25
B : 44
13 cm = 1014 px
A : 255
14 cm = 1092 px
15 cm = 1170 px
16 cm = 1248 px T3
17 cm = 1326 px
18 cm = 1404 px
20 Install the infeed plate sector from the oven wheel , see procedure "CO-B0007". R:0
V : 170
21 Install the spindle tips and the ejectors , see procedure "CO-B0009".
B : 214
A : 255
243 80 N.m LU
22 Install the oven outfeed guide , see procedure "CO-B0007". R : 83

xxx
23 Make the reference transfer arm (1) accessible, using manual rotation.
V : 170
B : 49
A : 255
R : 235
V : 110

B : 18
A : 255
SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

END OF OPERATION
1 Install 3 preforms at the oven outfeed, upstream from unloading.

2 Advance the preforms until the synchronization point, using JOG.
3 Check the proper tracking and behavior of preforms.
- No abnormal stress during transfer.
The tracking and transfer of preforms must be fluid and stress-free.

i

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
7
T3 A
3 Replacing the preform infeed wheel cylinders MP-B0186 1/3
MACHINE STATUS A B

- Infeed rail clear of preforms, X
- Pneumatic circuit cut off and locked out; see 1
A
1
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
2
- Cylinder assembly (A) for the stop finger of preform A
infeed,
- Cylinder assembly (B) for the retractable guide of
the preform infeed wheel. LUB A21
Consumables 1
- Clean, dry, non-abrasive cloth,
Specific tool
- Caliper (1).
PROCEDURE
Replacing the cylinder assembly (A)
Removing
1 Measure and record the dimension (X), using a 4
1 5 6 A
caliper (1).
2 Disconnect the hose (2) from the quick connector (3).
3 Loosen and remove the screw (4), disconnect the
electrical connector (5), remove the sealing gasket7(6).
X
2 3
7
4 Hold the stop finger (7), and simultaneously, loosen the
10 11
check-nut (8).
5 Remove the stop finger (7).
6 Remove the check-nut (8).
7 Loosen and remove the nut (9).
8 Remove the cylinder assembly (A) from the X
support (10).
7 8 9 A

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0186 Replacing the preform infeed wheel cylinders 3
Replacing 12
2
! Clean all the parts handled during the operation using cleaning agent "NET A04" and a clean, dry cloth.
Remove all debris in accordance with applicable legislation.
1 Perform the removal operations in the reverse order, 10

7 8 11 A
- Rotate the pin (11) of the cylinder assembly (A), in
order to obtain dimension (X).
- Tighten the check-nut (8) on the stop finger (7).
263 16
4 11
Replacing the cylinder assembly (B) 1
Removing
1 Measure and record the dimension (Y), using a 14 16 15 16 14
caliper (1). Y
2 Disconnect the hose (12) from the quick
connector (13).
3 Loosen and the remove the bolts (14), disconnect the
electrical connectors (15), remove the seals (16). 7
1 12 13 B 16
4 Loosen and remove the screw (17) and the

20
washer (18).
24
7 Remove the cylinder assembly (B) from the
support (21).
X 21
18
19 B 22 23 17 16

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the preform infeed wheel cylinders MP-B0186 3/3
Replacing 12
2

24 23 22 B
- Rotate the pin (22) of the cylinder assembly (B), in
order to obtain dimension (Y).
- Tighten the check-nut (23) on the ball-joint end-
piece (24).
263
4
1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1
3 Replacing the ejection cylinders of the preform and bottle transfer wheels MP-B0187 1/2
MACHINE STATUS

- Pneumatic circuit cut off and locked out; see
7
T3 A
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Cylinder assemblies (A) x2.
1
Consumables A A
- Cleaning agent "NET A04". X
2 x2
Specific tool
- Paint marker (1).
1
LUB A21
A 1
PROCEDURE
Removing
1 Disconnect the hose (2) from the quick connector (3).
2 Loosen and remove the screw (4), disconnect the
electrical connector (5), remove the sealing gasket (6).
Y
17
15
16 17 15
2 3 5 4 6

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0187 Replacing the ejection cylinders of the preform and bottle transfer wheels 3
3 Mark the position of the guide (7), using a paint 1

marker (1). A
2
1
LUB A21
4 Loosen and remove the bolts (8) and the washers (9; 8; 9
11 7
10).
5 Remove the guide (7) from the support (11).
6 Loosen and the remove the bolts (12).
7 Remove the cylinder assembly (A) from the
support (13). 13
8; 9
A 10
X
12
16
11
Replacing
1 Perform the removal operations in the reverse order, making sure that you:
- Adjust the guide (7) using the markings made during removal.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Replacing the ejection guide cylinder of the bottle outfeed wheel MP-B0188 1/2 1
MACHINE STATUS

- Pneumatic circuit cut off and locked out; see
MATERIALS REQUIRED T3 A
7
Part
- Cylinder assembly (A).
Consumables A
- Strong "LOCTITE 263" threadlock,
- Cleaning agent "NET A04". X
x2
PROCEDURE A
17
Removing
1 Measure and record the dimension (X),15
using a ruler. X
16 17 15
12
2 Disconnect the hoses (1) from the quick connectors (2).

5 14 13 12 A 6 9; 10A
3 Remove the reducers (3) from the hoses (1).
4 Loosen and remove the screw (4) and the washer (5).
7 Remove the cylinder (A) from the ball-joint tenon (8).
8 Loosen and remove the bolts 2(9) and3the 5washers 9; 10 8 11
4 6(10).
9 Remove the ball-joint tenon (8) from the support (11).
X 4 2
7
3
263

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
X
2/2 MP-B0188 Replacing the ejection guide cylinder of the bottle outfeed wheel 3
10 Identify and record the position of the electrical

17
connectors (15).
11 Loosen and the remove the bolts (16), disconnect the
electrical connectors (15), remove the seals (17).
7
3
17 15
12 2
8
13
A 11
17 16 15 16 17 16
15 5
12 Disconnect the hose (18) from the quick 18 19 24

10
connector (19). A
3
13 Disconnect the hoses (1) from the quick
connectors (20).
14 Loosen and remove the bolts (21) and the 4
washers (22).
15 Remove the distributor (23) from the support (24).X 21; 22
23
9; 10 20 1 16
11
12
Replacing 2
1 Perform the removal operations in the reverse order, 14 13 12 A 10

- Apply "LOCTITE 263" threadlock to the screw (4).
- Follow the position of the electrical
connectors (15).
- Rotate the pin (12) of the cylinder assembly (A), in
order to obtain dimension (X).
- Tighten the check-nut (13) on the ball-joint end-
X
piece (14).
263 16
4 11
1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Removal/refit: blow blocks MP-B0193 1/3
GENERAL INFORMATION
blocks.
Make sure that the pneumatic circuit is closed. " AirEco1 "
!
MACHINE STATUS " AirEco2 NF "
- Cold molds,
" AirEco2 "
B0027",
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
- Food-grade grease "LUB A21"
PROCEDURE

area using the manual rotation. 8
It is possible to rotate the machine by connecting an

i external 7b supply (8) to the pneumatic panel (9), see
9

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/3 MP-B0193 Removal/refit: blow blocks 3
Removing

2 Loosen and remove the bolts (2) and the washers (3).
2X
;3 1 X
4
4 Hold the blow block (5) and simultaneously, remove the

bolts (6) and washers (7).
5 6 X; 7 5
Replacing
2 Lightly grease the o-rings, using "LUB A21" food-grade
grease.
3 Install the blow block (5) and simultaneously, screw in
the bolts (6) and washers (7).
5 6 X; 7

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Removal/refit: blow blocks MP-B0193 3/3

5
X
6
55 N.m
5 Install the feed block (4).

6 Insert the bolts (2) and fit the washers (3).
8 Connect the electrical connector (1).
X
4 2X
;3
X 55 N.m 1
! Lock the manual rotation system, before carrying out the work, see procedure "OP-B0027".

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Checking the condition of pressurized circuits MP-B0197 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never work on pressurized circuits if maintenance and operating recommendations and circuits isolation
requirements are not met (see procedure OP-B0002), or you may cause bodily injury.
Never modify any pressurized circuits as you may cause bodily injury.
Verification of the integrity and proper upkeep of pressure equipment is the operator's responsibility.
!
MACHINE STATUS

- The on-board air system is accessible in the work area ,
- Pneumatic circuit cut off and locked out, see procedure "OP-B0002".
PROCEDURE
1 Visually check the integrity of all mechanical equipment of pressurized circuits:

- Control equipment (pressure gauges, sensors, etc.).
- Safety equipment (pressure switches, safety valve, etc.).
- Distribution equipment (piping, hoses, rotary union, etc.).
- Control and power equipment (distributors, valves, tank, etc.).
- Actuators (cylinders, solenoid valves, etc.).
The mechanical equipment checked must not be damaged, corroded, worn, impacted, cracked, loose,
i etc..
☞ If the inspected elements are damaged, replace them.
2 Visually check all the electrical equipment of pressurized circuits:

- Control equipment (coils, power distributors, etc.).
- Regulation equipment (electrical cables, electrical connectors, etc.).
The electrical cables and connectors checked must not be damaged, corroded, free, poorly connected
i on the element to be run, etc..
☞ If the inspected elements are damaged, replace them.

High-pressure air circuit

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0197 Checking the condition of pressurized circuits 3
Low-pressure air circuit

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Checking the compensation boxes of the mold-support unit MP-B0205 1/4
MACHINE STATUS

B0027",
- Mold-support unit closed and locked.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Compensation box (2) x4. 1 21
Consumables
- Light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock. 2 x4
Specific tool
- Tool compensation bush (T1): 011808268,
3
- Tool (T2): 011728518, 2 X
- Torque wrench 5 to 20 daN.
X A
1 2 3
3
4 T1
T2
3
3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/4 MP-B0205 Checking the compensation boxes of the mold-support unit 3
PROCEDURE
Removing
Do not remove more than one compensation box (2) at a time, in order to retain the settings.
! Remove the compensation boxes (2) in the following order:

- Upper left 1
- Lower right 2
- Lower left 3
- Upper right 4
Do not change the settings of the screws (16) and check-nuts (17).
1 4
16; 17
3
2
7 8
6
The temperature of the molds must be less than 55°C. 9

!
The bolts (9) and the compensation boxes (2) are
i assembled with light threadlock "LOCTITE 222". You
may have difficulty loosening them.
1 Loosen the screw (9) but do not remove it. T1
2
2 Loosen and remove the compensation box (2) using a
wrench and the compensation bush (T1).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Checking the compensation boxes of the mold-support unit MP-B0205 3/4
Inspection
1 1 2 of the
Visually check the good condition 3 washers (19).
2 A
2 Check the direction of assembly of the 2
washers (19), using the tool (T2).
3
The diagram (A) indicates the direction of
i mounting the washers (19). X 19
The tool (T2) must be inserted without constraint in the
compensation box (2); see illustration
X on the right. 9
3 Visually check for the presence of "Lub A27" grease
3 on
T2
the washers (19) of the compensation10 box (2).
Replacing
1 Apply "LOCTITE 222" threadlock on the thread of the
compensation box (2).
2 Screw in and torque the compensation box (2) to 15
Nm, using a torque wrench and the tool (T1).
3 Apply "LOCTITE 222" threadlock on the check-
screw (9).
4 Screw in and torque the check-screw (9) to 10 Nm.
5 Repeat the procedure on all of the compensation
boxes (2), following the order indicated at the start of
the procedure: 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 .
10 222 10 N.m
9 2 222 15 N.m
T1
2
10
9
END OF OPERATION
1 Turn on the power supplies to the machine.

2 Check proper locking of the half-molds on the shell supports.
3 Check the proper locking of the mold base on the carriage.
4 Start the machine.
5 Wait for the molds to reach working temperature.
6 Run the machine through a few production rotations.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/4 MP-B0205 Checking the compensation boxes of the mold-support unit 3
7 Check the clearance between the support thrusts, see procedure "MP-B0024".

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Adjusting the cooling shields and heating module supports MP-B0208 1/5
MACHINE STATUS
- Oven fan stopped.
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
- Mirror (T1),
PROCEDURE
heating module support (A). 2
4 Loosen the handles (3).

3
5 Carefully lift the exterior cooling shield (4).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/5 MP-B0208 Adjusting the cooling shields and heating module supports 2
6 6
5 5
A P
3
2
6 Position 3 preforms (P) on the spindle chain opposite at

each end and in the middle of the inner cooling
shield (5).
Setting the inner cooling shield

1 Loosen the handles (6) on each side of the heating
P 7 6
module.
2 Set the gap at the inner cooling shield (5) with regard to
the preform bodies (P) using the bolts (7) to obtain a
clearance of d = 1 mm.
Default initial value, to be adjusted to the
i process / preforms, as necessary.
3 Tighten the disengageable handles (6).
d
T1 5

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Setting the outer cooling shield

1 Carefully tilt the exterior cooling shield (4).
3
☞ Check the position of the outer cooling
shield (4) with regard to the preform neck-rings (P).
- If the outer cooling shield (4) is above the prefrom 9
neck-rings (P).
• Continue with the procedure.
- If the outer cooling shield (4) is below the preform
neck-rings (P). 7 8
• Carefully lift the exterior cooling shield (4).
• Raise the outer cooling shield (4) using the
handles (7) and the grip nuts (8).
• Carefully tilt the exterior cooling shield (4).
4
2 Set the height of the outer cooling shield (4) with regard
P
to the preform neck rings (P) using the handles (7) and
the grip nuts (8) to obtain e = 1 mm.
3 Set the gap at the outer cooling shield (4) with regard to
the preform bodies (P) using the handles (3) and the P
bolts (9) to reach distance of f = 1 mm.
i process / preforms, as necessary. f
4 Tighten the disengageable handles (3 ; 7).
4 T1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/5 MP-B0208 Adjusting the cooling shields and heating module supports 2
Adjusting the heating module support

1 Hold the handle (1) with both hands and carefully raise
the heating module support (A).
☞ Check the position of the heating module A

support (A) with respect to the exterior cooling
shield (4). 13
12
- If the heating module support (A) touches the
exterior cooling shield (4):
• Hold the handle (1) with both hands and lower
the heating module support (A). 2
10
• Increase the height of the heating module
support (A) using the handles (10) and the
knurled nuts (11).
• Hold the handle (1) with both hands and
carefully raise the heating module support (A). 11
- If not:
2 Adjust the height of the heating module support (A) with

respect to the exterior cooling shield (4) using the A
handles (10) and the knurled nuts (11) to obtain the
dimension g = 2 mm. h
3 Adjust the distance between the heating module
support (A) and the exterior cooling shield (4) using the
fasteners (12) and the screws (13) to obtain the
dimension h = 4 mm. g

4 Tighten the disengageable handles (10).
4
Setting the heights of the dummy lamps

heating module support (A). 14 16
2 Lower and turn the indexing pin (13).

15
13
13

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Adjust the dummy lamp support (14) with respect to the

preform (P) using the knurled wheel (15) to obtain the 14
dimension l = 15 mm.
! Adjust the dummy lamp supports (14) equally at

the infeed and outfeed of each infrared oven .
4 Measure the setting value on the ruler (16). l
5 Adjust the other dummy lamp supports (14) so that they
are at the same height.
6 Turn and release the indexing pin (13).
☞ Check that the indexing pin (13) is against stop.
7 Carefully lift the exterior cooling shield (4).

8 Remove the preforms (P).
9 Carefully tilt the exterior cooling shield (4).
12 Repeat the procedure to adjust all of the cooling
shields (4 ; 6), heating module supports (A) and dummy
lamp supports (14).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Adjustment of dummy lamps (option) MP-B0216 1/5
GENERAL INFORMATION

i theoretical values. The adjustments will be fine-
tuned as a function of the process and behavior
of the preforms in production.
MACHINE STATUS T3 A
- Recipe certified compliant with the production to be
performed when loaded; see procedure "OP-
B0013".
P x3
- Cooling ramp and heating module
supports adjusted; see procedure "MP-B0208".
- Suitable spindle nose and ejectors installed for
production being carried out; see procedure "CO-
B0009".
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
production being carried out (P),
R
PROCEDURE
Adjustment of the height (X) of the dummy lamps (1)

9
Theoretical adjustment value (X)
Height (X) of the dummy lamps (1) corresponds to: 1 P
R
X = 15 mm : between the bottom of the dummy lamps (1) and the
preforms (P)
1 Use the theoretical adjustment values, only for

adjustment of a new item. X

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/5 MP-B0216 Adjustment of dummy lamps (option) 3
Opening the heating module supports (A)

attaching parts (3).
A 2 3
2
Opening of outer cooling ramps (4)

1 Loosen the handles (5).
2 Carefully lift the exterior cooling shield (4). 5

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3
P
3 Position 3 preforms (P) on the spindle chain opposite at

each end and in the middle of the inner cooling
shield (6).
Adjusting
1 Maintain the support (7) of the dummy lamps (1).
7 1
2 Pull and rotate the indexing finger by 1/2 turn (8).
☞ The indexing finger (8) is in the unlocked position.
3 Adjust the support (7) of dummy lamps (1) to the

predefined height (X).
4 Pull and rotate the indexing finger by 1/2 turn (8). X
☞ The indexing finger (8) is in the locked position.
A
5 Adjust all the supports (7) of dummy lamps (1) to the
same height (X).
1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/5 MP-B0216 Adjustment of dummy lamps (option) 3
3
P
6 Remove the preforms (P).
Closing of outer cooling ramps (4)

1 Lower the outer cooling ramp (4) with care.
2 Tighten the handles (5). 5

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Closing the supports of heating modules (A)

2 Hold the handle (2) and tighten the fasteners (3).
A 2 3
2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Checking the guide rail of the stretching slides MP-B0223 1/5
GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE STATUS
T1
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
T2
- Clean, dry cloths. 1
Specific tool
- Pin gauge Ø 2.5 mm (T1),
- Stop tool (T2).
PREREQUISITES
The aim of this procedure is to:

1 Check the condition of the raceways (2) of a guide
rail (1) on the machine.
-
If the rail is compliant:
• Check another rail at the next interval, see
"Maintenance schedule" document.
- If the guide rail has faults:
• Check all of the guide rails on the machine.
• Replace the guide rails in poor condition, see
procedure "Removal / refit of a stretching slide".
2 Record the station number and the condition of the rail
on a maintenance monitoring table.
Important:
- Checking the guide rail (1) on the machine is not a check of
3
the rail along its entire length; the stretching
slide (3) permanently hides a portion of the rail. 1
- And only half of the raceways (2) can be checked (for
type (A) or (B) rails).
For an in-depth check, the guide rail must be removed, see
procedure "Removal / refit of a stretching slide".
2
A B 2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/5 MP-B0223 Checking the guide rail of the stretching slides 3
PROCEDURE

2 Remove the stretching rod, see procedure "CO-B0002".
3 Eliminate excess grease using clean, dry cloths.
4 Visually check the condition of the guide rail (1).
☞ The rail must not have any visible surface faults

(impacts, breakage, friction, scaling, etc.). 1
Start the check at the end of the guide rail (low-stress

i area of the rail) in order to compare it with the more
highly stressed areas.
This type of check depends in large part on the
checker's sensitivity. In case of doubt, repeat the check
several times. 2
5 Check the surface condition of the accessible
raceways (2), using the pin gauge (T1). 2
• Position the pin gauge (T1) at an angle of T1
approximately 30 to 45 degrees, with respect to the
axis of the raceway (2).
1
• Slide the pin gauge (T1) along the raceway (2).
☞ Any significant change in roughness between the

different areas of the raceways can be considered
as wear of the guide rail.
α
- If the guide rail has faults: 30°<α<45° 1
• Remove the guide rail (1) for an in-depth check
of all the raceways (2) and the entire length of
the rail, or a replacement, see procedure
"Removal / refit of a stretching slide".
• Check all of the guide rails on the machine.
- If there are no faults:

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
If the molds are not installed on the machine, position

! the "nozzle height" adjustment bar on the upper face of 3
the shell supports.
6 Position the stop tool (T2) under the slide (3).
7
T2

8 Deactivate the braking system of the stretching
slide (3) on the blowing station concerned, see
The slide is resting on
7 the tool (T2). 3
T2
The slide is no longer braked. Risk of injury! be careful

! during handling. 3
NO BRAKE
9 Manually lift the slide (3) and remove the tool (T2).
T2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
4/5 MP-B0223 Checking the guide rail of the stretching slides 3
10 Carefully lower the slide (3) by hand until it stops.

The slide is secured.
NO BRAKE
11 In the same way, check the condition of the guide

rail (1) and the raceways (2) in the top part of the
console.
- If the guide rail has faults: 1
• Remove the guide rail (1) for an in-depth check
of all the raceways (2) and the entire length of
the rail, or a replacement, see procedure
"Removal / refit of a stretching slide".
• Check all of the guide rails on the machine. 2
α
- If there are no faults: T1
1
12 Record the station number and the condition of the rail
on a maintenance monitoring table.
30°<α<45° 2
The slide is no longer braked. Risk of injury! be careful

! during handling. 3
NO BRAKE
13 Manually lift the slide (3).
14 Position the stop tool (T2) under the slide (3).
T2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
15 Carefully lower the slide (3) by hand until it stops.

The slide is resting on the tool (T2).
16 If applicable, remove the "nozzle height" adjustment NO BRAKE
bar .
3
T2
END OF OPERATION

2 Acknowledge the faults at the HMI.
4 Remove the wrench (T2).
5 Fit the stretching rod. T2

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Cleaning the cover of the 7 bar line 40 µm filter MP-B0232 1/2
MACHINE STATUS

MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
PROCEDURE
! Make sure there is no pressure in the circuit.
1 Lower the locking lug (1) and keep it in the down

position. Turn the bowl (2) a quarter turn and remove it.
1
2 Clean the base (3) using a clean, dry cloth.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0232 Cleaning the cover of the 7 bar line 40 µm filter 1
3 Clean the cover (4) using a clean, dry cloth.

Check the condition and the position of the seal (5).
4 5
4 Position and turn the bowl a quarter turn until the lug is
locked. (2 ; 1)

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Cleaning / checking the air and water hoses MP-B0233 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE
1 Using a clean, dry cloth and "NET A04" cleaning agent:

- Cleaning the red- and blue-colored water hoses (A).
- Clean the black-colored air hoses (B).
2 Check the good condition of the water and air hoses: See reference illustrated on right (C).
• In particular, check the hoses connected to moving parts and/or close to hot parts.
• The hoses must be correctly positioned in their supports, and not be in contact with each other or with
another part.
- The hose must not be installed in a strained condition (pinched, twisted, stretched, compressed, etc.).
- No damage is acceptable on the sheath of the hose and there must be no signs of damage, wear or fatigue
(no cuts, cracks, abrasion, tears, tearing, punching, holes, distortion, burnt or melt parts, etc.).
- No damage is acceptable on the end-fittings of the hose (no broken, cut, missing end-fittings, etc.).
- No damage is acceptable on the end-pieces of the hoses (no distortion, loosening, corrosion, etc.).
- No damage is acceptable on the crimping of the hoses (no cracked, twisted, flattened, disjointed crimping,
etc.).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0233 Cleaning / checking the air and water hoses 1

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Signalling column operation check MP-B0234 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE
Method 1
2 Set the switch to "adjusting" mode . (C1) T1
The key (T2) is accessible.
3 Press keys (T2 ; T3).
The key T3 corresponds to the tab: "testing the
"transfer" functions".
C1
T2
Xxxxx
T3
1 3
2 A
4
+
4 Press keys (1 ; 2).

The lights of the column (A) turn on one by one, and the sequence ends with the sound alarm .
☞ Check that the lights (4) turn on one by one and that the alarm sounds.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0234 Signalling column operation check 1
Method 2
2 Set the switch to "production" mode . (C1) T1
The key (T2) is accessible.
3 Press keys (T2 ; T3).
The key T3 corresponds to the tab: "total productive
maintenance"(TPM).
C1
T2
Xxxxx
T3
1 A
4
2
+

The lights of the column (A) turn on one by one, and the sequence ends with the sound alarm .
☞ Check that the lights (2) turn on one by one and that the alarm sounds.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
1 Checking for proper operation of the manual rotation system presence safety MP-B0235 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE
1 Press key (Y) on the "HMI".

All the doors are unlocked
2 Open the safety door (A). Y
3 Remove the crank (1) from the safety system .

The "crank engaged" message is displayed on
the "HMI".
Removal of the crank from its safety
i system shuts off automatic operation of the
machine.
1
i

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0235 Checking for proper operation of the manual rotation system presence safety 1
4 Close the door (A).

5 Press the flashing button (Z) on the door. A Z
The indicator goes off and the button is lit constant
green.
All the doors are locked. Y
7 Acknowledge the fault at the PCC (X).
The fault must reappear on the HMI as long as
i the crank is not on its safety system.
i
☞ Test machine start-up on the PCC.
• Press the key (W).
X
The machine must not start up.
- If yes: The machine starts with the crank not on its
support (safety system) W
! Contact your maintenance team.

All the doors are unlocked A
Y
9 Open the safety door (A).
10 Stow the crank (1) back on its safety system.
11 Close the door.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Hearing check of air leakage on the blower MP-B0236 1/2
PROCEDURE
G A B C
H D E F
1 Walk around the machine listening for possible leaks. Notify your maintenance team in case of suspicious air
leaks.
When? Inspection Listening area

Permanent and secured air circuit:
- Pneumatic interface 40 bar E
Machine power on, doors to the listening - Pneumatic interface 7 bar E
area are open - Pressure reduction line 40 / 7 bar E
- Preform infeed actuation B
- Braking system D-G*
Purged air circuit 7 bar:
- Preform infeed retractable guide B
From start-up to nominal output rate, air - Preform ejection A-B
activated at HMI - Bottle ejection A
- Dedust air treatment line (if present) B
- Bottle outfeed (if present) H
* Depending on the model

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2/2 MP-B0236 Hearing check of air leakage on the blower 2
When? Inspection Listening area

On-board pneumatic circuit :
From start-up to nominal output rate, air
- Pre-blowing line F
activated at HMI
- Pressure reduction line 40 / 7 bar F
Blowing station:
- Stretching brake A-B
During production - Nozzle F-G
- Blowing block D-F-G
- Compensation D-F-G

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Checking the attachment of the bottom plate of electrical boxes MP-B0239 1/1
GENERAL INFORMATION
! Access to electrical areas is restricted to qualified and authorized personnel only.
MACHINE STATUS

- Main electrical circuit switched off and locked out, see procedure "OP-B0002".
- Insulating gloves suitable for the voltage
PROCEDURE
! Before carrying any work on a component of a box or an electrical cabinet, you must wait 15 minutes after the
equipment has been switched off.
1 Open the electrical boxes (A ; B ; C).

2 Check and tighten the nuts (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4) of the bottom plate of the electrical boxes (A ; B ; C).
3 Close the electrical boxes (A ; B ; C).
1 2
1 2 B 1 2
3
A
4
4 3 4 3

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Checking the indicator light of the electrical stretching coder MP-B0240 1/1
GENERAL INFORMATION

information, see chapter "Safety precautions

implant (prosthesis, et cetera) are not qualified

magnetic field.
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds, 1
PROCEDURE
1 Check the status of the indicator light (1) of the electrical

stretching coder.
☞ If the indicator light (1) blinks

green, SIDEL considers that the coder is
operational.
☞ If the indicator light (1) blinks yellow, orange or red,

or if it is off, SIDEL considers that the coder is not
operational. Contact SIDEL.

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
2 Checking the capacity of the UPS battery to retain a charge MP-B0241 1/1
GENERAL INFORMATION
! Access to electrical areas is restricted to qualified and authorized personnel only.
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE
1 Open the electrical box (A) or (B) as a function of your machine configuration.
2 Check that the indicator light (1) is off.
• If not, contact your maintenance team.
3 Close the electrical box (A ; B).

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
3 Checking the mold opening / closing retractable guide MP-B0242 1/1
MACHINE STATUS
- Cold molds,
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Specific tool
PROCEDURE
1 Check the dimension (X), using a set of thickness

gauges.
☞ If the dimension (X) is ≤ 0.5 mm.

• Reconditioning the mold opening/closing
retractable guide, see procedure "MP-B0041".

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
T3
1 Cleaning / checking the machine's lighting devices MP-B0250 1/3
2
! Access to servicing areas is restricted to

personnel authorized, designated and trained by
2
the customer.
i number and location of the lighting
devices (A) vary. 1
1
Positions of the switch (1)
- "0" = off
- "I" = light intensity of 50 % 3
- "II" = light intensity of 100 %
MACHINE STATUS A
- Machine stopped.
- Latex gloves
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Consumables
T3
PROCEDURE
Cleaning
1 Press the key T1 to turn on the lighting devices (A).
T1
The key T1 turns to orange.

3
SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

Maintenance1Manual / Maintenance
T3
2/3 MP-B0250 Cleaning / checking the machine's lighting devices 1
2
2 Clean the lighting devices (A), using a clean, dry cloth
and "NET A03" cleaning agent. 3
A
A
T3
Inspection 3
1 Press the key (T1) to turn on the lighting devices (A).
T1
The key (T1) turns to orange.
T3
2
2 Check that the switch (1) is correctly in position "II".
A
The lighting device (A) is on.
2

3
SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

T3
1 Cleaning / checking the machine's lighting devices MP-B0250 3/3
2
2
3 Check that there are noAfaults in the lighting device (A).
examples: 2
- The lighting device (A) does not turn on, check the
connection of the electrical connector (2),
- Faulty switch (1),
- Deformed, melted, burned, blackened, cracked,
broken plastic, A
- Light not intense and irregular along the entire
length.
☞ If there is a fault, replace the lighting device (A), see

procedure "MP-B0251MP-B0251".
4 Repeat the procedure on all the lighting devices (A).
END OF OPERATION

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
T3
2 Replacing the machine's lighting devices MP-B0251 1/3
2
! Access to servicing areas is restricted to

personnel authorized, designated and trained by
2
the customer.
i number and location of the lighting
devices (A) vary. 1
1
Positions of the switch (1)
- "0" = off
- "I" = light intensity of 50 % 3
- "II" = light intensity of 100 %
MACHINE STATUS A
- Machine stopped. T3
- Latex gloves
MATERIALS REQUIRED
Part
- Lighting
device (A), "SIDEL" reference: 00000215872.
PROCEDURE
Removing
1 Press the key (T1) to turn off the lighting devices (A).
T1
The key (T1) turns to blue.

3
SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

T3
2/3 MP-B0251 Replacing the machine's lighting devices 2
2
2 Position the switch (1) to "0".
A
T3
2
3 Remove the electrical connector (2).
4 Remove the lighting device (A) from the supports (3).

3
SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
A
2 Replacing the machine's T3

lighting devices MP-B0251 3/3
Replacing 2
! Replace the components (A) to be replaced with

hardware that has identical technical characteristics.
1 Install the lighting device (A) on the supports (3).
2 Install the electrical connector (2).
1
31 A
T3
3
2 3
3 Position the switch (1) to "II".
A A
T3
4 Press the key (T1) to turn on the lighting devices (A).

T1
The key (T1) turns to orange.
The lighting device (A) is on.
5 Repeat the procedure on all the faulty lighting
devices (A).
END OF OPERATION

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Maintenance Manual / Appendix
4. APPENDIX

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M - N° SBMXGM120235
Maintenance Manual / Appendix

Quarterly Maintenance Schedule
PLANET BOTTLING COMPANY LIMITED - SBO20M#120235
Stopped
Dates
In production
Hours 1500 3000 4500 6000 7500 9000 10500 12000 13500 15000 16500 18000 19500 21000 22500 24000 25500 27000 28500 30000 31500 33000 34500 36000
Out of machine
Procedure Machine
Activity Activity Description Position Cod ID Cycles Note
Sheet Status
ALL MODULES
Cleaning
MAIN11183 Cleaning the machine ligthing MP-B0250 n 0
devices
a a a a a a
MAINB14 Cleaning the blower photo- AM-B0028 n 0
electric cells
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
MAINB28 Cleaning the cover of the MP-B0232 n 0
40µm filter on the 7-bar line
a a a a a a
Inspection
MAIN10219 Checking the condition of the MP-B0197 n 0
air pressure circuits
a a
MAIN11182 Visual inspection with/or MP-B0250 n 0
machine lighting devices test
a a a a a a
MAINB20 Checking / degreasing the MP-B0011 n 0
automatically greased cams
a a a a a a
MAINB404 Visually checking the circuit MP-B0233 n 0
cleanliness/condition of
pneumatic and hydraulic
a a a a a a a a a a a a
hoses
MAINB54 Sound check for air leaks MP-B0236 n 0 a a a a a a
MAINB57 Checking the operation of the MP-B0234 n 0
signalling column
MAINB62 Checking the tripping sensors MP-B0006 n 0
of the torque limiters
MAINB63 Checking the quality of the MP-B0007 n 0
water
a a a a a a
MAINB65 Checking the operation of the MP-B0087 n 0
machine emergency stop
buttons and door locking in
JOG mode
MAINB66 Checking the electrical Contact n 0
connections SIDEL a a a a a a
MAINB67 Checking the tension of the MP-B0012 n 0
transmission belts
a a a a a a a a a a
MAINB676 Checking doors interlocking MP-B0087 n 0
and safety switch
MAINB748 Checking the transmission MP-B0013 n 0
belt alignment
a a a a a a a a a a
Replacing
MAIN11117 Maintenance Rotation kit n 0 a
MAINB339 Replacing the PLC backup MP-B0095 n 0
batteries
a a a a a a
ENERGY
1/8 Printed on 23/05/2022 13:33

Stopped
Dates
In production
Hours 1500 3000 4500 6000 7500 9000 10500 12000 13500 15000 16500 18000 19500 21000 22500 24000 25500 27000 28500 30000 31500 33000 34500 36000
Out of machine
Procedure Machine
Sheet Status
Replacing
MAIN10660 Replacing the 7B line air skid BS47 MP-B0032 n 0
silencer
a a a a a a
MAINB101 Replacing the 7B air line skid BS47 MP-B0031 n 0
filters
a a a a a a
MAINB116 Replacing the filters of the BS02 MP-B0031 n 0
onboard skid (reduction line)
a a a a a a
MAINB130 Replacing the air rotary union BS01 35JT01 MP-B0036 n 0 a a a a a a
MAINB546 Replacing the 40B air line skid BS47 MP-B0032 n 0
silencers
a a a a a a
MAINB547 Replacing the air pressure BS02 MP-B0032 n 0
reduction circuit 40/10b a a a a a a
silencers
FRAME
Inspection
MAIN10512 Checking / Cleaning of the air BY54 AM-B0072 n 0
filter of the air dehumidifier V2 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
version
Replacing
MAINB164 Replacing the quick fasteners HP35 MP-B0044 n 0
of the oven fixed chain
a
MAINB97 Replacing the tensioner wheel HT01 MP-B0028 n 0
sectors
a a a a
OVEN
Cleaning
MAIN10312 Checking and cleaning the HP30 MP-B0152 n 0
spindle rollers, the guide rails
and the turnover cams on
a a a a a a a a a
Matrix oven
MAINB23 Degreasing / checking the B020 MP-B0004 n 0
toothing on the oven drive a a a a a a a a a a a a
ring and the drive pinion
MAINB24 Cleaning / checking the HQA2 MP-B0008 n 0
infrared oven modules
MAINB24 Cleaning / checking the HQF3 MP-B0008 n 0
infrared oven modules
MAINB25 Checking / cleaning the HQA2 MP-B0009 n 0
dummy lamps
MAINB25 Checking / cleaning the HQF3 MP-B0009 n 0
dummy lamps
MAINB26 Checking / cleaning the oven HQA2 MP-B0009 n 0
slit reflectors
MAINB26 Checking / cleaning the oven HQF3 MP-B0009 n 0
slit reflectors
2/8 Printed on 23/05/2022 13:33

Stopped
Dates
In production
Hours 1500 3000 4500 6000 7500 9000 10500 12000 13500 15000 16500 18000 19500 21000 22500 24000 25500 27000 28500 30000 31500 33000 34500 36000
Out of machine
Procedure Machine
Sheet Status
Cleaning
MAINB563 Cleaning the oven ventilation HSA4 AM-B0044 n 0
filters
MAINB563 Cleaning the oven ventilation HSF4 AM-B0044 n 0
filters
Greasing
MAINB39 Greasing the oven bearings B020 MP-B0077 n 0 a a a a a a
MAINB42 Greasing the tensioner wheel B020 MP-B0079 n 0
guide
a a
Inspection
MAINB58 Checking the stretching of the B020 AM-B0016 n 0
spindle chain and spring a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
tension for matrix oven
MAINB59 Checking the tension of the B020 AM-B0018 n 0
spindle rotation fixed chain
MAINB685 Checking the spindle pins HP30 MP-B0177 n 0
(reinforced chain specification)
a a a a a a
Refurbishment
MAIN10313 Reconditioning the Matrix HP30 MP-B0034 n 0
oven reinforced spindles chain
a a
MAINB146 Full reconditioning of oven HN60 MP-B0035 n 0
wheel
a a
Replacing
MAIN10314 Replacing the Matrix oven HP30 MP-B0043 n 0
reinforced spindles chain
a
MAINB119 Replacing the lamps / HQA2 MP-B0090 n 0
checking the lamp base
protections, ceramic reflectors
a a a a a a
and quartz bars
MAINB119 Replacing the lamps / HQF3 MP-B0090 n 0
checking the lamp base
protections, ceramic reflectors
a a a a a a
and quartz bars
MAINB122 Replacing the fixed chains and HP38 MP-B0044 n 0
the fixed chain guides
a
MAINB136 Replacing the silencer of the HN20 MP-B0032 n 0
badly loaded preform ejection a a a a a a
cylinder
MAINB89 Replacing the oven ventilation HSA4 MP-B0019 n 0
filters
MAINB89 Replacing the oven ventilation HSF4 MP-B0019 n 0
filters
MAINB90 Replacing the Perma grease HN35 MP-B0020 n 0
cartridges
3/8 Printed on 23/05/2022 13:33

Stopped
Dates
In production
Hours 1500 3000 4500 6000 7500 9000 10500 12000 13500 15000 16500 18000 19500 21000 22500 24000 25500 27000 28500 30000 31500 33000 34500 36000
Out of machine
Procedure Machine
Sheet Status
PERSO
Refurbishment
MAINB545 Reconditioning the nozzle tip XB00 MP-B0022 n 0 a a a a a a a a a a a a
Replacing
MAINB142 Replacing the heel nozzle seal XB03 MP-B0022 n 0
(Mx)
a a a a a a
MAINB553 Replacing the neck rim XB02 MP-B0022 n 0
retainer end-piece of the a a a a a a
nozzle tips
PREFORM FEEDER
Inspection
MAINB160 Checking the condition of the PP11 MP-B0014 n 0
central guide rollers of the a a a a a a a a a a a a
orienting rollers
MAINB160 Checking the condition of the PP14 MP-B0014 n 0
central guide rollers of the a a a a a a a a a a a a
orienting rollers
MAINB167 Functional check of the feeder B040 MP-B0088 n 0
emergency stop buttons
Replacing
MAINB343 Replacing the hopper PA46 MP-B0093 n 0
electrical box filter
MAINB554 Replacing the silencers on the PP35 MP-B0032 n 0
stabilization rail
a a a a a a
MAINB567 Replacing the backup battery B040 MP-B0096 n 0
of the preforms feeder
a a a a a a
STATION
Cleaning
MAINB21 Cleaning and greasing the BQ02 MP-B0002 n 0
holding box of the mold a a a a a a a a a
support unit locking pins
Global maintenance
MAIN11062 Removing the compensation BQ02 MP-B0024 n 0
boxes
a a a
MAIN11063 Installing the compensation BQ02 MP-B0024 n 0
boxes
a a a
Greasing
MAINB29 Greasing the base mold BQ13 MP-B0081 n 0
carriage (PARKER excluded)
MAINB312 Greasing of MSU main shaft BQ02 MP-B0112 n 0 a a a a a a a a a a a a
4/8 Printed on 23/05/2022 13:33

Stopped
Dates
In production
Hours 1500 3000 4500 6000 7500 9000 10500 12000 13500 15000 16500 18000 19500 21000 22500 24000 25500 27000 28500 30000 31500 33000 34500 36000
Out of machine
Procedure Machine
Sheet Status
Greasing
MAINB32 Greasing the mold base BQ04 MP-B0076 n 0
support guides
MAINB33 Greasing the stretching guides BQ55 MP-B0073 n 0 a a a a a a a a a a a a
MAINB402 Greasing the blowing block BQ48 MP-B0103 n 0
pistons
a a a a a a
Inspection
MAIN10465 Check of one stretching rail BQ55 MP-B0223 n 0
(only one)
a a a a a
MAINB429 Checking the mold-support BQ02 MP-B0118 n 0
unit hinge
a a a a a a
MAINB453 Checking the shell support BQ06 MP-B0119 n 0
height
a a a a a a
MAINB505 Checking the mold base slides BQ04 MP-B0120 n 0 a a a a a a
MAINB52 Checking the position of the BQ20 MP-B0001 n 0
mold O/C levers
a a a
MAINB566 Checking the mold base safety BQ04 MP-B0137 n 0
pin of the MATRIX machine
a a a a a a
MAINB666 Checking the compensation BQ02 MP-B0205 n 0
boxes
a a a
MAINB713 Checking the locking fingers BQ55 AM-B0086 n 0
of the stretching rods
Refurbishment
MAINB143 Reconditionning the nozzle BQ42 MP-B0022 n 0
sealing block (40b lip seal a a a a a a
excluded)
MAINB246 Reconditioning the blowing BQ48 MP-B0039 n 0
pistons
a a a a a a
Replacing
MAIN10776 Replacing the 40b lip seal of BQ42 MP-B0022 n 0
the nozzle sealing block
a a a
MAINB120 Replacing the guide rings on BQ41 MP-B0021 n 0
the stretching rods
MAINB229 Replacing the mold support BQ24 MP-B0026 n 0
unit dampers
a a a a a a
MAINB337 Replacing the anti-torque BQ57 MP-B0022 n 0
bushings
a a a a a a
MAINB407 Replacing the compensation BQ02 MP-B0024 n 0
boxes
a a a
MAINB71 Replacing the compensation BQ06 MP-B0024 n 0
seals
a a a a a a
MAINB81 Replacing the mold base BQ04 MP-B0146 n 0
support assembly up/down a a a
rollers
5/8 Printed on 23/05/2022 13:33

Stopped
Dates
In production
Hours 1500 3000 4500 6000 7500 9000 10500 12000 13500 15000 16500 18000 19500 21000 22500 24000 25500 27000 28500 30000 31500 33000 34500 36000
Out of machine
Procedure Machine
Sheet Status
Replacing
MAINB82 Replacing the controlled BQ12 MP-B0038 n 0
compensation solenoid valves
a a a
MAINB83 Replacing the silencers of the BQ12 MP-B0023 n 0
mold support unit a a a a a a
compensation solenoid valves
MAINB84 Replacing the locking BQ02 MP-B0025 n 0
synthetic rollers of the mold a a a a a a
support units
MAINB86 Replacing the holding rollers BQ02 MP-B0002 n 0
of the mold support unit a a a
locking system
MAINB88 Replacing the nozzle ball- BQ41 MP-B0022 n 0
bearing bushes
a a a
MAINB98 Replacing the exhaust BS32 MP-B0029 n 0
silencers
a a a a a a
MAINB99 Replacing the rollers of the BQ20 MP-B0030 n 0
mold opening/ closing levers
a a a
STRUCTURE & CAMS

Inspection
MAIN10796 Checking the locking BN25 Forthcoming n 0
retractable cam
a a a a a a
TRANSFER
Global maintenance
MAIN10896 Removing a transfer arm BP00 MP-B0051 n 0 a a a a a a
MAIN10896 Removing a transfer arm BP01 MP-B0051 n 0 a a a a a a
MAIN11067 Installing a tranfer arm BP00 MP-B0051 n 0 a a a a a a
MAIN11067 Installing a tranfer arm BP01 MP-B0051 n 0 a a a a a a
Greasing
MAINB37 Greasing the transfer arm BP00 MP-B0074 n 0
guides
MAINB37 Greasing the transfer arm BP01 MP-B0074 n 0
guides
Replacing
MAINB121 Replacing the transfer arm BP00 MP-B0042 n 0
springs
a a a
springs
a a a
MAINB137 Replacing the filters on the BP35 MP-B0050 n 0
preform and bottle ejection a a a
cylinders
6/8 Printed on 23/05/2022 13:33

Stopped
Dates
In production
Hours 1500 3000 4500 6000 7500 9000 10500 12000 13500 15000 16500 18000 19500 21000 22500 24000 25500 27000 28500 30000 31500 33000 34500 36000
Out of machine
Procedure Machine
Sheet Status
Replacing
MAINB137 Replacing the filters on the BP36 MP-B0050 n 0
preform and bottle ejection a a a
cylinders
rollers (synthetic roller)
a a a a a a
rollers (synthetic roller)
a a a a a a
MAINB95 Replacing the head transfer BP21 MP-B0027 n 0
arm roller (synthetic roller)
a a a a a a
MAINB95 Replacing the head transfer BP22 MP-B0027 n 0
arm roller (synthetic roller)
a a a a a a
TRANSMISSION
Cleaning
MAINB22 Degreasing/Checking the BO08 MP-B0003 n 0
toothing on the blow wheel a a a a a a
drive ring and the drive gear
MAINB747 Cleaning of the main drive BO08 AM-B0026 n 0
lubricant in excess
Greasing
MAINB38 Greasing the transmission BO08 MP-B0075 n 0
brace bearing
a a a a a a
MAINB43 Draining the reducer motor BO08 Forthcoming n 0 a a
Replacing
MAINB126 Replacing the transmission BO19 MP-B0047 n 0
belts (wheel)
a a
MAINB128 Replacing the transmission HN75 MP-B0047 n 0
belts (oven)
a a
MAINB161 Replacing transmission belt of HN00 MP-B0047 n 0
preform infeed plate
a a
MAINB162 Replacing the bearings of the HN00 MP-B0046 n 0
belt tensioners (infeed wheel)
a a
MAINB225 Replacing the bearings of the BO19 MP-B0046 n 0
belt tensioner
a a
WHEEL
Cleaning
MAINB510 Cleaning and checking the B010 MP-B0072 n 0
molds outside the machine
Greasing
MAINB36 Filling the grease tank BN40 AM-B0039 n 0 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
7/8 Printed on 23/05/2022 13:33

Stopped
Dates
In production
Hours 1500 3000 4500 6000 7500 9000 10500 12000 13500 15000 16500 18000 19500 21000 22500 24000 25500 27000 28500 30000 31500 33000 34500 36000
Out of machine
Procedure Machine
Sheet Status
Inspection
MAIN10771 Checking of the loaded B010 MP-B0239 n 0
electrical boxes fastenings
a a a a a a
MAIN10856 Visual checking of the correct BN01 AM-B0090 n 0
blower wheel (driving crown a a a a a a
ring) teeth lubrication
MAINB56 Visual inspection of the B010 AM-B0026 n 0
reducer motor
MAINB60 Checking the operation of the BB04 MP-B0235 n 0
manual rotation safety system
dedicated to "standard"
motorization
MAINB61 Checking the mold support B010 MP-B0086 n 0
unit safety devices
MAINB64 Check the brake pads B010 MP-B0010 n 0 a a a a a a a a a a a a
Replacing
MAINB91 Replacing the filters on the B010 MP-B0089 n 0
blow wheel electrical boxes
Visa
8/8 Printed on 23/05/2022 13:33

Global Maintenance Plan
Numb
Assembly Hidden time Procedure er of Machine
Module Activity Cod ID Activity Description Activity Types Freq. Hours Cycles Note Time (min) Qty Level Skill Wear cause
Number (min) Sheet techni Status
cians
SBO20M#120235
ALL MODULES
MAIN10219 Checking the condition of the air pressure circuits Inspection Three years 18000 0 30.0 0.0 1 MP-B0197 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
MAIN11117 Maintenance Rotation kit Replacing Six months 3000 0 Offset 0.0 0.0 1 4 Mechanical 0 Stopped Producing
MAIN11182 Visual inspection with/or machine lighting devices test Inspection Yearly 6000 0 5.0 0.0 1 MP-B0250 1 Electrical 1 Stopped All
Mechanical &
MAIN11183 Cleaning the machine ligthing devices Cleaning Yearly 6000 0 20.0 0.0 1 MP-B0250 1 1 Stopped All
Electrical
MAIN11184 Replacing the lamps/tubes of the machine lighting devices Replacing 0 0 Cond. 5.0 0.0 1 MP-B0251 2 Electrical 1 Stopped All
Cleaning the transfer table and elements in contact with the item
MAINB1 Cleaning 0 0 Cond. 20.0 0.0 1 AM-B0004 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
- excluding stretching station (best practice)
MAINB14 Cleaning the blower photo-electric cells Cleaning Quarterly 1500 0 5.0 0.0 1 AM-B0028 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
MAINB157 Checking the air leaks from preforms feeder Inspection Monthly 500 0 0.0 1.5 1 AM-B0021 1 Mechanical 1 In production Rotating
Cleaning the parts in contact with the feeder preform (excluding

MAINB159 Cleaning Weekly 125 0 20.0 0.0 1 AM-B0022 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
conveyor belts and hopper)
MAINB17 Cleaning the filters on the hydraulic circuits Cleaning Monthly 500 0 3.0 0.0 1 AM-B0008 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
MAINB20 Checking / degreasing the automatically greased cams Inspection Yearly 6000 0 90.0 0.0 1 MP-B0011 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
MAINB28 Cleaning the cover of the 40µm filter on the 7-bar line Cleaning Yearly 6000 0 3.2 0.0 1 MP-B0232 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
MAINB3 External cleaning of the machine and glass surfaces (best practice) Cleaning 0 0 Cond. 0.0 15.0 1 AM-B0063 1 Mechanical 1 In production Rotating
MAINB339 Replacing the PLC backup batteries Replacing Yearly 6000 0 2.0 0.0 1 MP-B0095 3 Electrical 1 Stopped Rotating
Visually checking the centralized automatic lubrication system

MAINB393 Greasing Monthly 500 0 5.0 0.0 1 AM-B0090 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
(cams, guiding rails, drive ring)
MAINB4 Emptying the preform and bottle recycle bins (best practice) Cleaning 0 0 Cond. 0.0 2.0 1 AM-B0001 1 Mechanical 1 In production Rotating
Visually checking the circuit cleanliness/condition of pneumatic

MAINB404 Inspection Six months 3000 0 2.0 0.0 1 MP-B0233 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
and hydraulic hoses
MAINB5 Cleaning the machine plastron frame (best practice) Cleaning 0 0 Cond. 60.0 0.0 1 AM-B0087 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
MAINB54 Sound check for air leaks Inspection Yearly 6000 0 0.0 3.0 1 MP-B0236 1 Mechanical 1 In production Rotating
MAINB55 Checking for water leaks on the hydraulic circuit Inspection Monthly 500 0 2.0 0.0 1 AM-B0009 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
MAINB57 Checking the operation of the signalling column Inspection Six months 3000 0 1.0 0.0 1 MP-B0234 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
MAINB590 Greasing the molds ("KOHLOX" molds excluded) Greasing Weekly 125 0 1.0 0.0 1 AM-B0036 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
MAINB62 Checking the tripping sensors of the torque limiters Inspection Six months 3000 0 15.0 0.0 1 MP-B0006 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Out of
MAINB63 Checking the quality of the water Inspection Yearly 6000 0 0.0 30.0 1 MP-B0007 3 Mechanical 1 Rotating
machine
Checking the operation of the machine emergency stop buttons
MAINB65 Inspection Six months 3000 0 20.0 0.0 1 MP-B0087 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
and door locking in JOG mode
MAINB66 Checking the electrical connections Inspection Yearly 6000 0 30.0 0.0 1 Contact SIDEL 4 Electrical 1 Stopped Rotating
MAINB67 Checking the tension of the transmission belts Inspection Six months 3000 0 Offset 20.0 0.0 1 MP-B0012 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Mechanical &
MAINB676 Checking doors interlocking and safety switch Inspection Six months 3000 0 10.0 0.0 1 MP-B0087 2 1 Stopped Rotating
Electrical
MAINB748 Checking the transmission belt alignment Inspection Six months 3000 0 Offset 40.0 0.0 1 MP-B0013 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
1/7 Printed on 23/05/2022 13:31

Numb
cians
SBO20M#120235
ENERGY
BS00 1159140904 MAINB134 Replacing the water rotary union Replacing 0 0 Cond. 1,200.0 0.0 1 Contact SIDEL 5 Mechanical 2 Stopped Rotating
Mechanical &
BS01 1174299107 MAINB129 35JT01 Replacing the rotating electrical manifold Replacing 0 0 Cond. 360.0 0.0 1 Contact SIDEL 4 2 Stopped Rotating
Electrical
BS01 1174299107 MAINB130 35JT01 Replacing the air rotary union Replacing Yearly 6000 0 120.0 0.0 1 MP-B0036 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BS02 1159446406 MAINB116 Replacing the filters of the onboard skid (reduction line) Replacing Yearly 6000 0 6.0 0.0 1 MP-B0031 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BS02 1159446406 MAINB117 Replacing the onboard skid filters (pre-blow line) Replacing 0 0 Cond. 3.0 0.0 1 MP-B0031 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BS02 1159446406 MAINB547 Replacing the air pressure reduction circuit 40/10b silencers Replacing Yearly 6000 0 2.0 0.0 1 MP-B0032 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BS05 1159472306 MAINB118 Replacing the filter cartridge on the double air recovery system Replacing 0 0 Cond. 6.5 0.0 1 MP-B0031 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BS47 1178958905 MAIN10660 Replacing the 7B line air skid silencer Replacing Yearly 6000 0 5.0 0.0 1 MP-B0032 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BS47 1178958905 MAINB101 Replacing the 7B air line skid filters Replacing Yearly 6000 0 5.0 0.0 1 MP-B0031 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BS47 1178958905 MAINB104 Replacing the filter on the 40-bar line of the air skid Replacing 0 0 Cond. 10.0 0.0 1 MP-B0031 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BS47 1178958905 MAINB546 Replacing the 40B air line skid silencers Replacing Yearly 6000 0 5.0 0.0 1 MP-B0032 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Global
BS47 1178958905 MAINB715 Removing / installing a 40 bar air pressure regulator 0 0 Cond. 30.0 0.0 1 4 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
maintenance
BS47 1178958905 MAINB716 Reconditioning the 40 bar air pressure regulators Refurbishment 0 0 Cond. 120.0 0.0 1 4 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BT00 1160053607 MAINB132 Replacing the strainer on the hydraulic panel Replacing 0 0 Cond. 5.0 0.0 1 Forthcoming 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
STATION
BQ02 1180888703 MAIN10721 Greasing the mold support unit locking pins with LubA36 Greasing Weekly 125 0 2.5 [50.0] 0.0 20 AM-B0034 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ02 1180888703 MAIN10722 Cleaning of locking pins on mold support units (LubA36) Cleaning Monthly 500 0 3.0 [60.0] 0.0 20 AM-B0015 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Global
BQ02 1180888703 MAIN10729 Removing a mold & mold base 0 0 Cond. 5.0 [100.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0100 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
maintenance
Global
BQ02 1180888703 MAIN11062 Removing the compensation boxes Two years 12000 0 10.0 [200.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0024 3 Mechanical 1 In production Rotating
maintenance
Global
BQ02 1180888703 MAIN11063 Installing the compensation boxes Two years 12000 0 10.0 [200.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0024 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
maintenance
Global
BQ02 1180888703 MAIN11074 Installing a mold and a mold base 0 0 Cond. 5.0 [100.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0100 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
maintenance
BQ02 1180888703 MAIN11075 Checking of the contact area Inspection 0 0 Cond. 2.0 [40.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0100 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Cleaning and greasing the holding box of the mold support unit
BQ02 1180888703 MAINB21 Cleaning Six months 3000 0 Offset 8.0 [160.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0002 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
locking pins
BQ02 1180888703 MAINB312 Greasing of MSU main shaft Greasing Six months 3000 0 3.0 [60.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0112 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ02 1180888703 MAINB407 Replacing the compensation boxes Replacing Two years 12000 0 8.0 [160.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0024 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ02 1180888703 MAINB429 Checking the mold-support unit hinge Inspection Yearly 6000 0 5.0 [100.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0118 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ02 1180888703 MAINB465 Replacing the mold-support unit hinge Refurbishment 0 0 Cond. 120.0 [2,400.0] 0.0 20 Contact SIDEL 4 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Cleaning and checking the molds inside the Matrix machine (best
BQ02 1180888703 MAINB589 Cleaning 0 0 Cond. 2.0 [40.0] 0.0 20 AM-B0012 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
practice)
BQ02 1180888703 MAINB666 Checking the compensation boxes Inspection Two years 12000 0 Offset 10.0 [200.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0205 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ02 1180888703 MAINB80 Replacing the forward and rear slides on the mold support unit Replacing 0 0 Cond. 20.0 [400.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0024 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ02 1180888703 MAINB84 Replacing the locking synthetic rollers of the mold support units Replacing Yearly 6000 0 1.5 [30.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0025 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
2/7 Printed on 23/05/2022 13:31

Numb
cians
SBO20M#120235
STATION
Replacing the holding rollers of the mold support unit locking
BQ02 1180888703 MAINB86 Replacing Two years 12000 0 12.0 [240.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0002 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
system
BQ04 1161117703 MAINB32 Greasing the mold base support guides Greasing Six months 3000 0 2.0 [40.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0076 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ04 1161117703 MAINB416 Replacing the mold base support slides Replacing 0 0 Cond. 26.0 [520.0] 0.0 20 Contact SIDEL 4 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ04 1161117703 MAINB505 Checking the mold base slides Inspection Yearly 6000 0 5.0 [100.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0120 2 Mechanical 2 Stopped Rotating
BQ04 1161117703 MAINB565 Replacing the mold base roller safety pin Replacing 0 0 Cond. 2.0 [40.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0033 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ04 1161117703 MAINB566 Checking the mold base safety pin of the MATRIX machine Inspection Yearly 6000 0 1.0 [20.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0137 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ04 1161117703 MAINB81 Replacing the mold base support assembly up/down rollers Replacing Two years 12000 0 4.0 [80.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0146 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ06 1153479405 MAINB453 Checking the shell support height Inspection Yearly 6000 0 1.0 [20.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0119 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ06 1153479405 MAINB71 Replacing the compensation seals Replacing Yearly 6000 0 5.0 [100.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0024 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ12 1160885602 MAINB82 Replacing the controlled compensation solenoid valves Replacing Two years 12000 0 8.0 [160.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0038 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Replacing the silencers of the mold support unit compensation

BQ12 1160885602 MAINB83 Replacing Yearly 6000 0 3.0 [60.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0023 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
solenoid valves
BQ13 1156722202 MAINB29 Greasing the base mold carriage (PARKER excluded) Greasing Six months 3000 0 0.5 [10.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0081 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ20 1158379402 MAINB52 Checking the position of the mold O/C levers Inspection Two years 12000 0 Offset 5.0 [100.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0001 3 Mechanical 2 Stopped Rotating
BQ20 1158379402 MAINB99 Replacing the rollers of the mold opening/ closing levers Replacing Two years 12000 0 5.0 [100.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0030 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ24 1185390701 MAINB229 Replacing the mold support unit dampers Replacing Yearly 6000 0 1.0 [20.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0026 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ41 1158597009 MAINB120 Replacing the guide rings on the stretching rods Replacing Six months 3000 0 10.0 [200.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0021 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ41 1158597009 MAINB88 Replacing the nozzle ball-bearing bushes Replacing Two years 12000 0 10.0 [200.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0022 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ42 1180203304 MAIN10776 Replacing the 40b lip seal of the nozzle sealing block Replacing Two years 12000 0 2.0 [40.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0022 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ42 1180203304 MAINB143 Reconditionning the nozzle sealing block (40b lip seal excluded) Refurbishment Yearly 6000 0 15.0 [300.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0022 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Global
BQ48 1173934501 MAIN10727 Removing a blow block 0 0 Cond. 8.0 [160.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0193 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
maintenance
Global
BQ48 1173934501 MAIN11068 Installing a blowing valve 0 0 Cond. 8.0 [160.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0193 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
maintenance
BQ48 1173934501 MAINB246 Reconditioning the blowing pistons Refurbishment Yearly 6000 0 40.0 [800.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0039 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ48 1173934501 MAINB250 Replacing the FESTO blow block Replacing 0 0 Cond. 15.0 [300.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0193 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Out of
BQ48 1173934501 MAINB402 Greasing the blowing block pistons Greasing Yearly 6000 0 Offset 30.0 [600.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0103 3 Mechanical 1 Rotating
machine
BQ52 1188236902 MAIN10301 Replacing the stretching system slide guide Replacing 0 0 Cond. 120.0 [2,400.0] 0.0 20 Contact SIDEL 4 Mechanical 2 Stopped Rotating
BQ55 1174513905 MAIN10465 Check of one stretching rail (only one) Inspection Six months 3000 0 Offset 60.0 0.0 20 MP-B0223 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Global
BQ55 1174513905 MAIN10728 Removing a stretching rod 0 0 Cond. 2.0 [40.0] 0.0 20 CO-B0002 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
maintenance
BQ55 1174513905 MAINB33 Greasing the stretching guides Greasing Six months 3000 0 3.0 [60.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0073 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ55 1174513905 MAINB710 Cleaning and checking the surface condition of the magnet ways Cleaning 0 0 Cond. 5.0 [100.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0180 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ55 1174513905 MAINB713 Checking the locking fingers of the stretching rods Inspection Quarterly 1500 0 2.7 [54.0] 0.0 20 AM-B0086 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BQ57 1174633004 MAINB337 Replacing the anti-torque bushings Replacing Yearly 6000 0 6.0 [120.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0022 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BS32 1151020704 MAINB98 Replacing the exhaust silencers Replacing Yearly 6000 0 3.5 [70.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0029 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
3/7 Printed on 23/05/2022 13:31

Numb
cians
SBO20M#120235
WHEEL
B010 90000056002 MAIN10771 Checking of the loaded electrical boxes fastenings Inspection Yearly 6000 0 2.0 0.0 1 MP-B0239 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Cleaning the stretching rods and visual checking of the magnet

B010 90000056002 MAINB10 Cleaning Monthly 500 0 3.0 0.0 1 AM-B0010 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
ways
B010 90000056002 MAINB510 Cleaning and checking the molds outside the machine Cleaning Six months 3000 0 5.0 0.0 1 MP-B0072 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
B010 90000056002 MAINB56 Visual inspection of the reducer motor Inspection Quarterly 1500 0 1.0 0.0 1 AM-B0026 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Cleaning the contact surfaces between the mold and the nozzle
B010 90000056002 MAINB6 Cleaning Weekly 125 0 0.7 0.0 1 AM-B0005 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
nose
B010 90000056002 MAINB61 Checking the mold support unit safety devices Inspection Six months 3000 0 15.0 0.0 1 MP-B0086 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
B010 90000056002 MAINB64 Check the brake pads Inspection Six months 3000 0 10.0 0.0 1 MP-B0010 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
B010 90000056002 MAINB7 Cleaning the mold locking cam Cleaning Weekly 125 0 2.0 0.0 1 AM-B0011 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
B010 90000056002 MAINB8 Cleaning the mold unlocking cam Cleaning Weekly 125 0 3.0 0.0 1 AM-B0011 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Mechanical &
B010 90000056002 MAINB91 Replacing the filters on the blow wheel electrical boxes Replacing Six months 3000 0 15.0 0.0 1 MP-B0089 2 1 Stopped Rotating
Electrical
Checking the operation of the manual rotation safety system
BB04 1161186801 MAINB60 Inspection Six months 3000 0 1.0 0.0 1 MP-B0235 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
dedicated to "standard" motorization
Visual checking of the correct blower wheel (driving crown ring)
BN01 1157278703 MAIN10856 Inspection Yearly 6000 0 Offset 2.0 0.0 1 AM-B0090 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
teeth lubrication
BN40 1180377402 MAINB36 Filling the grease tank Greasing Quarterly 1500 0 0.0 9.0 1 AM-B0039 1 Mechanical 1 In production Rotating
TRANSMISSION
BO00 1150752805 MAINB131 Replacing the brake pads Replacing 0 0 Cond. 22.0 0.0 1 MP-B0010 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BO01 1165110504 MAINB100 Replacing silencers on the braking plate Replacing 0 0 Cond. 2.5 0.0 1 MP-B0032 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Degreasing/Checking the toothing on the blow wheel drive ring

BO08 1188505202 MAINB22 Cleaning Yearly 6000 0 45.0 0.0 1 MP-B0003 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
and the drive gear
BO08 1188505202 MAINB38 Greasing the transmission brace bearing Greasing Yearly 6000 0 2.0 0.0 1 MP-B0075 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BO08 1188505202 MAINB43 Draining the reducer motor Greasing Three years 18000 0 20.0 0.0 1 Forthcoming 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BO08 1188505202 MAINB747 Cleaning of the main drive lubricant in excess Cleaning Quarterly 1500 0 10.0 0.0 1 AM-B0026 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BO19 1188502101 MAINB126 Replacing the transmission belts (wheel) Replacing Three years 18000 0 45.0 0.0 1 MP-B0047 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BO19 1188502101 MAINB225 Replacing the bearings of the belt tensioner Replacing Three years 18000 0 5.0 0.0 1 MP-B0046 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HN00 1159669405 MAINB161 Replacing transmission belt of preform infeed plate Replacing Three years 18000 0 20.0 0.0 1 MP-B0047 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HN00 1159669405 MAINB162 Replacing the bearings of the belt tensioners (infeed wheel) Replacing Three years 18000 0 20.0 0.0 1 MP-B0046 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HN75 1150386801 MAINB128 Replacing the transmission belts (oven) Replacing Three years 18000 0 30.0 0.0 1 MP-B0047 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HN75 1150386801 MAINB696 Replacing the self-lub bearing of the oven transmission Replacing 0 0 Cond. 15.0 0.0 1 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
TRANSFER
Global
BP00 1147314309 MAIN10896 Removing a transfer arm Yearly 6000 0 5.0 [50.0] 0.0 10 MP-B0051 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
maintenance
Global
BP00 1147314309 MAIN11067 Installing a tranfer arm Yearly 6000 0 5.0 [50.0] 0.0 10 MP-B0051 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
maintenance
BP00 1147314309 MAINB121 Replacing the transfer arm springs Replacing Two years 12000 0 2.0 [20.0] 0.0 10 MP-B0042 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Cleaning the preform transfer cams (synthetic rollers

BP00 1147314309 MAINB16 Cleaning Monthly 500 0 15.0 0.0 10 AM-B0007 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
configuration)
4/7 Printed on 23/05/2022 13:31

Numb
cians
SBO20M#120235
TRANSFER
BP00 1147314309 MAINB37 Greasing the transfer arm guides Greasing Six months 3000 0 2.0 [20.0] 0.0 10 MP-B0074 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BP00 1147314309 MAINB94 Replacing the transfer arm rollers (synthetic roller) Replacing Yearly 6000 0 3.5 [35.0] 0.0 10 MP-B0027 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Global
BP01 1147314309 MAIN10896 Removing a transfer arm Yearly 6000 0 5.0 [50.0] 0.0 10 MP-B0051 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
maintenance
Global
BP01 1147314309 MAIN11067 Installing a tranfer arm Yearly 6000 0 5.0 [50.0] 0.0 10 MP-B0051 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
maintenance
BP01 1147314309 MAINB121 Replacing the transfer arm springs Replacing Two years 12000 0 2.0 [20.0] 0.0 10 MP-B0042 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BP01 1147314309 MAINB15 Cleaning the bottle transfer cams (synthetic rollers configuration) Cleaning Monthly 500 0 15.0 0.0 10 AM-B0007 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BP01 1147314309 MAINB37 Greasing the transfer arm guides Greasing Six months 3000 0 2.0 [20.0] 0.0 10 MP-B0074 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BP01 1147314309 MAINB94 Replacing the transfer arm rollers (synthetic roller) Replacing Yearly 6000 0 3.5 [35.0] 0.0 10 MP-B0027 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BP21 1154773706 MAINB95 Replacing the head transfer arm roller (synthetic roller) Replacing Yearly 6000 0 1.0 [10.0] 0.0 10 MP-B0027 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BP22 1154773706 MAINB95 Replacing the head transfer arm roller (synthetic roller) Replacing Yearly 6000 0 1.0 [10.0] 0.0 10 MP-B0027 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BP35 1124066311 MAINB137 Replacing the filters on the preform and bottle ejection cylinders Replacing Two years 12000 0 5.0 0.0 1 MP-B0050 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BP35 1124066311 MAINB714 Replacing the bottles and preforms ejection cylinders Replacing 0 0 Cond. 60.0 0.0 1 MP-B0187 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BP36 1144648210 MAINB137 Replacing the filters on the preform and bottle ejection cylinders Replacing Two years 12000 0 5.0 0.0 1 MP-B0050 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BP36 1144648210 MAINB615 Reconditioning the bottle outfeed retractable guide Refurbishment 0 0 Cond. 15.0 0.0 1 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BP36 1144648210 MAIN10540 10VL01 Replacing the cylinder of the bottles outfeed wheel ejection guide Replacing 0 0 Cond. 30.0 0.0 1 MP-B0188 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BP36 1144648210 MAINB615 BOSCH Reconditioning the bottle outfeed retractable guide Refurbishment 0 0 Cond. 15.0 0.0 1 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
STRUCTURE & CAMS

BN25 1173512404 MAIN10796 Checking the locking retractable cam Inspection Yearly 6000 0 5.0 0.0 1 Forthcoming 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BN25 1173512404 MAINB87 Reconditioning the locking retractable cam Refurbishment 0 0 Cond. 120.0 0.0 1 Forthcoming 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
BN32 1173784601 MAINB144 Reconditioning the mold opening/closing retractable cam Refurbishment 0 0 Cond. 90.0 0.0 1 MP-B0041 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
OVEN
B020 90000056001 MAINB18 Cleaning the infrared camera(s) Cleaning Monthly 500 0 3.0 0.0 1 AM-B0030 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Degreasing / checking the toothing on the oven drive ring and

B020 90000056001 MAINB23 Cleaning Six months 3000 0 46.0 0.0 1 MP-B0004 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
the drive pinion
Greasing the preform ejection cam and no-load protection cam
B020 90000056001 MAINB34 Greasing Weekly 125 0 1.0 0.0 1 AM-B0035 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
(option)
B020 90000056001 MAINB35 Greasing the upper notches of the oven wheel and the forks Greasing Monthly 500 0 5.0 0.0 1 AM-B0038 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
B020 90000056001 MAINB39 Greasing the oven bearings Greasing Yearly 6000 0 2.0 0.0 1 MP-B0077 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
B020 90000056001 MAINB42 Greasing the tensioner wheel guide Greasing Three years 18000 0 2.0 0.0 1 MP-B0079 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Checking the stretching of the spindle chain and spring tension

B020 90000056001 MAINB58 Inspection Quarterly 1500 0 1.0 0.0 1 AM-B0016 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
for matrix oven
B020 90000056001 MAINB59 Checking the tension of the spindle rotation fixed chain Inspection Quarterly 1500 0 4.0 0.0 1 AM-B0018 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Cleaning and checking the spindle noses and ejectors (best

B020 90000056001 MAINB612 Cleaning 0 0 Cond. 30.0 0.0 1 AM-B0053 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
practice)
Replacing the silencer of the badly loaded preform ejection
HN20 1159549203 MAINB136 Replacing Yearly 6000 0 7.5 0.0 1 MP-B0032 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
cylinder
5/7 Printed on 23/05/2022 13:31

Numb
cians
SBO20M#120235
OVEN
HN35 1150164704 MAINB90 Replacing the Perma grease cartridges Replacing Six months 3000 0 20.0 0.0 1 MP-B0020 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HN60 1146541905 MAINB146 Full reconditioning of oven wheel Refurbishment Three years 18000 0 705.6 0.0 1 MP-B0035 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HN63 1151252806 MAIN10529 Replacing the oven spindles turning cams Replacing 0 0 Cond. 120.0 0.0 1 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Checking and cleaning the spindle rollers, the guide rails and the
HP30 1147297102 MAIN10312 Cleaning Six months 3000 0 Offset 60.0 0.0 150 MP-B0152 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
turnover cams on Matrix oven
HP30 1147297102 MAIN10313 Reconditioning the Matrix oven reinforced spindles chain Refurbishment Two years 12000 0 Offset 5.0 [750.0] 0.0 150 MP-B0034 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HP30 1147297102 MAIN10314 Replacing the Matrix oven reinforced spindles chain Replacing Six Years 36000 0 2.2 [330.0] 0.0 150 MP-B0043 3 Mechanical 2 Stopped Rotating
HP30 1147297102 MAINB685 Checking the spindle pins (reinforced chain specification) Inspection Yearly 6000 0 60.0 0.0 150 MP-B0177 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HP38 1150358304 MAINB122 Replacing the fixed chains and the fixed chain guides Replacing Six Years 36000 0 90.0 0.0 1 MP-B0044 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Replacing the lamps / checking the lamp base protections,

HQA2 1146170005 MAINB119 Replacing Yearly 6000 0 0.0 17.0 [136.0] 8 MP-B0090 3 Electrical 1 Stopped Rotating
ceramic reflectors and quartz bars
HQA2 1146170005 MAINB154 Replacing the protection on the lamp bases Replacing 0 0 Cond. 2.0 [16.0] 0.0 8 MP-B0090 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HQA2 1146170005 MAINB24 Cleaning / checking the infrared oven modules Cleaning Six months 3000 0 2.0 [16.0] 0.0 8 MP-B0008 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HQA2 1146170005 MAINB25 Checking / cleaning the dummy lamps Cleaning Six months 3000 0 1.0 [8.0] 0.0 8 MP-B0009 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HQA2 1146170005 MAINB26 Checking / cleaning the oven slit reflectors Cleaning Six months 3000 0 2.2 [17.6] 0.0 8 MP-B0009 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HQB2 1160121702 MAINB154 Replacing the protection on the lamp bases Replacing 0 0 Cond. 2.0 [8.0] 0.0 4 MP-B0090 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HQB2 1160121702 MAINB328 Replacing quartz bars Replacing 0 0 Cond. 2.0 [8.0] 0.0 4 MP-B0176 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Replacing the lamps / checking the lamp base protections,

HQF3 1146170005 MAINB119 Replacing Yearly 6000 0 0.0 17.0 [204.0] 12 MP-B0090 3 Electrical 1 Stopped Rotating
ceramic reflectors and quartz bars
HQF3 1146170005 MAINB154 Replacing the protection on the lamp bases Replacing 0 0 Cond. 2.0 [24.0] 0.0 12 MP-B0090 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HQF3 1146170005 MAINB24 Cleaning / checking the infrared oven modules Cleaning Six months 3000 0 2.0 [24.0] 0.0 12 MP-B0008 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HQF3 1146170005 MAINB25 Checking / cleaning the dummy lamps Cleaning Six months 3000 0 1.0 [12.0] 0.0 12 MP-B0009 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HQF3 1146170005 MAINB26 Checking / cleaning the oven slit reflectors Cleaning Six months 3000 0 2.2 [26.4] 0.0 12 MP-B0009 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HQG3 1160121702 MAINB154 Replacing the protection on the lamp bases Replacing 0 0 Cond. 2.0 [12.0] 0.0 6 MP-B0090 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HQG3 1160121702 MAINB328 Replacing quartz bars Replacing 0 0 Cond. 2.0 [12.0] 0.0 6 MP-B0176 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HSA4 1165129803 MAINB563 Cleaning the oven ventilation filters Cleaning Quarterly 1500 0 20.0 0.0 1 AM-B0044 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HSA4 1165129803 MAINB89 Replacing the oven ventilation filters Replacing Six months 3000 0 10.0 0.0 1 MP-B0019 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HSF4 1165131603 MAINB563 Cleaning the oven ventilation filters Cleaning Quarterly 1500 0 20.0 0.0 1 AM-B0044 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HSF4 1165131603 MAINB89 Replacing the oven ventilation filters Replacing Six months 3000 0 10.0 0.0 1 MP-B0019 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
HU06 1144315304 MAINB687 Replacing the oven hood extractor belts Replacing 0 0 Cond. 45.0 0.0 1 Component DOC 2 Mechanical 2 Stopped Rotating
FRAME
Checking / Cleaning of the air filter of the air dehumidifier V2
BY54 1180313002 MAIN10512 Inspection Quarterly 1500 0 3.0 0.0 1 AM-B0072 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
version
BY54 1180313002 MAIN10668 Replacing the air filter of the dehumidifier V2 Replacing 0 0 Cond. 5.0 0.0 1 Forthcoming 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Cleaning the hydraulic circuit filter of the air dehumidifier V2

BY54 1180313002 MAINB602 Cleaning Monthly 500 0 3.0 0.0 1 AM-B0055 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
version
BY54 1180313002 MAINB610 Checking the water quality of the air dehumidifier V2 version Inspection Weekly 125 0 1.0 0.0 1 AM-B0073 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
6/7 Printed on 23/05/2022 13:31

Numb
cians
SBO20M#120235
FRAME
HP35 1151197201 MAINB164 Replacing the quick fasteners of the oven fixed chain Replacing Six Years 36000 0 3.7 0.0 1 MP-B0044 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Eighteen
HT01 1146804905 MAINB97 Replacing the tensioner wheel sectors Replacing 9000 0 20.0 0.0 1 MP-B0028 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
months
PREFORM FEEDER
B040 90000056000 MAINB166 Cleaning the feeder photoelectric cells Cleaning Monthly 500 0 3.0 0.0 1 AM-B0029 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
B040 90000056000 MAINB167 Functional check of the feeder emergency stop buttons Inspection Six months 3000 0 2.0 0.0 1 MP-B0088 2 Electrical 1 Stopped Rotating
B040 90000056000 MAINB567 Replacing the backup battery of the preforms feeder Replacing Yearly 6000 0 2.0 0.0 1 MP-B0096 3 Electrical 1 Stopped Rotating
Mechanical &
B040 90000056000 MAINB628 Cleaning the hopper and glass surfaces of the feeder Cleaning Monthly 500 0 30.0 0.0 1 AM-B0025 1 1 Stopped Rotating
Electrical
PA46 1155282402 MAINB343 Replacing the hopper electrical box filter Replacing Six months 3000 0 2.0 0.0 1 MP-B0093 2 Electrical 1 Stopped Rotating
PP10 1183162301 MAIN10298 Replacing the orienting roller transmission belt Replacing 0 0 Cond. 15.0 0.0 1 MP-B0055 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
Checking the condition of the transmission belt of the orienting

PP10 1183162301 MAINB338 Inspection Monthly 500 0 2.0 0.0 1 AM-B0024 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
rollers
Checking the condition of the central guide rollers of the
PP11 1154305902 MAINB160 Inspection Six months 3000 0 2.0 0.0 1 MP-B0014 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
orienting rollers
Checking the condition of the transmission belt of the orienting
PP11 1154305902 MAINB338 Inspection Monthly 500 0 2.0 0.0 1 AM-B0024 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
rollers
Checking the condition of the central guide rollers of the
PP14 1154264101 MAINB160 Inspection Six months 3000 0 2.0 0.0 1 MP-B0014 1 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
orienting rollers
PP35 1181223903 MAINB554 Replacing the silencers on the stabilization rail Replacing Yearly 6000 0 5.0 0.0 1 MP-B0032 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
PERSO
XB00 1180260804 MAINB545 Reconditioning the nozzle tip Refurbishment Six months 3000 0 5.0 [100.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0022 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
XB02 1183367002 MAINB553 Replacing the neck rim retainer end-piece of the nozzle tips Replacing Yearly 6000 0 2.0 [40.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0022 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
XB03 1115528904 MAINB142 Replacing the heel nozzle seal (Mx) Replacing Yearly 6000 0 2.0 [40.0] 0.0 20 MP-B0022 3 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
XH20 1166461103 MAINB686 Reconditioning the spindle noses Refurbishment 0 0 Cond. 15.0 [4,560.0] 0.0 304 MP-B0155 2 Mechanical 1 Stopped Rotating
7/7 Printed on 23/05/2022 13:31

Grease plan
Grease Lub
Intervals (h) Activity Activity Description Procedure Sheet Designation Quantity
Code
SBO20M#120235
125 MAIN10721 Greasing the mold support unit locking pins with LubA36 AM-B0034 LUBA36 KLUBERFOOD NH1 94-120 3 cc / Machine
500 MAIN10722 Cleaning of locking pins on mold support units (LubA36) AM-B0015 LUBA36 KLUBERFOOD NH1 94-120 2 cc / Station
3000 MAINB21 Cleaning and greasing the holding box of the mold support unit locking pins MP-B0002 LUBA18 QUINPLEX 4024 2 cc / Station
3000 MAINB29 Greasing the base mold carriage (PARKER excluded) MP-B0081 LUBA21 KLUBERFOOD NH1 94 - 402 2 cc / Station
3000 MAINB312 Greasing of MSU main shaft MP-B0112 LUBA21 KLUBERFOOD NH1 94 - 402 12 cc / Station
3000 MAINB32 Greasing the mold base support guides MP-B0076 LUBA19 KLUBERSYNTH UH1 14-31 1 cc / Station
3000 MAINB33 Greasing the stretching guides MP-B0073 LUBA19 KLUBERSYNTH UH1 14-31 2 cc / Station
125 MAINB34 Greasing the preform ejection cam and no-load protection cam (option) AM-B0035 LUBA21 KLUBERFOOD NH1 94 - 402 3 cc / Machine
500 MAINB35 Greasing the upper notches of the oven wheel and the forks AM-B0038 LUBA21 KLUBERFOOD NH1 94 - 402 10 cc / Machine
1500 MAINB36 Filling the grease tank AM-B0039 LUBA21 KLUBERFOOD NH1 94 - 402 3000 cc / Machine
3000 MAINB37 Greasing the transfer arm guides MP-B0074 LUBA19 KLUBERSYNTH UH1 14-31 2 cc / Station
3000 MAINB37 Greasing the transfer arm guides MP-B0074 LUBA19 KLUBERSYNTH UH1 14-31 2 cc / Station
6000 MAINB38 Greasing the transmission brace bearing MP-B0075 LUBA21 KLUBERFOOD NH1 94 - 402 6 cc / Machine
6000 MAINB39 Greasing the oven bearings MP-B0077 LUBA21 KLUBERFOOD NH1 94 - 402 16 cc / Machine
6000 MAINB402 Greasing the blowing block pistons MP-B0103 LUBA35 KLUBER UNISILKON LCA3801 7 cc / Station
18000 MAINB42 Greasing the tensioner wheel guide MP-B0079 LUBA19 KLUBERSYNTH UH1 14-31 14 cc / Machine
18000 MAINB43 Draining the reducer motor Forthcoming LUBA20 KLUBERSYNTH 4 UH1 6-460 800 cc / Machine
125 MAINB590 Greasing the molds ("KOHLOX" molds excluded) AM-B0036 LUBA21 KLUBERFOOD NH1 94 - 402 2 cc / Station
3000 MAINB90 Replacing the Perma grease cartridges MP-B0020 LUBA13 KLUBERSYNTH UH1 14-151 480 cc / Machine
1/1 Printed on 23/05/2022 13:38

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Marquage suivant la spécification SPE000

Marking according to specification SPE000
P
P
PIGNON COMMANDE
DRIVE PINION
O
O
PIGNON COMMANDE
DRIVE PINION
N
N
POULIE COMMANDE
DRIVE PINION
M
M
ROUE DE SOUFFLAGE T1
L
L
BLOW WHEEL
MOTOREDUCTEUR
REDUCER MOTOR
POULIE MOTEUR
VERS COMMANDE
MOTOR PULLEY
K
K
THROUGH CONTROL
J
J
I
I
POULIE MOTEUR VERS TRANSFERT
MOTOR PULLEY THROUGH TRANSFER
T2
H
H
G
G
POULIE TRANSFERT BOUT
BOTTLE TRANSFER PULLEY
POULIE TRANSFERT
VERS MOTEUR
F
F
TRANSFER PULLEY
THROUGH MOTOR
E
E
T3
POULIE TRANSFERT PREF

PREFORM TRANSFER PULLEY
D
D
TRANSFERT TRANSFERT
BOUTEILLE PREFORME
BOTTLE TRANSFER PREFORM TRANSFER
ROUE DE SORTIE
OUTFEED WHEEL T4
16.03.2017 M.S CREATION DU PLAN 539251 01
C
C
Drawing creation
23.05.2017 J.A AJOUT GM SBO 18 CHP + GM SBO 22 CHP 545648 02

Blow wheel Drive pinion Motor pulley Motor pulley Transfer pulley Preform transfer pulley Bottle transfer pulley Belt tension Belt tension Belt tension Belt tension Belt tension
Drive pulley through transfer through control through motor GM SBO 18 CHP + GM SBO 22 CHP added
speed-up
23.08.2018 M.P MODIF SBO 18 CHP ET SBO 20 CHP 590871 03 b
Machine Roue de Pignon Poulie Poulie moteur Poulie moteur Poulie transfert Poulie Poulie Tension courroie Tension courroie T1 Tension courroie Tension courroie Tension courroie
soufflage commande commande vers transfert vers commande vers moteur transfert pref transfert bout T1 (50 AT15) speed-up (75 AT15) T2 (75 AT15) T3 (50 AT15) T4 (50 AT10) SBO 18 CHP and SBO 20 CHP revised
Date Nom Description n° modif Ind Maj Ind Min
SBO 16 CHP 141 dents 30 dents 52 dents 28 dents 47 dents 91dents 80 dents 64 dents 30 - 38 33 22
Matière / Material : Tolérance générales suivant
SBO 18 CHP (1400) 141 dents 30 dents 52 dents 30 dents 47 dents 78 dents 80 dents 80 dents 30 38 33 22 BLOWING & COATING DIVISION la spécification :
03 SBO 18 CHP (2000) 141 dents 30 dents 60 dents 27 dents 47 dents 99 dents 77 dents 63 dents 30 - 38 33 22 Sidel Blowing & Services
(sauf indications contraires)
General tolerances according
a SBO 20 CHP (1400) 141 dents 30 dents 52 dents 30 dents 47 dents 78 dents 80 dents 80 dents 30 38 33 22
Avenue de la patrouille de France
Octeville-sur-Mer
Fiche signalétique to specification :
/ Specification sheet : (unless otherwise stated)
B
B
03 SBO 20 CHP (2000) 141 dents 30 dents 52 dents 25 dents 47 dents 78 dents 78 dents 65 dents 30 - 38 33 22
BP 204 . 76053 Le Havre Cedex . France
a N° 10664182
SBO 22 CHP (2000) 141 dents 30 dents 50 dents 33 dents 47 dents 90 dents 72 dents 66 dents 30 - 38 33 22 Traitement / Treatment :
Désignation / Description :
Etats de surfaces :
SBO 16 MUPM 141 dents 30 dents 52 dents 30 dents 47 dents 78 dents 80 dents 80 dents 30 - 38 33 22 (sauf indications contraires)
Surface condition
SBO 16 GUPM 141 dents 30 dents 52 dents 30 dents 47 dents 78 dents 80 dents 80 dents 30 - 38 33 22 CINEMATIQUE TRANSMISSION GM BATCH D (Unless otherwise stated)
SBO 18 MUPM 141 dents 30 dents 52 dents 30 dents 47 dents 78 dents 80 dents 80 dents 30 - 38 33 22
SBO 18 GUPM 141 dents 30 dents 52 dents 30 dents 47 dents 78 dents 80 dents 80 dents 30 - 38 33 22
Date de validation / Release date : 24/10/2018
SBO 20 GUPM 141 dents 30 dents 52 dents 30 dents 47 dents 78 dents 80 dents 80 dents 30 - 38 33 22 TRANSMISSION KINEMATIC CHAIN
Masse / Mass = g
Dessiné par / Drawn by Date / Date Ech / Scale
SBO 24 MUPM 141 dents 30 dents 52 dents 30 dents 47 dents 78 dents 80 dents 80 dents 30 - 38 33 22 PASQUIER 23.08.2018 1:5
SBO 18 à 24 SPEED-UP 141 dents 30 dents 52 dents 30 dents 47 dents 78 dents 80 dents 80 dents - 30 38 33 22 Ce plan est la propriété de SIDEL et contient ou peut contenir des informations confidentielles d'origine SIDEL, incluant des secrets de fabrique. Ce plan et toutes les informations qu'il contient devront être gardés confidentiels par le destinataire et il ne
doit pas être divulgué à des tiers sans l'accord express de SIDEL. Ce plan ne sera pas utilisé directement ou indirectement par son destinataire sauf pour le but pour lequel il lui a été remis par SIDEL. Tous les droits de propriété intellectuelle, y compris le
Numéro / Number : Ind Maj Ind min Format Folio
A
SBO 26 à 34 SPEED-UP 141 dents 30 dents 52 dents 30 dents 47 dents 78 dents 80 dents 80 dents - 30 38 33 22 Copyright, sont réservés par SIDEL. Aucune garantie, expresse ou implicite, n'est accordée par SIDEL quant au bien-fondé, à l'exactitude, à la suffisance ou à l'absence de défaut dans l'information contenue dans ce plan ou vis-à-vis de droits de propriété
11735434- 03
A
intellectuelle de tiers.
This Drawing is SIDEL property and contains or may contain SIDEL confidential information, including trade secrets. This drawing and all the information contained therein
shall be kept strictly confidential by the recipient and shall is not tobe disclosed to any third party without SIDEL's express consent. This drawing shall not be used directly or
indirectly by the recipient except for the specific purpose for which this drawing is disclosed by SIDEL. All Intellectual Property Rights, including Copyright, are reserved by SIDEL.
No representation or warranty, express or implied, is made by SIDEL with respect to the truth, accuracy, sufficiency or absence of defect of the information contained in this drawing
b A0 1/1
or with respect to third party intellectual property rights
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
A
J
K
F
O
I
L
G
P
B
E
OBTAINED FROM:
8
8
GRAISSE LUB A 36 7
7
01 GRAISSE LUB A 21
d
GRAISSE LUB A 21 6
6
GRAISSE LUB A 36
GRAISSE LUB A 21
5
5
GRAISSE LUB A 21 GRAISSE LUB A 21
4
4
GRAISSE LUB A 27 GRAISSE LUB A 27
3
3
A B
05.03.2020 K.L CREATION DU PLAN 648447 01 d 2

2
C C
Date Name Description ECO Maj Ind Min Ind
Material : General tolerances according
to specification :
(unless otherwise stated)
Specification sheet :
Description Treatment :
Surface condition :
(Unless otherwise stated)
PLAN GRAISSAGE MUPM SPUP
A-A
1 : 2 B-B
1 : 2 A B
GREASING PLAN MUPM SPUP Release date : 23/4/2020
Mass = 16.47
Drawn by Date Scale
1
1
Leduey 05.03.2020 1:1

Number Maj Ind Min Ind Format Folio
This drawing is SIDEL property and contains or may contain confidential information, including copyright, trade secrets and intellectual
11851689- 01
property owned, protected or reserved by SIDEL. Consequently, without SIDEL written consent, this drawing and its content shall be
d A1 1/1
kept confidential by the recipient and shall not be disclosed to any third party. Unless otherwise agreed in writing by SIDEL, this
drawing can be used by its recipient only for the specific purpose, why it was communicated to it.No representation or warranty,
express or implied, is made by SIDEL with respect to the truth, accuracy, sufficiency or absence of defect of the information contained
therein or with respect to third party intellectual property rights.
C-C
1 : 2
P O N M L K F E D C B A
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P
OBTAINED FROM:
P
TABLEAUX TRANSMISSION LIAISON ROUE AVEC PREDIS
WHEEL CONNECTING TRANSMISSION TABLE (+2 modules et limiteur sur transfert à 50N.m)
Chassis roue PM / Wheel frame PM (small model)

CONFIGURATION STANDARD Pas Poulie transfert preforme Poulie arbre transmission Tension Fpt Fréquence (±5%) Tarage limiteur Fréquence (±5%) Tarage limiteur
Machine Courroie Universal Tension Fpt
TABLEAU DE CONTRÔLE PRETENSION Pitch Preform transfer pulley
Universal belt
Transmission shaft pulley Frequency (± 5%) Limiter calibration Frequency (± 5%) Limiter calibration
PRE-TENSION CONTROL PANEL
STANDARD CONFIGURATION SBO 6 60 AT10 24 dents/teeth 50 AT10 - 2640
P40
O
SBO 8 60 AT10 32 dents/teeth 50 AT10 -2680
O
Point de contrôle Tx REGLAGE LIMITEUR Tension Fpt Fréquence
Check point Tx Frequency SBO 6 60 AT10 30 dents/teeth 50 AT10 -2680
P50 60 AT10 120 dents/teeth 628 N 24,4 Hz +/- 1,2 Hz 120 N.m (80%)
T5 Voir le tableau transmission liaison roue SBO 8 60 AT10 40 dents/teeth 50 AT10 -2720
See wheel connecting transmission table
SBO 6 60 AT10 36 dents/teeth 50 AT10 -2700
P60
AVEC ALIMENTATION SBO 8 60 AT10 48 dents/teeth 50 AT10 -2760
STANDARD 30Nm 288 N 28.0 Hz ± 1.8 Hz
AVEC T6 30Nm 288 N 28.0 Hz ± 1.8 Hz

DEPOUSSIERAGE Chassis roue MM / Wheel frame MM (Medium model)
N
N
AVEC PREDIS 50Nm 480 N 36.0 Hz ± 1.8 Hz Pas Poulie transfert preforme Courroie Universal Courroie Matrix Poulie arbre transmission Tension Fpt Fréquence (±5%) Tarage limiteur Fréquence (±5%) Tarage limiteur
Pitch
Machine Preform transfer pulley Universal belt Matrix belt Transmission shaft pulley Frequency (± 5%) Limiter calibration
Tension Fpt Frequency (± 5%) Limiter calibration
SBO 6 60 AT10 24 dents/teeth 50 AT10 - 2890 50 AT10 - 2860

60 AT10 120 dents/teeth 631N 21.6 Hz +/- 1.1 Hz 120 N.m (80%)
SBO 8 60 AT10 32 dents/teeth / 50 AT10 - 2890 726 N 23,1 Hz +/- 1,1 Hz 138 N.m (92%)
SBO 10 60 AT15 30 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3075 50 AT15 - 3045 698 N 18 Hz +/- 0,9 Hz 150 N.m (55%) 791 N 19,1 Hz +/- 0,9 Hz 170 N.m (62%)
A A
SBO 12 60 AT15 36 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3120 50 AT15 - 3090 60 AT15 90 dents/teeth 745 N 18,5 Hz +/- 0,9 Hz 160 N.m (58%) 838 N 19,6 Hz +/- 1 Hz 180 N.m (65%)
P40 SBO 14 60 AT15 42 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3225 50 AT15 - 3135 791 N 19,1 Hz +/- 0,9 Hz 170 N.m (62%) 884 N 20,2 Hz +/- 1 Hz 190 N.m (69%)
SBO 16 60 AT15 40 dents/teeth / 50 AT15 - 3000
M
M
60 AT15 75 dents/teeth 928 N 20,7 Hz +/- 1,0 Hz 165 N.m (60%) 1012 N 21,6 Hz +/- 1,0 Hz 180 N.m (65%)
60 AT10 120 dents/teeth 631 N 21.6 Hz +/- 1,1 Hz 120 N.m (80%) 726 N 23,1 Hz +/- 1,1 Hz 138 N.m (92%)
SBO 10 60 AT15 30 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 2925 50 AT15 - 2895 873 N 20 Hz +/- 1,0 Hz 150 N.m (55%) 989 N 21,2 Hz +/- 1,0 Hz 170 N.m (62%)
SBO 12 60 AT15 36 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 2970 50 AT15 - 2940 60 AT15 72 dents/teeth
931 N 20,6 Hz +/- 1,0 Hz 160 N.m(58%) 1047 N 21,9 Hz +/- 1,0 Hz 180 N.m(65%)
P50 SBO 14 60 AT15 42 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3015 50 AT15 - 2985
SBO 18 60 AT15 45 dents/teeth / 50 AT15 - 2910 60 AT15 60 dents/teeth 1187 N 23,4 Hz +/- 1,2 Hz 170 N.m (62%) 1396 N 25,4 Hz +/- 1,3 Hz 200 N.m (72%)
L
L
SBO 22 60 AT15 55 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 2985 60 AT15 60 dents/teeth 1373 N 25,2Hz +/- 1,1 Hz 195 N.m (71%) 1584 N 27Hz +/- 1,1 Hz 225 N.m (80%)
60 AT10 60 dents/teeth / 50 AT10 - 3030
SBO 6 60 AT10 120 dents/teeth 631 N 21,6 Hz +/- 1,1 Hz 120 N.m (80%)
60 AT10 36 dents/teeth / 50 AT10 - 3000
SBO 8 /
P60
SBO 12 60 AT15 36 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 2865 50 AT15 - 2835 60 AT15 60 dents/teeth 963 N 21.0 Hz +/- 1,0 Hz 138 N.m (92%)
K
K
60 AT15 50 dents/teeth 1396 N 25,4 Hz +/- 1,3 Hz 165 N.m (55%)
Chassis roue GM / Wheel frame GM (Large model)
Pas Machine Poulie transfert preforme Courroie Universal Courroie Matrix Poulie arbre transmission Tension Fpt Fréquence (±5%) Tarage limiteur Tension Fpt Fréquence (±5%) Tarage limiteur
Pitch Preform transfer pulley Universal belt Matrix belt Transmission shaft pulley Frequency (± 5%) Limiter calibration Frequency (± 5%) Limiter calibration
SBO 16 60 AT15 40 dents 50 AT15 - 3330 50 AT15 - 3240 922 N 18,3 Hz +/- 0,9 Hz 165 N.m (60%) 1061 N 19,6 Hz +/- 1 Hz 190 N.m (69%)
J
J
SBO 18 60 AT15 45 dents 50 AT15 - 3360 50 AT15 - 3285
1117 N 20,1 Hz +/- 1,0 Hz 200 N.m(72%) 1229 N 21 Hz +/- 1,0 Hz 220 N.m(78%)
SBO 20 60 AT15 50 dents 50 AT15 - 3405 50 AT15 - 3330 60 AT15 75 dents/teeth
SBO 22 60 AT15 55 dents / 50 AT15 - 3360
1005 N 19 Hz +/- 1,0 Hz 180 N.m(65%) 1229 N 21 Hz +/- 1,0 Hz 220 N.m(78%)
P40 SBO 24 60 AT15 60 dents 50 AT15 - 3495 50 AT15 - 3405
SBO 26 60 AT15 65 dents / 50 AT15 - 3435 1061 N 19,6 Hz +/- 1 Hz 230 N.m (81%)
60 AT15 75 dents/teeth 1117 N 20,1 Hz +/- 1,0 Hz 200 N.m(72%)
SBO 28 60 AT15 70 dents / 50 AT15 - 3480
SBO 30 60 AT15 60 dents / 50 AT15 - 3285 60 AT15 60 dents/teeth 1466 N 23 Hz +/- 1,1 Hz 210N.m (75%)
SBO 34 60 AT15 85 dents 50 AT15 - 3705 50 AT15 - 3600 60 AT15 75 dents/teeth 1340 N 22 Hz +/- 1,0 Hz 240N.m (85%)
I
SBO 16 60 AT15 40 dents 50 AT15 - 3180 50 AT15 - 3120 1152 N 20,4 Hz +/- 1,0 Hz 165 N.m (60%)
I
SBO 18 60 AT15 45 dents 50 AT15 - 3225 50 AT15 - 3165
1257 N 21,3 Hz +/- 1,0 Hz 180 N.m(65%) 1466 N 23 Hz +/- 1,1 Hz 210 N.m (75%)
SBO 20 60 AT15 50 dents 50 AT15 - 3270 50 AT15 - 3195
P50 SBO 22 60 AT15 55 dents / 50 AT15 - 3240 60 AT15 60 dents/teeth 1466 N 23 Hz +/- 1,1 Hz 210N.m (75%)
1396 N 22,4 Hz +/- 1,1 Hz 200 N.m(72%)
SBO 26 60 AT15 65 dents / 50 AT15 - 3330 1606 N 24 Hz +/- 1,2 Hz 230 N.m (81%)
1466 N 23 Hz +/- 1,1 Hz 210 N.m (75%)
SBO 28 60 AT15 70 dents 50 AT15 - 3360
SBO 16 60 AT15 40 dents 50 AT15 - 3090 50 AT15 - 3045
1382 N 22,3 Hz +/- 1,1 Hz 165 N.m (60%)
P60 SBO 18 60 AT15 45 dents 50 AT15 - 3135 50 AT15 - 3090 60 AT15 50 dents/teeth
H
H
Chassis roue LM / Wheel frame LM

Pas Machine Poulie transfert preforme Courroie Matrix Transfert préforme Poulie arbre transmission Tension Fpt Fréquence (±5%) Tarage limiteur
Pitch Preform transfer pulley Matrix belt Preform transfer Transmission shaft pulley Frequency (± 5%) Limiter calibration
SBO 24 60 AT15 60 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3825 15 bras / 15 arms 1257 N 17,5 Hz +/- 0,9 Hz 180 N.m (65%)
SBO 26 60 AT15 64 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3855 16 bras / 16 arms 60 AT15 60 dents/teeth 1396 N 18,5 Hz +/- 0,9 Hz 200 N.m (72%)
G
G
P40 SBO 28 60 AT15 68 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3900 17 bras / 17 arms 1466 N 18,9 Hz +/- 0,95 Hz 210N.m (75%)
SBO 36 ... ... ...
60 AT15 60 dents/teeth ... ... ...
SBO 38 ... ... ...
ROUE FOUR SBO 24 60 AT15 75 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3945 15 bras / 15 arms 1326 N 18 Hz +/- 0,9 Hz 190 N.m (69%)
OVEN WHEEL
P50 SBO 26 60 AT15 80 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 4005 16 bras / 16 arms 60 AT15 60 dents/teeth
Couronne 99 dents module 4 1466 N 18,9 Hz +/- 0,95 Hz 210 N.m (75%)
Crown ring - 99 teeth - module 4 SBO 28 60 AT15 85 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 4050 17 bras / 17 arms
F
A-A
F
Chassis roue TM / Wheel frame TM
Pas Machine Poulie transfert preforme Courroie Universal Transfert préforme Poulie arbre transmission Tension Fpt Fréquence (±5%) Tarage limiteur
TRANSFERT PREFORME Pitch Preform transfer pulley Universal belt Preform transfer Transmission shaft pulley Frequency (± 5%) Limiter calibration
PREFORM TRANSFER
SBO 24
60 AT15 70 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 4005 14 bras / 14 arms
P40 SBO 26 60 AT15 75 dents 922 N 15 Hz +/- 0,9 Hz 165 N.m (60%)
Poulie 60 AT 15 voir tableau SBO 30 60 AT15 75 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 4005 15 bras / 15 arms
transmission liaison roue SBO 24
Pulley 60 AT 15 - See table 60 AT15 70 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3855 14 bras / 14 arms
-wheel connecting transmission-
P50 SBO 26 60 AT15 60 dents 1257 N 17.5 Hz +/- 0,9 Hz 180 N.m (65%)
E
E
SBO 30 60 AT15 75 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3945 15 bras / 15 arms
D
D
T5
Courroie dentée 50AT15/voir

tableau transmission liaison roue
Toothed belt - 50AT15/See table 07.08.2017 Ajout sbo 18chp;sbo 22chp;sbo 26;sbo28 552915 10
G.G
C
C
ARBRE TRANSMISSION FOUR Added: sbo 18chp;sbo 22chp;sbo 26;sbo28
OVEN TRANSMISSION SHAFT 20.11.2019 C.D Ajouter SBO8 MM CHP P60 A 2000 638599 11
T6
Courroie dentée 32AT10/1900 12 a
Toothed belt 32AT10/1900 Poulie 60 AT15 voir tableau 04.05.2020 C.D Mise a jour. Ajout planche CHP LINMOT 653383
transmission liaison roue

Pulley 60 AT15 - See table Date Name Description ECO Maj Ind Min Ind
to specification :
Poulie 40 AT10 33 dents Specification sheet :

B
Pulley 40 AT10 - 33 teeth
B
Pignon 33 dents module 4 Description Treatment :
Pinion - 33 teeth - module 4 Surface condition
ARBRE TRANSMISSON CINEMATIQUE TRANSMISSION MATRIX OVEN -

TRANSMISSION SHAFT ALIMENTATION PREFORME
PREFORM INFEED
Release date : 16/9/2021
TRANSMISSION KINEMATIC CHAIN
Poulie 40 AT10 66 dents Drawn by Date Scale
Pulley 40 AT10 - 66 teeth DOUDEMENT 04.05.2020 1:5

This drawing is SIDEL property and contains or may contain confidential information, including copyright, trade secrets and intellectual Number Maj Ind Min Ind Format Folio
A
Mass =
11505059- 12
A
a A0 1/3
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
A
J
K
F
O
I
L
G
P
B
E
TABLEAU DE CONTRÖLE PRETENTION OPTION CHP
OBTAINED FROM: PREFERENTIAL HEATING PRE-TENSION CONTROL PANEL
Point de contrôle Tx Fréquence 8

8
Check point Tx
Tension Fpt Frequency
T5 Voir le tableau transmission liaison roue

See wheel connecting transmission table
T6 267 N 36.0 Hz ± 1.8 Hz
T7 Voir tableau transmission boite à came

See cam box transmission table
OPTION CHP TABLEAUX TRANSMISSION LIAISON ROUE OPTION CHP ( BOITE A CAME)
PH OPTION PREFERENTIAL HEATING WHEEL CONNECTION TRANSMISSION TABLE( CAME BOX)
7
7
Chassis roue PM / Wheel frame PM
Pas Machine Cadence Transfert préforme Poulie transfert préforme Courroie Universal Poulie arbre transmission Tension Fpt Fréquence (±5%) Tarage limiteur
Pitch (bhm) Preform transfer Preform transfer pulley Universal belt Transmission shaft pulley Frequency (± 5%) Limiter calibration
1400 3 bras / 3 arms 60 AT10 30 dents/teeth 50 AT10 - 2680

SBO 6
P50
SBO 8
60 AT10 120 dents/teeth 2042 N 43.8 Hz ± 2.19 Hz 390 N.m (65%)
SBO 6
2000 ... ... ...
P60
SBO 8
2000 ... ... ...
B B 6
6
Chassis roue MM / Wheel frame MM
Pas Machine Cadence Transfert préforme Poulie transfert préforme Courroie Universal Courroie Matrix Poulie arbre transmission Tension Fpt Fréquence (±5%) Tarage limiteur
Pitch (bhm) Preform transfer Preform transfer pulley Universal belt Matrix belt Transmission shaft pulley Frequency (± 5%) Limiter calibration
1400
SBO 6 5 bras / 5 arms 60 AT15 35 dents/teeth / 50 AT15 -3030
2000
1400 6 bras / 6 arms 60 AT15 42 dents/teeth / 50 AT15 -3075
SBO 8
2000 6 bras / 6 arms 60 AT15 42 dents/teeth / 50 AT15 -3075
5 bras / 5 arms 60 AT15 35 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3075 /
1400
SBO 10 8 bras / 8 arms 60 AT15 56 dents/teeth / 50 AT15 - 3195
P50 60 AT15 84 dents/teeth 1945 N 35.3 Hz ± 1,8 Hz
2000 8 bras / 8 arms 60 AT15 56 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3240 50 AT15 - 3195
1400 6 bras / 6 arms 60 AT15 42 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3120 ... 5
5
SBO 12 2000 9 bras / 9 arms 60 AT15 63 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3285 /

2000 10 bras / 10 arms 60 AT15 70 dents/teeth / 50 AT15 - 3285
1400 7 bras / 7 arms 60 AT15 49 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3225 ...
SBO 14
390 N.m (65%)
1400 5 bras / 5 arms 60 AT15 42 dents/teeth / 50 AT15 -3075 60 AT15 84 dents/teeth 1945 N 30.0 Hz ± 1,5 Hz
SBO 6
2000 ... ... / ... ... ... ...
1400 6 bras / 6 arms 60 AT15 48 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3105 60 AT15 80 dents/teeth 2042 N 30.5 Hz ± 1,5 Hz
SBO 8
2000 6 bras / 6 arms 60 AT15 48 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3105 60 AT15 80 dents/teeth 2042 N 30.5 Hz ± 1,5 Hz
Courroie dentée Gen III 32AT10/voir 5 bras / 5 arms 60 AT15 42 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3120 / 60 AT15 84 dents/teeth 1945 N 30.0 Hz ± 1,5 Hz
1400
tableau transmission boite à came SBO 10 8 bras / 8 arms 60 AT15 64 dents/teeth / ... 60 AT15 80 dents/teeth 2042 N 30.5 Hz ± 1,5 Hz
Toothed belt Gen III 32AT10/See table P60
-cam box transmission-
2000 8 bras / 8 arms 60 AT15 64 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3285 50 AT15 - 3225 60 AT15 80 dents/teeth 2042 N 30.5 Hz ± 1,5 Hz
4
4
1400 6 bras / 6 arms 60 AT15 48 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3135 / 60 AT15 84 dents/teeth 1945 N 30.0 Hz ± 1,5 Hz
BOITE A CAME SBO 12 1400 8 bras / 8 arms 60 AT15 64 dents/teeth / 50 AT15 - 3255 60 AT15 80 dents/teeth 2042 N 30.0 Hz ± 1,5 Hz
CAM BOX 2000 10 bras / 10 arms 60 AT15 84 dents/teeth ... 50 AT15 - 3390 60 AT15 84 dents/teeth 1945 N 30.0 Hz ± 1,5 Hz
Poulie 40 AT10 20 dents 1400 7 bras / 7 arms 60 AT15 56 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3225 ... 60 AT15 84 dents/teeth 1945 N 30.0 Hz ± 1,5 Hz
SBO 14
Pulley 40 AT10 - 20 teeth 2000 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Chassis roue GM / Wheel frame GM

TRANSFERT PREFORME
PREFORM TRANSFER Pas Cadence Transfert préforme Poulie transfert préforme Courroie Universal Courroie Matrix Poulie arbre transmission Tension Fpt Fréquence (±5%) Tarage limiteur
Pitch
Machine (bhm) Preform transfer Preform transfer pulley Universal belt Matrix belt Transmission shaft pulley Frequency (± 5%) Limiter calibration

SBO 16
2000 10 bras / 10 arms 60 AT15 70 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3705 50 AT15 - 3570
1400 9 bras / 9 arms 60 AT15 63 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3570 ... 3
3
Poulie 60 AT15 voir tableau SBO 18

transmission liaison roue option CHP P50 2000 11 bras / 11 arms 60 AT17 77 dents/teeth ... 50 AT15 - 3600 60 AT15 84 dents/teeth 1945 N 26.5 Hz ± 1,3 Hz
Pulley 60 AT15 / See table 1400 10 bras / 10 arms 60 AT15 70 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3705 ...
wheel connection transmission CHP option
T5 SBO 20 390 N.m (65%)
2000 12 bras / 12 arms 60 AT15 84 dents/teeth ... 50 AT15 - 3675
SBO 22 2000 12 bras / 12 arms 60 AT15 84 dents/teeth ... 50 AT15 - 3675
SBO 16 1400 8 bras / 8 arms 60 AT15 64 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3570 ...
60 AT15 80 dents/teeth 2042 N 27.1 Hz ± 1,3 Hz
Courroie dentée 50AT15/voir tableau T7 P60 SBO 18 1400 9 bras / 9 arms 60 AT15 72 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3615 ...
transmission liaison roue option CHP SBO 20 1400 10 bras / 10 arms 60 AT15 72 dents/teeth 50 AT15 - 3570 ... 60 AT15 72 dents/teeth 2269 N 28.6 Hz ± 1,4 Hz
Toothed belt 50AT15/See table
wheel connection transmission CHP option 07.08.2017 G.G Ajout sbo 18chp;sbo 22chp;sbo 26;sbo28 552915 10
Added: sbo 18chp;sbo 22chp;sbo 26;sbo28
20.11.2019 C.D Ajouter SBO8 MM CHP P60 A 2000 638599 11
ARBRE TRANSMISSON FOUR

OVEN TRANSMISSION SHAFT 04.05.2020 C.D Mise a jour. Ajout planche CHP LINMOT 653383 12 a 2
2
Poulie 40 AT10 voir tableau Date Name Description ECO Maj Ind Min Ind
transmission boite à came TABLEAU TRANSMISSION BOITE A CAME Material : General tolerances according
Pulley 40 AT10 / See table CAM BOX TRANSMISSION TABLE to specification :
cam box transmission (unless otherwise stated)
Pas Poulie boite à came Poulie arbre transmission Courroie Tension Fpt Fréquence Specification sheet :
Pitch Cam box pulley Transmission shaft pulley Belt Frequency
P50 40 AT10 20 dents/teeth 40 AT10 120 dents/teeth 32 AT10 - 1500 Gen3 1110 N 127.5Hz ± 6.4 Hz Description Treatment :
B-B P60 40 AT10 20 dents/teeth 40 AT10 100 dents/teeth 32 AT10 - 1400 Gen3 1110 N 125.5Hz ± 6.3 Hz Surface condition :
CINEMATIQUE TRANSMISSION MATRIX OVEN -
Poulie 60 AT15 voir tableau
transmission liaison roue option CHP
Pulley 60 AT15 / See table
wheel connection transmission CHP option TRANSMISSION KINEMATIC CHAIN Release date : 16/9/2021
Drawn by Date Scale
1
1
DOUDEMENT 04.05.2020 1:10

Mass =
11505059- 12
a A1 2/3
A
J
K
F
O
I
L
G
P
B
E
OBTAINED FROM: TABLEAUX TRANSMISSION LIAISON ROUE OPTION CHP LINMOT
PREFERENTIAL HEATING LINMOT WHEEL CONNECTION TRANSMISSION TABLE
8
8
Chassis roue MM / Wheel frame MM
TABLEAU DE CONTRÔLE PRETENSION Pas Machine Cadence Poulie transfert préforme Transfert préforme Courroie Universal Courroie Matrix Poulie arbre transmission Tension Fpt Fréquence (±5%) Tarage limiteur
PRE-TENSION CONTROL PANEL Pitch (bhm) Preform transfer pulley Preform transfer Universal belt Matrix belt Transmission shaft pulley Frequency (± 5%) Limiter calibration
1400
Point de contrôle Tx REGLAGE LIMITEUR Tension Fpt Fréquence SBO 6 60 AT15 35 dents/teeth 5 bras / 5 arms / 50 AT15 -3030 681 N 17,6 Hz ± 0,9 Hz 130 N.m (89%)
Check point Tx Frequency 2000
Voir le tableau transmission liaison roue 1400 60 AT15 42 dents/teeth 6 bras / 6 arms / 50 AT15 -3075
T5 SBO 8 733 N 18,3 Hz ± 0,9 Hz 140 N.m (93%)
See wheel connecting transmission table 2000 60 AT15 42 dents/teeth 6 bras / 6 arms / 50 AT15 -3075
AVEC ALIMENTATION P50 60 AT15 56 dents/teeth 8 bras / 8 arms / 50 AT15 - 3195 60 AT15 84 dents/teeth
30Nm 288 N 28.0 Hz ± 1.8 Hz SBO 10 798 N 19,1 Hz ± 1 Hz 160 N.m (58%)
STANDARD 2000 60 AT15 56 dents/teeth 8 bras / 8 arms / 50 AT15 - 3195
T6 7
7
SBO 12 2000 60 AT15 70 dents/teeth 10 bras / 10 arms / 50 AT15 - 3285 798 N 19,1 Hz ± 1 Hz 160 N.m (58%)
AVEC 30Nm 288 N 28.0 Hz ± 1.8 Hz 1400 60 AT15 49 dents/teeth 8 bras / 8 arms / 50 AT15 - 3195
DEPOUSSIERAGE SBO 14 798 N 19,1 Hz ± 1 Hz 160 N.m (58%)
2000 60 AT15 70 dents/teeth 10 bras / 10 arms / 50 AT15 - 3285
1400 60 AT15 42 dents/teeth 5 bras / 5 arms / 50 AT15 -3075 60 AT15 84 dents/teeth 733 N 18,3 Hz ± 0,9 Hz 140 N.m (93%)
SBO 6
2000 ... ... / ... ... ... ... ...
1400 60 AT15 48 dents/teeth 6 bras / 6 arms / 50 AT15 - 3105 60 AT15 80 dents/teeth
SBO 8 733 N 18,3 Hz ± 0,9 Hz 140 N.m (93%)
1400 60 AT15 64 dents/teeth 8 bras / 8 arms / ... 60 AT15 80 dents/teeth
P60 SBO 10 748 N 18,7 Hz ± 0,95 Hz 150 N.m (55%)
SBO 12 785 N 18,9.0 Hz ± 0,95 Hz 150 N.m (55%)
1400 60 AT15 56 dents/teeth 7 bras / 7 arms / ... 60 AT15 84 dents/teeth ... ... ... 6
6
SBO 14
2000 ... ... / ... ... ... ... ...
Chassis roue GM / Wheel frame GM
Pas Machine Cadence Poulie transfert préforme Transfert préforme Courroie Universal Courroie Matrix Poulie arbre transmission Tension Fpt Fréquence (±5%) Tarage limiteur
Pitch (bhm) Preform transfer pulley Preform transfer Universal belt Matrix belt Transmission shaft pulley Frequency (± 5%) Limiter calibration
1400 60 AT15 56 dents/teeth 8 bras / 8 arms 50 AT15 - 3570 ...

SBO 16 898 N 18 Hz ± 0,9 Hz 180 N.m (65%)
2000 60 AT15 70 dents/teeth 10 bras / 10 arms 50 AT15 - 3705 50 AT15 - 3570
SBO 18 898 N 18 Hz ± 0,9 Hz 180 N.m (65%)
P50 2000 60 AT17 77 dents/teeth 11 bras / 11 arms ... 50 AT15 - 3600 60 AT15 84 dents/teeth 5
5

SBO 20 947 N 18,5 Hz ± 0,9 Hz 190 N.m (69%)
2000 60 AT15 84 dents/teeth 12 bras / 12 arms ... 50 AT15 - 3675
SBO 22 2000 60 AT15 84 dents/teeth 12 bras / 12 arms ... 50 AT15 - 3675 947 N 18,3 Hz ± 0,9 Hz 190 N.m (69%)
SBO 16 1400 60 AT15 64 dents/teeth 8 bras / 8 arms 50 AT15 - 3570 ... ... ... ...
60 AT15 80 dents/teeth
P60 SBO 18 1400 60 AT15 72 dents/teeth 9 bras / 9 arms 50 AT15 - 3615 ... ... ... ...
SBO 20 1400 60 AT15 72 dents/teeth 10 bras / 10 arms 50 AT15 - 3570 ... 60 AT15 72 dents/teeth ... ... ...
A-A
TRANSFERT PREFORME
PREFORM TRANSFER
Poulie 60 AT 15 voir tableau 4

4

Pulley 60 AT 15 - See table
3
3
T5
Courroie dentée 50AT15/voir

tableau transmission liaison roue
Toothed belt - 50AT15/See table
ARBRE TRANSMISSION FOUR 07.08.2017 G.G Ajout sbo 18chp;sbo 22chp;sbo 26;sbo28 552915 10
OVEN TRANSMISSION SHAFT
T6 Added: sbo 18chp;sbo 22chp;sbo 26;sbo28
Courroie dentée 32AT10/1900 20.11.2019 C.D Ajouter SBO8 MM CHP P60 A 2000 638599 11
Toothed belt 32AT10/1900 Poulie 60 AT15 voir tableau
Pulley 60 AT15 - See table 04.05.2020 C.D Mise a jour. Ajout planche CHP LINMOT 653383 12 a 2
2
Date Name Description ECO Maj Ind Min Ind

Poulie 40 AT10 33 dents to specification :
Pulley 40 AT10 - 33 teeth
Specification sheet :
Description Treatment :
Surface condition :
ALIMENTATION PREFORME (Unless otherwise stated)
PREFORM INFEED CINEMATIQUE TRANSMISSION MATRIX OVEN -
Poulie 40 AT10 66 dents

Pulley 40 AT10 - 66 teeth TRANSMISSION KINEMATIC CHAIN Release date : 16/9/2021
Drawn by Date Scale
1
1
DOUDEMENT 04.05.2020 1:10

Mass =
11505059- 12
a A1 3/3

MM Sbmxgm120235 v00 en GB

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MM Sbmxgm120235 v00 en GB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical documentation

Translation of original technical documentation

Sidel Matrix™ Blower Combi

SBO 20/20-20 P40 M

SIDEL Blowing & Services S.A.S

1. PRESENTATION OF THE MANUAL.......................................................................................................................................7

Revision 00 © SIDEL - Translation of original technical documentation 3 / 508

MP-B0026 : Replacing the mold support unit dampers....................................................................................... 125

4 / 508 © SIDEL - Translation of original technical documentation Revision 00

Revision 00 © SIDEL - Translation of original technical documentation 5 / 508

6 / 508 © SIDEL - Translation of original technical documentation Revision 00

1. PRESENTATION OF THE MANUAL

The manual provides:

1. 3. 1. Information contained in the procedure bars 000000

1. 3. 2. Contents of the procedure files 000000

The procedures contain the following information:

❍ Initial status of the machine

Revision 00 © SIDEL - Translation of original technical documentation 7 / 508

- Anticipate blocking and locking out machine rotation (if requested),

! Obligatory before carrying out a procedure.

Warning, advice, recommendation or possible consequences of an action.

8 / 508 © SIDEL - Translation of original technical documentation Revision 00

❍ Symbols and writing conventions

Step number in the procedure file

Indicates a condition that must be met in order to carry

The part of the machine at which the procedure will take

Number reference: identifies an assembly, a sub-

Color code: identifies and/or locates an assembly, a sub-

Alpha-numerical reference: identifies an assembly, a

Indicates the result of a step in the procedure

Highlight key words or phrases to make reading easier

Indicates a reference to another procedure or chapter

1. 4. Documents supplied with the machine 000000

Revision 00 © SIDEL - Translation of original technical documentation 9 / 508

Intentional blank page

10 / 508 © SIDEL - Translation of original technical documentation Revision 00

! When you have completed a procedure, always check the following

2. 2. 1. Safety recommendations 000000

Revision 00 © SIDEL - Translation of original technical documentation 11 / 508

Walking prohibited here Do not touch

12 / 508 © SIDEL - Translation of original technical documentation Revision 00

Warning. always read carefully Danger - risk of falls

Danger - risk of injury Danger - laser beam

Danger - risk of being crushed Warning - hot surface

Danger - risk of being dragged and crushed Danger - UV-C rays

Electrical hazard Warning - magnetic field

Danger - corrosive material

Breathing protection is obligatory Ear protection obligatory

Individual protection from falls obligatory Body protection obligatory

Refer to instruction manual Eye protection is obligatory

Hand protection obligatory Opaque safety glasses obligatory

Face protection obligatory Head protection obligatory

Foot protection obligatory Disposable shoe protection obligatory

Disposable breathing protection obligatory Disposable bouffant cap obligatory

Revision 00 © SIDEL - Translation of original technical documentation 13 / 508

2. 4. 1. Definitions of maintenance levels 000000

14 / 508 © SIDEL - Translation of original technical documentation Revision 00

❍ First level of maintenance (level 1)

Maintenance operations Operation particulars Personnel Information on the operation

2. 5. 1. Lubricant characteristics 000000

Revision 00 © SIDEL - Translation of original technical documentation 15 / 508

Current reference LUBRIPLATE FP 150 L

Current reference TOTAL FINAVESTAN A 100B